Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

His breathing was laboured as he climbed over a tree stump. His eyes hurt from the tears he tried to hold back. Nino wiped his face with the sleeve of his travelling cloak. He could smell the smoke in the air, and he imagined that he could hear the cries of the people he left behind.

Nino stumbled finally and muffled a pained cry as he landed on the soft, slightly wet forest floor. He tried to get up but fell down again shortly after he was back on his feet. They were shaking too much to be able to carry him. He gave up after the third try and moved around to look into the valley beneath him.

The tears were burning his eyes, and they overflowed when he closed his eyes. He couldn’t bear the sight of his burning home. He sniffled and hit half of his face into his knees as he pulled the coat tighter around himself. He rubbed his eyes angry with himself.

He had promised not to look back to run and run until he was safe and secure. But he wasn’t able to continue running and hoped that he was safe already.

Nino sniffed a little as he watched his home burning slowly to the ground. He knew that all people in there were dead and he felt terrible. His grandparents, his parents and all the few loyal servants they had. His gaze hardened as he thought about the yells and death that happened down there. His grandfather was pulling him aside and telling him to flee, never to look back and to remember that they loved him whatever happened.

Nino had wanted to stay. He hadn’t wanted to run and flee like a coward, but he had promised to do as they told him. Nino took a deep breath and stood up. He held onto the tree as he wobbled slightly and hissed in pain as he put weight on his left ankle. He probably sprained it when he had fallen down.

Nino wouldn’t let the others win, he wouldn’t forget his upbringing he vowed as he watched what was left of his home. He couldn’t go back to give his family a traditional burial. His eyes glowed slightly yellow before he closed them whispering a prayer to the old gods under his breath. It was the least he could do after all.

He took two steps deeper into the forest - a lot calmer now than earlier. Somehow he knew he was safe. He had wept for so long earlier. If someone were following him, they would have already found him. But they probably had thought the child of the cook was him. He felt a pang of guilt in his heart at that thought, but he knew he couldn’t change it now.

Nino ignored the pain in his ankle as he took step after step deeper into the forest to a slight stream. He used to play in the woods when he was younger. He had always felt protected here, and the feeling was back now again. He took off his leather boot when he arrived at the stream and put his slightly swollen foot into it.

He leant back and sighed deeply. He was sure that nothing was broken, but that didn’t make it much better. Nino looked into the sky and closed his eyes. He needed to decide what to do next and where to go.

He was brought out of his thoughts quite suddenly by a loud noise. His eyes opened, and he looked around with wide eyes.

Just a minute later he came face to face with another face. His eyes wandered over the small golden blue body of the dragon. Nino smiled softly and held out his hand for it to sniff at. Sensing no threat from Nino it came closer and Nino stroke the beautiful scales softly. It was a baby he realised when the small creature rolled himself up on his lap and let out a soft, whiny noise.

“Where is your mother?” he asked, and a sad thrill answered him. Nino caressed it’s head softly and bit his lips when pictures were forced into his mind. He realised that the small dragon had lost its mother because of a raid and he felt sorry for it. People had killed its mother because they were scared of them the little dragon on his lap had been able to flee just as he had been.

“Humans are silly,” he whispered and got an agreeing noise as an answer. His grandparents always had told him tales about the old gods, the dragons and magic all over the world, it had diminished when people began to fear the dragons, wars had begun, and people who believed in the old gods were hunted and killed just like his family.

“Stay with me?” he asked in a low voice and smiled when the dragon answered with a positive lilt and robbed down to weave his tail around his injured foot. There was a golden glow for a moment and heat before the pain subsided.

“Thank you. Do you have a name?” he asked, and again a picture of a rainbow was put into his mind. He laughed and nodded.

“Niji it is. How fitting of one of your kind. We need a safe place to sleep,” Nino decided when the pain was all gone, and he carefully pulled his foot back from the stream to put on his leather shoes again and stood. He put Niji on his shoulder and rubbed its head softly.

“Hold on tight, little one.”

Chapter Text

Nino woke up by the loud chatter of Niji and groaned. It was still dark outside, he observed which was good he supposed.

“Please calm down, Niji,” he told him. Nino hugged the small dragon baby and patted it until it calmed down again. “Had a bad dream?”

Niji cuddled up beside him, and he kissed its head. “I know you want to cuddle, but I actually have to get up and pray then I have to look for food for your little tummy don’t I? Or will you actually manage to catch your own food?”

A thrill was all the answer he got. Niji tumbled off his lap to try to catch its tail.

Nino rolled his eyes but laughed out loud as he stood up. “Thought so.” He went outside the little hole they used as a hide-out for now to greet the sun. He sat down and closed his eyes to say his morning prayers and think back to the last few days.

—

Niji had rolled himself around his neck. It was light luckily and warm. The best part was that he wasn’t alone anymore, so that was good. Niji had fallen asleep shortly after Nino had started on the trek through the forest again in search of somewhere they were safe.

Nino hid into the underwood so that he wasn’t seen but was able to keep track of the stream. He had been scared to go too deep into the forest because water would be vital for them to survive. Shortly before it was dark, he found a cave.

Nino hadn’t been sure if it was safe to enter it, but it was getting dark, and therefore it was dangerous to go any further, and he knew that he wouldn’t hold up much longer. He was getting tired.

Niji roused a bit and nudged his cheek with its snout. The small dragon huffed a bit, and a warm swish of breath ran over his face.

“You think it’s safe?” he asked as silently as he could.

There was another nudge to his cheek, and Nino decided to take that as a yes. Niji was born in the forest, so he trusted him. Also, Nino really wasn’t looking forward to trudging through the forest in the darkness. So he decided to take a chance.

Nino filled up his water flask with the clear water and freed his small pouch from his belt. He opened it and pulled out a few nuts and berries to eat dinner and feed Niji who sniffed at the things he offered him and scrunched up its nose.

“I know you normally eat insects or fish. But it’s all I have. Either you eat this, hunt or go hungry,” he scolded lightly. Niji looked from him to the food and back again and then sank down on the stone but ate what there was. Afterwards, it fell asleep in his arms, and Nino tried to calm his heart to that he would be able to sleep as well.

—

That’s where they still were. Nino had looked around and decided it was the safest they could get right now. Niji was still too small to travel long distances, and Nino knew he was still distraught deep in his mind. He needed to plan. Otherwise, he could end up dead very early.

Nino opened his eyes again as he felt the warm rays of sunshine on his face. Niji was outside looking into the stream and trying to catch one of the fishes swimming in there. A giggle tore out of him when instead of grabbing the fish with its paw it fell head first into the stream with a panicked shriek.

Nino jumped to his feet to run to the water and catch the small dragon before the current could take it. It thrilled unhappily, and Nino took it on his shoulder.

“Hold on tight,” he asked the dragon and waited until it had shifted around him and he felt the small claws in his shoulder.

Nino left the cold water and took a few steps to the left. He knelt down and opened pulled out a rope. “I explained to you already that I built this to catch your beloved fishes,” he explained in amusement and lifted the cage of the water. In there were a few fishes for him and Niji, and before he was able to pull them out, Niji caught one of the fishes and scuttled away with its catch, devouring it.

“Silly kid.”

Nino rolled his eyes and started to prepare breakfast for himself, leaving a bit out for Niji who eat its fill and then rolled up beside him to take a nap. Nino tickled its tummy but then let it sleep peacefully. He put his cloak over the small creature and sat leant back against the stones of the mountain the cave was in. He pulled over his pack to look through it.

Nino sighed as he pulled out a map and carefully read it. His grandfather had shoved the bag into his arms before forcing him to leave and run. It had all the necessities he would need for travelling.

The books about the old kings and Gods were there together with all the maps of their country. Nino didn’t know how old they were exactly, but he hoped that it was still kind of recent. He looked over at Niji and smiled. He probably should make sure that he brought Niji to its kind before going to the cities of mankind. He didn’t want to bring it into danger. Also, he didn’t feel old enough to care for another being really.

He leant back and looked into the sky. He was just sure that Niji won’t agree with him. The baby dragon had already gotten too used to him. But that was for another time. First, he needed to ponder where the next safe nest could be. The one above this forest had been Niji’s home, and as far as Niji had shown him, it had already been thoroughly destroyed.

“Gods, please show me my destiny. I feel lost and don’t know where to go anymore,” he whispered and closed his eyes. He just wished he had a bit of guidance for his future steps.

Chapter Text

Nino packed all of his things up, only leaving the old map his grandfather had packed for him outside. It had taken him a few days until he was able to make sense out of it but now he was quite sure he knew where he stayed and where the next dragon horst should be located. He just hoped it wasn’t raided.

“Niji come, we have to leave. It’s getting colder, and it’s not safe out here any more. Bears might come looking for a place to stay during the winter and food will get scarce,” he explained and went to his makeshift cage to pick it up. The fishes would hold up for a few days for Niji he supposed and for himself, he had still a bit of dried meat and berries.

Nino preferred plants and berries to fish or meat because that was the way he had been raised up. He honoured all kinds of life and only took what he needed to survive and sometimes that included meat. Nino knew Niji needed meat to survive though, so even if it hurt him to take more than one for himself, he carefully packed them all in a paper. He was sure that Niji would be able to finish them before they got bad.

A thrill warned him that Niji was coming up to him and he smiled when the small dragon made himself comfortable around his neck and shoulders.

“Are you comfortable?” he asked the dragon that nuzzled its snout at his cheek. “Good then let's go ne?”

Nino stroked the warm head softly as he shouldered his bag carefully as not to hit Niji and left the clearing that had been their home for the last few days. Nino looked back once again and imagined that he still could see the smoke from the fire that destroyed his home. Nino closed his eyes as he fought against his tears and the memories and then turned around to take the first steps away from here.

Niji cried out sadly and in distress as it curled around him even closer. For Niji it was the first time it would leave its home as well.

—

Niji was warm around his shoulders, and it was a comfortable presence at his side.

“Niji, if we meet humans can you change your form already or get invisible?”

It licked his cheek shoot its head with an almost inaudible thrill.

Nino smiled and caressed its head. “Don’t be sad. You are still a baby after all. You will learn to fly when you get older. We have to be careful that we are not seen by any other people then though. So we will be slower as I can’t step on the road.”

Niji moved around him a bit nervously at those words.

“Aww don’t be scared. I’m used with walking through the forest and will be careful, ne? Also, you can help me to locate the water because I can’t follow the river as well. If there are humans they are either on the path or at the river,” he explained and played with the tail of the dragon.

Niji settled down beside him again and calmed down.

Nino felt the baby fell to sleep again soon after and he moved his head to kiss its head. He looked at the golden tail around his hand and smiled.

He should be scared of it but Niji was so cute and small that he just wanted to protect it. Also, his family had always told him to trust his instincts, and they told him that he was safe with Niji.

Niji wouldn’t hurt him and neither would any other dragon. He smiled as he looked at his map and stroke their crest.

—

The dragon horst was a two day march away but since Nino needed to take more breaks with Niji and couldn’t take the well-trodden path it took him almost a week until he arrived the bottom of the mountain. He lifted his head to look up until the top to perhaps see if there were dragon above. The thought of climbing it up to be disappointed was tiring but since there were only a few children around and the adults would know to hide their presence he couldn’t see any.

Nino shrugged and tied the bag tighter around himself. “Niji can you climb?”

As an answer, the small dragon held on tighter.

Nino sighed since he had almost thought that would be the answer but stroked the head softly so that the small dragon wouldn’t be sad. “It’s okay. Just make sure that you will hold on tight. I can’t hold you and climb at the same time.”

Nino winced when he felt the claws digging into his skin, but at least the dragon did as it was told and Nino started to climb up the mountain. He hoped that the dragons - if there were any - would sense one of their kin and help them reach the top and not kill him on sight.

The climb up was hard just as Nino had expected. Yes, he had been outside quite often because his parents had told him to make his body stronger. But he had also always been quite lazy, and climbing mountains were probably never easy. Even less when he had to do it with a baby dragon on his back. The harsh winter air made it hard to grab the juts that made the climb possible, to begin with.

Niji cried out now and then or touched his cheek with its snout and Nino was thankful for the energy the dragon gave him without realising. Still, the way to the top was long. Longer than Nino had thought.

He swore when his frozen fingers slipped from the cold stone and his second hand was too weak to hold him and Niji up. Still, he tried to find a new hold as soon as he realised that he was falling backwards.

Niji cried out in fear when Nino fell, and Nino grabbed the small dragon to curl around it. If he fell and held Niji like that at least the dragon might survive, he thought as he closed his eyes to brace himself.

Chapter Text

Kazunari woke up to the agitated chirping of Niji. He groaned when he tried to sit up, but all of his body hurt badly.

‘What happened?’ he thought in utter confusion and lifted his hand. Even that hurt badly. He groaned as he managed to open his eyes just to be face to face with Niji.

“Niji please,” he muttered and tried to push it away at least a bit. He looked into the sun shining down to him and finally managed to sit up a little. Kazunari groaned in pain and pressed his eyes close for a second to get his bearings back.

“What happened?” he asked slowly not really expecting an answer. He jumped in shock when he got one.

“You fell.” The voice was booming and seemed to come from everywhere. He held his head as it hurt badly suddenly. He breathed in deeply and looked around.

“And why am I alive? Or am I dead?”

“You are very much alive little prince. Your time hasn’t come yet. You rescued our youngling so of course, we couldn’t let you die. But the cry of the fledgeling was weak, so we didn’t hear earlier. I’m sorry.”

Kazu needed a while to process the words, and when he did, he sat up straight. “Fledgling? Youngling? What? Am I…” he stopped talking when laughter erupted in his head.

“Yes, young prince. You are in our realm. We allowed you entry here.”

“Thank you,” he whispered slowly. He was glad that they rescued his life. He really was. He would just be happier if he wouldn’t hurt so much. The fall had probably been pretty bad.

“You should rest. You are hurt. You protected the fledgeling. We weren’t even sure you would be able to wake up again. But it shows how tough you are, little prince.”

“I’m called Kazunari. Don’t call me little prince,” he muttered, but the laugh echoing in his head told him the voice wouldn’t stop calling him that. He sighed and leant back against the wall behind him.

He looked around a bit more before smiling when Niji found its place on his lap. “Are you okay?” he asked the baby dragon.

It chirped happily, and he petted it softly. He was happy that he had been able to rescue it at least. He closed his eyes. It was comfortable and warm here, he thought as he fell asleep against the rock.

—

The next time he woke up he was greeted by an older dragon. He rubbed his face to wake up thoroughly and was surprised that Niji had left its place on his lap.

“The fledgeling is playing at the stream.”

“Oh, okay,” he whispered and coughed a little. He blinked when a bowl filled with fresh water appeared before his eyes and the dragon in front of him moved around. The dragon changed its appearance, and Kazu was glad when it got smaller. It was more comfortable to look at it like that than in its standard form.

Kazunari drank the water, closing his eyes as he felt more and more refreshed with each sip.

“Are you feeling better?”

“A little. My throat was parched,” Kazunari agreed. The dragon seemed to smile at his words.

“You are really strong, little prince.”

Kazunari laughed at those words and shook his head. “I’m clearly not. I almost died climbing a mountain.”

“A difficult climb,” the dragon answered before bowing its head slightly. “But I forgot to introduce myself. I’m called Morga, and you are in my lair. We are happy to welcome you here.”

“I won’t stay long. I’m glad that you allowed me to stay here for so long. But I don’t belong into your realm. I belong in my world, and I need to go there to see what will await me.”

“You are very welcome here, little prince. And your kind belongs here just as much as we do,” the dragon explained in a soft voice, and somehow Kazunari decided that it was probably female.

“I…”

“You don’t have to answer now. But reconsider leaving so soon. It will be a harsh winter down there.”

Kazu hummed in an answer and leant back. He felt tired again.

“Your body is recovering, I see. Drink a bit more and then go back to sleep. Next time you awake, you should be able to walk and eat again.”

“Thank you… But what exactly happened when I fell?”

“Your body broke, and for a moment you were closer to death than to alive. We induced your body in sleep for a few days to merge your bones back together. That’s why it hurts so much. It’s still not completely healed. But as I said you are strong, and your body is tough. Just as it should be for one of your kind.”

Kazunari winced when he heard that and closed his eyes with a hiss. That explained why his body hurt as it did. Normally his injuries healed fast. Of course, those felt stiff for a moment afterwards, but he had never experienced something like this before.

“What about Niji?”

“You protected the fledgeling with your body. It was completely fine.”

“That’s good. I wanted to bring it home. It shouldn’t be alone. No baby should be alone.”

“It had never been alone in your care,” the voice said as he closed his eyes. “But sleep now. We’ll talk more on a later date,” Morga promised.

Nino slid down at the wall and moved to his side putting his head on his arm as he fell asleep. He felt something sliding over his body as the pain disappeared for the moment. He was sure that it would come back as soon as he woke once more but for now, it was like heaven.

Niji found its way to his side again as he slept and he opened his eyes for a small moment when he felt Niji shuffle closer and put an arm around the little dragon to hold it close. He would miss Niji when he was on his own again, but he knew it was better cared for here.

Chapter Text

Kazu sat just outside of the cave where Morga had brought him to rest and treat his wounds. His body felt fine again, and all the bones inside his body were mended and healed finally. It was time to leave.

Kazu ruffled his hair and rubbed his face he wanted to say goodbye to Niji and tell the small dragon to behave and grow strong here with its friends. But it was probably better to leave without it knowing.

He stood up to go back and get his small bag and leave. When Kazu turned around, he wasn’t that surprised to be eyes to eyes with Morga.

“Already leaving little prince?” the dragon asked.

He shrugged and held the strap tightly between his hands. “I don’t belong here.”

“Ridiculous. You belong here the same as we do.”

Kazu stopped at what he was doing and watched the dragon in confusion. “I don’t understand,” he whispered in the end. He was honestly confused and overwhelmed.

Yes, his grandfather told him everything about the old Gods, the dragons and the magic surrounding these creatures but he didn’t understand where his place ins this all was.

The dragon chuckled at his confusion. “It’s surprising you did so well without knowing much.”

“My grandfather gave me these old maps. He got them from his parents, he said. Your nest was written in there, and he taught me not to be scared of dragons. I just wanted to make sure that Niji is safe with its family. It’s hard to live without a family,” he explained sadly.

“And what is your goal now little prince?”

Kazu shrugged in confusion as he tried to think of something. But his head was empty right now. There was a loud sigh that resonated in his body.

“What do you know about the history of your family?” Morga finally asked.

Kazu nibbled on his lower lip and sat down as he was moved further into the cave again. He leant against the rock and frowned in confusion.

“My great-grandparents believed strongly in the old ways, and the old Gods and the new king decided to forbid that belief. They didn’t want to stop practising the ways and were killed. My grandparents were able to flee. Therefore from that on we lived in that small hut deep inside the woods.”

Kazu rubbed his face thoughtfully. “I grew up with those beliefs. I know that the dragons are there to protect the world from the dark elements that look to enslave humans and destroy the world. But somehow people got it confused and thought you would destroy us. I also know that you can do magic as you are deeply magical beasts.”

“The second part is true. The first one not so much. I’m surprised your family never told you,” Morga said thoughtfully and settled down. She folded her wings, and Kazu was surprised at how small she could make herself.

“Then you are in for a History lesson. Would you agree to stay for a little bit longer?”

“I think I have no choice,” Kazu said with a giggle as Niji found its way to them and settled down on his lap. It rolled up, and Kazu caressed it’s back until it fell asleep. He loved that dragon so much.

“Niji has chosen you and bonded with you it seemed,” Morga said, and Kazu blinked.

“What?”

“I will explain it later. Now first I should tell you who you are since your family neglected it. Probably to protect you, silly humans.”

Nino wanted to argue, but he realised that he couldn’t say anything. He was confused and didn’t know what was wrong and what was right.

— 100 years ago —

“They are killing the dragons,” the woman, Ninomiya Kazumi, said with a sorrowful look in her eyes as she observed the flying creatures on the sky. There were less which each day. They were hiding from the humans that were trying to hunt them down.

Warm hands laid down on her shoulders, and she leant back against her husband. “Is it that bad?” he asked.

Kazumi rolled her eyes and pulled the loose folds of her kimono tighter around herself.

“Don’t tell me you aren’t feeling more tired lately?”

“Yes, I do, my love,” Aoki said and took one of her hands in his own. The fingers were slimmer now and looked older. Of course, he felt the magic surrounding them swindle down. But he had thought that most dragons just vanished to be safer again.

“Dark clouds are rising,” Kazumi added with a sigh and stepped out from his embrace when she heard a loud thrill. Her small golden dragon had come back.

A light engulfed her and Aoki stepped back to leave her be for the moment. His steps were slower than they used to be. His old age finally caught up with him - another sign that their time was slowly over.

In the beginning, he and Kazumi had both thought that it was just their time. Their child was old enough to step up to take the reign of their beloved kingdom. But as the dark clouds grew closer and there was talk about a warrior fighting his way through their city. He didn’t know if they could withstand the onslaught, not if more dragons lost their lives.

Before he could enter his room, he heard quick steps and turned around. “Kazumi, what’s wrong?”

“They’ll arrive at the end of the week. Kaori showed me where they were right now. We don’t have much time,” she explained hurriedly.

“Tell Kazuki to get the bags we prepared and leave with his family. I want them to be as safe as they could be.”

Aoki nodded and did as he was told. He watched his son and his family leave. He prayed to the Gods to protect them. There was nothing more that they could do.

—

Like Kaori had said at the end of the week the dark knight arrived. It was a short fight since they had sent all surviving dragons that swore to protect their family to hide in their nests. Only Kaori and Naoki, Aoki’s dragon, stayed with them.

It never crossed the minds of their bonded dragons to leave them even if it meant that they would be killed. They didn’t know which kind of weapon they used, but the dragons seemed to be vulnerable to them.

When Naoki was killed, Aoki felt as if he was stabbed. Kazumi sat beside him and took his hand in his own.

“We will die, right?” he asked as she calmly nodded.

“I’m sorry for not telling you earlier. But I didn’t want to see the pain in your eyes,” she whispered. She called Kaori to them and hugged her small dragon close. Kaori was no dragon that would be useful in a fight. “Flee?” She asked her. But the dragon shook her head. Kazumi closed her eyes at that. She had already known that answer, but she wanted to try nevertheless.

“Will the children be safe?”

“Kazuki will live a long life and will have made peace with everything when he dies,” she promised.

“That’s good.”

“The kingdom?”

“Will get a new king. It will be a new time I can’t tell much about it because it won’t concern us. I’m sorry.”

Aoki nodded and closed his eyes as he squeezed her soft hand in his own. He lifted it to his lips to kiss the fingers lovingly.

Kazumi leant against him and closed her eyes. They stayed like that and when their room was invaded the only thing the strangers could identify were their deaths.

— Today —

“You are the heir of the Ninomiya kingdom, Kazunari,” Morga ended, and he blinked in utter confusion.

“What? But…”

“We are magical beings, Kazunari, that’s true. And your family hid to be safe. But you are just as magical. I don’t know why your family thought it better not to teach you the basics. Even without us dragons you are able to use your magical abilites. Not for grand things but for small things. It’s in your blood.”

“My parents couldn’t use magic.”

“They never learnt. Your grandparents didn’t teach them either. But since you already bonded with Niji, you need to learn how to use your magical abilities. It’s better for Niji as well.”

“What do you mean with bonded?” Kazu asked finally and caressed Niji’s head when it moved on top of him. He looked at it until it calmed down and smiled a little.

“Niji belongs to you, and you belong to Niji. I’m sorry little prince, but your lives are combined now. You can use great power if taught correctly. You will be able to live a long life but you have protected Niji and Niji will protect you. If one of you are hurt the other will feel the pain, if one dies, you will feel it as well. Niji will die when you die. If Niji dies it will be as if a part of you dies,” Morga explained carefully.

“How did this work? I never agreed to a bond or anything.”

“It’s not your choice. We dragons decide if we want to bond to your kind. Your blood calls out to us dragons and Niji decided to bond with you. Niji will follow you every where because it decided to do so. If you leave Niji alone for a long while or won’t allow it to be close to you. Niji will die out of grief.”

Kazu’s eyes widened at those words, and he hugged the dragon closer. He didn’t want the small dragon to die.

“How do I learn?” he asked finally. He didn’t know what he should do in future, but for now, he should probably learn so that Niji would get stronger and stronger.

“We can teach you, little prince.”

“Please don’t call me that. I’m not a prince, I never was.”

“It’s your fate, little prince. And I will call you as I deem right.”

Kazu rolled his eyes but nodded. It wasn’t as if he could change the mind of a dragon. He had learnt that the hard way already with Niji because he was quite sure that he had told the baby dragon that he wanted to bring it home where it was safe, and it decided to bond with him instead.

“I will leave you alone with your thoughts, little prince. And one recommendation: Don’t try to forget everything it will haunt you and only hurt more.”

Chapter Text

Kazu sighed softly as he hugged Niji close to his body. He caressed the head of the chirping dragon and watched it carefully.

“You are such a brat. I told you I would bring you home, and still, you decide to bond with me?” he scolded it slightly.

Niji seemed to grin at his words and moved his tail happily.

“I wasn’t complimenting you,” Nino said with a roll of his eyes. Niji looked at him with big eyes and then jumped on him. Kazu groaned as he felt the body collide with his and fell back against the wall. He groaned as he hit the back of his head and put a hand to the back of it. He frowned when he realised that he was bleeding and shook his head. “Ouch,” he mumbled.

Niji chirped sadly and rubbed its face against his shoulder. Nino sighed and caressed his head again lovingly when he felt the magic of the dragon flew through his body and healed the small cut on his head.

“Thank you Niji,” he whispered and closed his eyes to remember the feeling of the magic flowing inside of his body. It had felt so familiar and comfortable. His body seemed to respond to Niji's magic, and he felt his fingers twitch at it.

Perhaps magic was closer to him than he had allowed himself to think. He sighed and lied down with Niji in his arms. He needed to think about everything that he learnt today.

“Did you know who I am, Niji? When we met? Is it why you showed yourself to me and healed me?” he asked.

Niji chirped and nodded slightly. A warm blow of air went over his face when it snorted. Kazu smiled and observed it slowly.

“So you knew I wouldn’t mean any harm, huh? I was surprised, but I thought that you weren’t able to hide because you were too small.”

Niji shrugged a bit, and Nino interpreted that as being half right. Niji wasn’t as strong yet since it was quite young. But it wasn’t as if it were utterly helpless. Kazu should have known. When they travelled together, they would probably get stronger together. But first, he needed to understand what his heritage meant.

“I wonder why my parents never told me about their real past. Why did they lie?” he asked slowly and hid his face at Niji’s warm skin.

The dragon chirped comfortingly, and Nino felt the warmth spread throughout him. It was possible that his family just wanted to live in peace and safety and that would be okay, he thought. He didn’t know why he wasn’t allowed to feel that way, but perhaps he still could go back… or not. Kazu shuddered as the memory of the fire he had seen from far away, and he was scared to go there and about what would meet him there.

“There is no chance that my parents survived somehow is there?” he asked almost inaudibly. Niji chirped and nudged his cheek.

“Stop it!” Kazu giggled because it tickled and he hugged Niji close as he closed his eyes and saw the burnt bodies of his family. Tears ran down his cheeks, and he hid his face against the skin of the dragon. He knew that he was only hoping for a miracle. He knew what the truth was and he was sure that the dragons here would be able to tell him what had happened, but he didn’t want to ask.

Kazu sighed and kissed the soft skin of Niji’s head. “Let’s try to get some sleep. If Morga wants to train me from tomorrow on I should be fit, or she will kill me, probably,” he mumbled. Niji chirped softly, and Kazu swore that it sounded just like a giggle.

—

Kazu fell asleep soon after talking with Niji and was awoken early by Niji again. He caressed Niji’s head and smiled when Niji nudged his face before letting it go since it wanted to go outside play with its friends or whatever Niji did when it was out.

Kazu didn’t know what Niji did in its free time, but he knew that he would get answers when he asked. But it was Niji’s decision to do what it wanted.

Kazu sighed and got up when he realised that the sun was about to come up. He left the cave and went to the small river to wash before wearing a new kimono. He had been provided by a few of those by the dragons, and they were made of fine cloth. They were really beautiful, and Kazu thought they were mostly too beautiful for him, so he tended to choose only the ones without many decorations.

He made sure that the kimono was closed tightly before leaving again and sat on a small stone close to the river in the sun. He closed his eyes to clear his mind and use the beginning morning for his prayers.

Just as he had finished Morga appeared behind him. Kazu opened his eyes and looked at the dragon with a smile.

“So did you decide, little prince?”

“Yes. I can’t leave Niji alone. Also, I want to do the best I can to make sure that you can live in peace again,” he said slowly and then bowed in front of the big creature.

“I’d like you to teach me,” he continued looking up again.

“Very well. Then follow me, little prince. I will teach you for now. You and Niji can reconnect tonight and train together on a later date.”

“What about Niji?”

“Niji is learning about our ways,” Morga explained.

Kazu smiled at that and inclined his head. “I bet he has a lot of fun.”

“Indeed.”

Kazu smiled at the thought and followed Morga to a free space. He was surprised how big this place was, but he was almost sure that it had a lot to do with the dragon’s magic surrounding it all.

“Very smart,” Morga said, and Kazu looked up surprised.

“What?”

“I’m sorry little prince. But we can read your thoughts,” she explained.

Kazu hummed softly in understanding.

“Sit down little prince. First, you need to understand our history,” the dragon began, and Kazu sat down. He put his legs to his chest and put his head on top of his knees.

He watched as Morga sat down in front of him and observed the big dragon. He was amazed that they could hide in their world so easily as big as they were.

He listened to Morga’s tale of the old Gods that he already knew from his grandparents. He smiled as he closed his eyes. He had always loved to hear about them, and with Morga, he could see the happenings right in front of his eyes.

Chapter Text

Kazu stood at the top of the mountain and looked down to the vast fields under him. He took a deep breath as he put a strand of hair behind his ear. The sun shone brightly and warmly down on him, but he could feel the shift that had begun in the world slowly coming closer and settling around them. The dragons slowly but surely had left their nests and housings, fleeing from oppressive lords who have all but forgotten about their old ways.

“Doesn’t it hurt?” he asked when he felt Morga settling down behind him. “Seeing them destroying the thing you gifted them? Forgetting about the debt we have to you?”

The dragon laughed, and he finally turned around to meet with warm eyes that looked him over softly. “Little Prince, we don’t need to be praised like Gods. So we don’t mind. We just wanted to live peacefully with you humans. So no we do not think you have a debt to us. We created this world as you have learnt and you came to populate it.”

Kazunari nodded but let out a sigh. For him, they were still the old Gods he learnt so much about. Even if he now knew them for years already. He smiled when he heard the big thrill of Niji and looked up to see the dragon descend from the sky.

Niji draped itself around his shoulders, and Kazunari closed his eyes as warmth enveloped him. Niji was always so warm and just very comfortable to be with.

“Little Prince, it’s time to go,” Morga said, making Kazu look at her again. A deep frown settled on his face. He didn’t want to go. He wanted to protest and stay here protected by the dragons that had become his family. But before he could even voice out his thoughts Morga’s laugh settled on him.

“Little Prince… Don’t be sad. Yes, you belong to us, but you also belong to humankind. You have grown up into a fine man, and I don’t think we taught you badly, did we?”

Kazunari shook his head and a soft smile at her words. “No you taught me well,” he replied and stroked Niji’s head as it butted against him. “I have to face the world after hiding here,” he whispered and looked down again.

Still, Kazunari didn’t know if he wanted to go down there get to know the people that killed his family and hunted down these beautiful creatures. He couldn’t believe that they were worth the hope Morga and the rest put into them, but he would see for himself.

He felt a push from Morga against his back and stumbled a little before catching his footing. “Go now and don’t forget what we taught you. We will come for your help if you need it, and you are welcome here if you find the world unfit for your taste.”

Kazunari laughed a little but nodded. He stroked down the folds of his garments. He had gotten used to the fine materials of the kimonos he had worn here. They had been perfect for all kinds of weathers cool in summer and warm in winter. They had always been soft to the touch and were so light that he sometimes forgot that he was wearing such elaborate clothing at all.

Sadly, the memories had come back way too soon each time. He hadn’t been allowed to be idle here as they all made sure to train him to fight with a sword and without it, the same with his magic and the magic of the dragons.

The air shifted around him, and Niji and Kazunari knew without looking that Morga has left them alone. Kazu shuddered a bit at the thought that the old dragon was gone now after three years being around her almost all the time.

Kazunari looked at Niji and smiled when the bright sun reflected in its eyes. “Do you want to stay with me or do you want to fly and meet me down there?” he asked finally.

In answer, Niji buried its snout against his neck making the young man laugh out loud. It tickled a little. “Okay but please make yourself small and lighter,” he asked and relaxed when light engulfed Niji, and it changed into a small lizard curled itself around his arm.

Kazu made sure that his small bag was safe around him. He had only things inside that he thought were necessary for their travels. Most of his important tokens were still here and would stay here until he settled down somewhere. If needed Niji would be able to retrieve them quickly.

Kazu had only taken a necklace his parents had given him for the last birthday they had been together and the signet ring of his family.

Niji thrilled in his mind, and Kazu grinned. Yes, he was taking his sweet time but saying goodbye to this was harder than with his own home. Then it had been different since everything had happened so fast that he hadn’t been able to process it.

But it was time now, Kazu thought and finally started the track down to from the mountain he had called home for the last years. It was more comfortable now that his muscles were more used to climbing over uneven ground and it didn’t take long until he was on the ground again.

—

Niji moved when they were down and entered a forest to drape itself around his neck again.

Kazu was glad that Niji had decided to stay close for now. He felt safer with the dragon close by. He felt like a stranger in his world, like something that didn’t belong.

“You have to make sure to hide when we come across of humans,” he mumbled to the dragon who made an offended noise. Kazu giggled softly and patted its head to calm it down. He was just joking after all.

They walked for hours listening for any sounds and Kazu was appalled as to how little forest animals he could here. It was close to winter, so Kazu supposed it was because of that. They could have travelled to warmer areas. But to be honest, he wasn’t so sure about it.

Niji nipped at his ear, making him groan loudly.

“Yes, yes. I’m looking for faults. Let me be grouchy for today. I had to leave home,” he grumbled. Then he sighed when he felt Niji’s magic as the dragon tried to calm him down. “I’m not depressed Niji. Please stop. It’s normal to feel a little sad. You are sad yourself aren’t you?”

Kazu smiled as Niji calmed down again. He had to be careful as not to make the dragon upset. Its emotions were still a little bit unstable as it was growing up and just finding its self.

Niji had grown a lot during the time with its kind. Kazu had been honestly surprised, but Morga had explained that it was normal for a dragon to do a sudden growth spurt. More so now that Niji had bounded with him. Another reason Kazu would have loved to stay with the dragons until Niji was alright.

“Will you be alright with sleeping outside today?” Kazu asked thoughtfully as it grew dark. They weren’t close to a human village yet. It seemed as if people tried not to get too close to the mountains here and the forest.

Kazu thought it was silly since the mountains would mean protection for a village and the forest hid an abundance of fruits to consume as well as a clean water resource. He was sure he would learn more tomorrow though. It shouldn’t be longer than a day at foot for him to find the first group of people. At least he hoped so.

Kazu made sure that Niji was alright and close to him as he finally heard the first sounds of wilderness and followed it in hope to find a river or something to follow.

Chapter Text

Kazu woke up by sounds coming from the forest. He had finally found a strip of grass and a river, but by then it had gotten dark, and Kazu had been quite tired. After a small dinner, he had laid down at the riverside to sleep.

Niji had crawled close to him to keep him warm during the night. It had been nice to know that he wasn’t alone even now. Of course, it was also safer to be with Niji as no wild animal would try to get him while he slept. The most dangerous thing they could come across were other humans, and right now they should still be far from them. At least a half day track, Kazu supposed.

Kazu was up to his feet without really realising it as he took his bag to be ready to leave if needed. Niji was running around nervously but also excited. So Kazu was a little bit lost if there was a danger for them or not.

They could hear a cry, and a swear and Kazu stilled for a second. “A man,” he whispered almost in awe. It was the first time in three years he listened to another humans voice.

Niji pushed him slightly from behind, and Kazu staggered a bit as he tried not to fall flat on his nose. He frowned down to the dragon who chirped pointedly and began to advance to the line of trees. It turned around when it realised that Kazu stopped and looked at him again.

Kazu groaned and rubbed his face before following him to the line of trees. “Hide,” he whispered almost harshly to the dragon who grumbled but did as he was told and Kazu waited until it changed and hid under the folds of his yukata. Then he stepped further into the darkness.

He needed a moment to get used to it before he could go further in the search for the man who had cried out. He had sounded hurt, and Kazu knew Niji was right. It wasn’t like them to let anybody be hurt when they could help.

Kazu ran faster when he heard a growl and a painful moan before he managed to reach the person. He took a moment to assess the situation in front of him. A man laid on the floor with a wounded arm and probably more that he couldn’t see. Around him a pack of wolves circling him.

Kazu didn’t understand why they would attack humans like that. There was more natural prey around after all, but it wasn’t like he could ask them or something like that. And he was worried that the wolves would continue in that path of not spooked right now.

He whispered something to Niji. He was sure that the man was almost unconscious now and wouldn’t see what he did right now. He felt Niji leaving him and changing once more into his standard height and form Nino felt more than saw him gliding through the sky above them. Kazu stepped out of the shadows to get the attention of the pack before they advanced forwards to the hurt man.

A shiver ran over his body when he was face to face with the beasts. Still, he stood as tall as he was able to. He didn’t want to show them that he was scared of them. As the man on the floor didn’t move around in surprise of the stopping attack, Kazu was sure that he was out of it. A small smile appeared on his face as he knew that he was safe now.

“Niji,” he cried out for his beloved friend when they advanced and jumped to hurt him. He felt his magic surge through his body as Niji cried out and appeared again above them followed by thunder and lightning. The wolves cried out in fear now as they saw the dragon and got the warning loud and clear. “Go,” Kazu whispered as they stopped unsure for the moment before they finally turned around and run.

Kazu felt the cold rain on his hot skin and closed his eyes as he breathed in deeply to calm down. He knew that Niji was strong. Still, it surprised him whenever the dragon conjured a storm. He felt the strain of it in his body as Niji changed forms to hid in his yukata again. Kazu caressed his head for a second before moving to the man. The rain was not helping the injured man, but it was nothing he could change now. He only told Niji to chase the wolves away not how and with how much power. It would probably help if he were a bit more specific the next time.

Kazu shrugged lost in his thoughts as he knelt beside the man and turned him around on his back to look over his injuries. He winced slightly as he saw the deep gnashes peppered on his body.

The man groaned painfully as Kazu nibbled on his lip. He didn’t know how he could help him best. He knew how to heal people, but if this man woke up without any injuries, he would never believe that it was normal.

“Niji, I need your help again,” he whispered, and the small lizard peaked out from under his sleeve. He smiled and stroked its back. “Afterwards you can rest, I promise. But it’s your fault that you used way too much energy just now, you know? You didn’t have to do that much even if you were overly excited to try it out,” he scolded, giggling when Niji pouted a bit at those words. Nevertheless, the small lizard crawled out from his hideout and looked at him curiously.

Kazu checked the wounds once more and the content of his bag before explaining to him which kind of herbs he would need. “You’ll find me, right? I need to bring him somewhere dry. Oh no, don’t you pout now. It’s quite your fault that it’s raining here and that we can’t stay at our small spot at the riverside. Now hurry, or he will die.”

Niji huffed before slithering away leaving Kazu chuckling softly before looking at the problem in front of him. The stranger wasn’t much bigger than he was, probably a bit smaller even but his build was a lot bulkier than Kazu could ever hope for. He groaned as he got to his feet again.

“Sleep for now,” Kazu murmured into the stranger’s ear and watched as the eyes fluttered for a moment before the breathing calmed down again. Kazu felt the strain of the use of his magic on his body as he pulled the man up with a groan. Yes, he was heavier than he looked, but he couldn’t use more of his powers right now. Kazu wasn’t sure how long his body would hold out if he used more magic too soon. The strain on his body might be too much, and he didn’t want to lose consciousness out here with the life of a stranger in his hands.

He was glad when he found a broken tree with an opening at the bottom. It wouldn’t be the most comfortable thing to camp out in the big trunk. But they were both small, so they could make it work somehow. At least enough for the stranger to rest and for him to work on his injuries.

Once settled down Kazu opened the folds of his clothes hissing when he saw the bloody flesh. He breathed in deeply as he cleaned out the wound with the clear water from the river and made sure to have clean stripes of clothes at hand to tend to the injuries as soon as Niji was back.

He took the fresh herbs, making sure they were all the right ones he needed and began to make a paste with them. He put the foul-smelling paste on the wounds, making sure to put some of his healing abilities to the worst of them and bandaged them afterwards.

He fell back to his butt when he finished with the last breathing heavily and feeling slightly feverish. Niji was beside him in an instant so that he wouldn’t crack his head open as he fell even further.

“Thank you, Niji, are you okay?”

Niji nodded and rubbed its face against Kazu’s shoulder. He smiled tiredly and caressed its back.

He wanted to say more to Niji, to make sure he was okay but he couldn’t do it as he fell to a deep sleep. His body was finally demanding the rest he had denied it as he made sure to help the stranger first.

Chapter Text

Niji’s prodding against his side awoke Kazunari. He groaned as he opened his eyes and rubbed his face. “God, it hurts.” Kazunari sat up with Niji's help. He smiled when the dragon chirped and rubbed his head.

“Don’t worry. Just sore muscles,” he explained and stretched once he sat up fully. He watched Niji for a moment until he stood and moved his body until he felt not as sore anymore. He felt Niji’s eyes on him as the dragon made sure that he won’t fall. He laughed softly and hugged him shortly. “Now off with you or you will go hungry. I won’t hunt for you,” he scolded slightly and watched as the dragon flew off.

Kazu’s eyes wandered to the stranger who was still asleep before turning his head to the sky. He saw the sun creeping up slowly on the horizon. He looked back again before shrugging slightly. It probably would still take a while for him to wake up.

He sat down a few feet away and closed his eyes when he felt the first rays of sun hit his face. With a deep breathe he felt his heart calming down as began a silent prayer with his Gods, asking for guidance and strength to be able to do what was asked of him whatever it might be.

When he felt eyes on him, he slowly turned around and was met with the dark eyes of the stranger. Kazu stood up slowly and moved closer to him again. “You are awake,” he whispered with a small smile.

The stranger didn’t answer but continued to scrutinise him. Kazu sighed softly at that but didn’t really care at the same time. He tried to decide if it was better to check on his wounds now or make sure that he ate and drank something. In the end, he decided on the latter. The dressings were still in place and not soaked through by blood. The paste doubled with his magic seemed to have worked.

“You should eat,” he said slowly and helped him to sit up when he was still looking at him without saying anything. He groaned inwardly as he made sure to hold him up as he held a water flask against his lips. “It’s not poisoned,” he said with a roll of his eyes when a shadow fell over his face.

“I clearly could have let you there to die if that was my goal. Drink now.” Kazu tilted the flask softly until it poured into his mouth. He was relieved when the stranger drank with small sips. When Kazu thought it was enough, he let go and put the water to the side.

“Are you hungry?” When no answer came, he sighed and rubbed his face tiredly. “Can’t you speak? Or don’t you understand the common tongue?”

“Thank you.” The voice was rough and a bit hoarse. But Kazu was glad that he got to hear the voice of the other finally.

“You are welcome. Hungry? I can only offer you fruits for now though.” Kazu took the offerings from his pack and put them down in front of the other man. The other was still wary, but his hunger won over as he ate the fruits.

Kazunari got up with. “I will look for something for a fire. It’s cold.” As expected there was no answer, so he got up and went further into the woods to find dry wood for the fire and greet Niji who was back from its hunt. It changed as it came closer to worm up around his arm again. Kazu stroke it’s head as he felt it settle down and fall to sleep.

“Thank you for your protection,” Kazu whispered finally. He knew that the dragon had stayed up all night to make sure he was safe and warm. Now it was time for Niji to rest.

—

The stranger was pulling at his bandages when Kazu was back. Kazu lifted an eyebrow as he put the wood down. He wished he could just conjure a fire. It was faster and easier, but there was no way he could do it without the other realising.

“If I were you I wouldn’t do that. You were bleeding badly yesterday. I’m happy that it stopped. If you open your wounds again, I won’t fix you again. You could a bit more thankful for things others do for you,” he said without looking at him and concentrating on making the fire. He couldn’t help himself as a small spark escaped from his fingertips, but he was sure it was hidden well by his body. He put more wood to the small fire he had created. Then he set a pot with water on the fire together with a few herbs.

“Herbal tea will help you battle the fever inside your body,” he explained as he settled down beside the other man.

“Who are you?”

“You may call me Nino,” Kazunari said after a moment of thought.

“I’m Sammy. What happened to the pack of wolves?”

Kazunari shrugged and played with a twig to keep his hands occupied. “I heard your shout. When I found you the last ones ran away. It might be that there was a boar nearby. But I didn’t meet him, luckily. You were badly hurt, but I couldn’t let you bleed to death if there was a chance of helping you,” he lied, looking him to the eyes.

“Huh…” The other grimaced as his side hurt when he moved slowly. “I didn’t think I would be able to open my eyes again.”

“Then you were probably lucky that I found you.” Kazunari stood to check on the water and poured it into another flask for him to drink.

“I’m sorry, but I went through your pack. I don’t have much with me, and your bag seemed to be filled with more things to use than mine,” he explained carefully.

He had been right as well. Sammy had pots and mugs with him. Kazunari had only a flask for water, a warmer cloak and a small bowl for heating water or something to eat if fruits went sparse and he had to rely on roots or meat.

“It’s okay. I have nothing to hide,” Sammy said with a small shrug. He took the mug that Kazu offered him while still watching Kazunari.

“What is it? You are making me nervous with how you are watching me.”

“I’m just wondering… You don’t seem like someone who would survive in the forest alone. Still, the beasts fled seemingly as you appeared. Also, I should be dead with the wound I got, but here I am, breathing and feeling better than I probably should. So I’m trying to decide if I should trust you and think you are a normal human or if I should better kill you as you are a witch.”

Kazunari looked at him open-mouthed for a moment before he started to laugh. Sammy was pouting which only made his laughter even worse.

“I’m sorry. Really, sorry, but a witch? Those are creatures from fairy tales. They don’t exist. I was taught about the secrets of medicine from my grandmother, but I can’t do miracles. You were lucky that your wounds mostly weren’t deep and that I have stuff on me that helps to heal people. I managed to sew close the biggest of your wounds because you were already unconscious,” he said with a small shrug. “Other than that: You have a strong body and great willpower,” he continued calmly.

Kazu motioned for Sammy to drink his tea and leant against the tree behind him as he sipped from his mug. He felt himself warm up from the inside.

“But if you don’t, believe me, I can undress, and you can check if I have any marks on my body that would make me a witch,” he challenged then and looked at Sammy with a grin. He knew that all witches have a distinctive mark in the stories and he really would be happy not to be as scrutinised by the other anymore.

Sammy looked at him for a while before a grin spread over his lips followed by a soft laugh. “I think that won’t be necessary,” he decided then. Kazunari was right, he thought, he rescued him, and without him, he would have been dead so he shouldn’t mistrust him so much.

Kazunari watched him with a small smile and finished his tea. He felt Niji shifting on his arm and relaxed slowly. “Let me check your wounds and then you should rest. We can’t stay here for long without getting the attention of wild animals.”

“You are right,” Sammy whispered and drank the last of the bitter tea. He closed his eyes as Kazunari redressed his wounds. Under the careful eyes of the other and the soft but competent hands, he fell asleep again.

Chapter Text

Kazunari listened to the soft breathing of Sammy for a moment until he was sure that the other man was still asleep. He slipped out from under his coat he had put over himself to protect from the cold bite of the night. He shivered as he pulled it over his shoulders and felt Niji stirring slightly under his sleeve.

He bit his lips as he looked back at the man again and then left with silent steps. He went to the small river that was close-by but far enough that he was sure that Sammy wouldn’t be able to see him or hear him if he woke up.

“Niji,” he whispered as the dragon slid off his arm to worm itself around his shoulders. The dragon pushed its snout against his face affectionately, making Nino smile even if he knew that it was not good for it to be on display. He sighed and berated himself as he arrived at the water. He was glad that Niji could change forms into reptile-like creatures and if it were summer nobody would spend a second glance at him but it was early winter, just getting colder with each day and nobody would believe that Niji was able to survive at that temperatures.

Kazunari sat down at the riverbank and let Niji slid down to the earth. There the small lizard changed into its dragon form spreading its wings slightly and moving it. Kazu smiled and stroke its head. “Good flight, be careful,” he asked it and watched as Niji nodded and then set off. It didn’t take long for the dragon to become one with its surroundings and Nino went back to watch the stream.

It was still early. The sun had not yet peaked over the trees, so there was no point to thank the Goddess of the sun for bringing him yet another day full of light and warmth. He smiled softly as he remembered the warm sun on his cheeks and the light that managed to chase away the bad dreams and monsters the night sometimes produced.

Kazunari put his hand in the cold stream for a moment. He was thankful that it provided them with clean water to fulfil their thirst and help them to survive. He chuckled softly as he said his prayers to the spirits of the water and then decided that it would do him some good to clean his body and mind and what was better than the clean water?

He stood to take off his clothes shuddering for a moment in the old before stepping into the freezing water. He held still for a second to get used to the water before stepping in deeper and let himself slid down to the stones at the bottom of the river to be able to make the water run over his shoulders with a flick of his fingers.

The water running over his body helped to clear his thoughts and mind and felt warm on his skin. He sighed when he stood again. It was time. He could hear Niji telling him that his guest was about to wake up and he didn’t want him to see him like that.

Silently he thanked Maila for the warm embrace and stepped out of the water. He pulled his clothes on again just as the sun appeared. Kazunari said his prayer before filling a carafe with water and going back to the small place he made for Sammy and him for as long as Sammy needed to recover. Kazunari didn’t know what he should do afterwards. He wanted to leave that stranger to be more open about Niji and his religion once again but Sammy already believed him to be a witch, and he didn’t need to make it worse.

Kazunari smiled softly when he felt the heat of the fire before he could see it. As Niji had told him Sammy was already awake and had reinforced the fire once again. “Thank you,” Kazunari said as he sat down beside him again. He put the water in a pot together with herbs before setting it on the fire. He took another pot to fill with half of the rest of the water and closed his eyes for a second as warmth washed over him.

“I think I should thank you that you are still here,” Sammy said slowly.

Kazunari slowly opened an eye, before shaking his head again. “As I said. I wouldn’t go through all the trouble to help you just to abandon you now. I could have spared my energy if I wanted to let you die now,” he said and sat up more straightly.

“What are you expecting in return of life saved?” Sammy asked in a low voice.

Again Kazunari shrugged. “Nothing,” he said honestly. “As I said. I couldn’t have let you die there. My grandmother schooled me in the art of healing, and no human should wander off if they see another being in pain and can help.”

Sammy looked a bit baffled but said nothing in return. He frowned as he looked at the fire as if he tried to solve some unimaginable hard riddles.

Kazunari honestly couldn’t understand why it was so hard to understand for the other that he just wanted to help. He didn’t expect anything. He didn’t even know what there would be to expect. He didn’t know what Sammy had to offer, and he honestly didn’t care. What kind of monster would it make him if he stopped to ask what he would get as payment before helping someone? That was very bad, Kazunari thought, and he didn’t want to live in a world where people were like that.

He groaned inwardly at that thought. It had been so long that he had not been with humans. He felt resentment for them, and he knew he didn’t honour the wishes of his Gods because of that. And that all because there were some that killed his family and abandoned the dragons. Kazunari needed to learn more, he knew.

“Go with him,” he heard Niji say in his head. “Make him take you with him.”

“Nino, is everything alright?” Sammy asked suddenly, making Kazunari blink and refocus on him and the fire.

He realised that the water was bubbling and with a small hiss he made sure to take both pots off the fire without getting hurt.

“Yes, of course. I just thought that it probably was time to leave, if you are ready enough for it. It gets colder each day, and I don’t trust the fire to keep beasts away for too long,” Kazunari said and poured the tea in two mugs to let it cool down. Then he mixed the warm water with the cold one and checked the temperature.

“That’s why you need to strip. I need to clean and check on your wounds.”

Sammy frowned but nodded as he stripped easily.

Kazunari’s eyes moved over his body checking all the bindings he had done just the day before. They had gotten a lot smaller than the first evening he found him. Kazunari knew that Sammy still was surprised at how fast he had healed so far, but Kazunari had already realised that he thought it was all thanks to the paste he put on the wounds each day. And yes, it helped to keep any inflammation out of them. The tea helped to fight any infections as hell. But still, Kazunari knew that without his healing magic even a strong man as Sammy was would have died or been bedridden for way longer. He was just glad that Sammy had believed him that the wounds probably felt worse than they were in reality.

Kazunari sighed as he opened the bindings and put them in his small bag. It wouldn’t do them any good to throw them away. Not when they came off cleanly. The bits that were soaked by blood he had thrown to the fire. He took a clean cloth to wash Sammy’s body and make sure that none of his flesh was red or hot to the touch. Sammy didn’t say anything as Kazunari made him lie down so that he could check on the most significant wound just on his hips.

Kazunari was dismayed to find that it was still slightly swollen, but there was no pus in the wound, so he supposed it was just because he had had to sew it up. It would leave a scar but a few more days and the thread should be able to come off, he decided as he washed it out with slightly hotter water and ignoring Sammy’s hiss of pain. Kazunari patted it carefully dry before putting the paste on it and making Sammy sit up again to bandage his side.

“That should be sufficient,” Sammy said when Kazunari wanted to cover the rest of his wounds again and stopped his hands. “They are already much better, and there it makes no sense to waste anything.”

“If you say so,” Kazunari mumbled as he closed the pot with the paste again. After the first night he had decided that making a bigger patch and conserving it made more sense than to grind up the herbs each day. Especially since Niji couldn’t openly help him find the needed ingredients.

Kazunari stood when Sammy nodded and put on his clothes again. He took the rest of the pot filled with water to clean it out a few steps away from their camp. He felt Sammy’s eyes on him and tried not to flinch at the look.

Sammy’s eyes were dark and intense on his body, and he didn’t know how to feel about that. “I think you should be able to travel again,” Kazunari said instead and sat down again. He took his bag and pulled out a few nuts to hand over to Satoshi who made a small face but said nothing as he began to eat. It was a meagre meal, Kazunari knew, but it was harder to find fruits and nuts. His rations had meant to feed only him, splitting them up was not easy. Sadly, they were too deep into the forest to find small, easy prey and Kazunari didn’t want to hunt for bigger than they would be able to eat. He didn’t want to leave anything behind. He sighed as he munched on a few nuts and then drank his tea. He should have spent longer at the river to get some fishes, but he hadn’t thought of that.

“You should come with me,” Sammy said when they almost finished their drinks and Kazunari almost choked on it.

“What? Why?”

“To make sure that I won’t die of course,” he answered with a smirk. “You have to make sure that your help wouldn’t go to waste. You said so yourself.”

Kazunari opened to retort but then deflated. He couldn’t argue with that, and he knew that he shouldn’t.

“Okay, but if you feel strong enough to travel you should know that I won’t continue to do everything for you,” he decided and finished his drink before getting up and excusing himself before hiding behind some trees and calling Niji back. He knew that the dragon would be able to follow them in the air without getting found out. But he needed the closeness of something familiar. It would do his heart something good.

When he came back, Sammy had made sure that the fire was put out and that no smouldering left could have put the forest ablaze and was repacking his pack. Kazunari knelt beside his bag to do the same and shoulder it. He hadn’t thought that he would travel with a company quite so soon, but he should have considered it after he had helped Sammy, Kazunari thought with a small sigh.

Sammy didn’t yet fully trust him, Kazunari knew, and he probably would put himself in danger travelling with him. But he also knew that the threat could lurk everywhere. Anyone who knew his parents, any little carelessness with Niji, his magic or his prayers could put a death penalty on his head. Maybe travelling with Sammy would take suspicions off of him at least a bit.

Chapter Text

Kazunari followed Sammy silently. He stroked Niji’s head in an attempt to calm down. He watched Sammy’s back. The other man was still a bit unsteady on his feet, but Kazu knew that he wouldn’t welcome his help right now.

He didn’t know much about Sammy, but he knew that he was a proud man. Stupidly proud probably, also. He sighed but smiled when Niji nudged his hand to get him to continue the petting. Kazu giggled slightly but continued to do so before stepping up to keep up with Sammy.

Sammy looked at him with a frown and Kazu bit his lips to not stuck out his tongue at the other man. That would be a little bit too childish, even for him.

“Something is wrong?” he asked as he hurried along to fall to step beside Sammy. “Are you tired?”

“No,” Sammy shook his head with an almost pout on his face. Kazu rolled his eyes but stayed beside him for a few more minutes observing him.

“You are limping,” Kazu said in the end. He sighed as he put his arm around his shoulder to help him stay straight.

“What do you think you are doing?”

“Helping you to walk. What does it look like? It’s either that or resting. Which would you prefer?” he asked in a low voice.

“I can walk on my own.”

“No can do,” Kazu said with a sigh. “Now stop being childish. The stitches will just be pulled, and then we are back at zero with your healing.”

Sammy grumbled something under his breath, but at least he didn’t push off his arm anymore but followed his steps through the forest.

After a few steps without any direction following Sammy forced him to stop. “Do you have any idea where to go?” Sammy asked with a lifted eyebrow.

Kazu blushed a little at those words. But then he sighed with a shrug. “Not really. I am just a wanderer. I go where my feet take me and never had any directions of to where to go,” Kazu explained carefully and with a frown on his face.

“Then you should follow my directions.”

“I will if you tell me,” Kazu snorted and changed his steps to the direction Ohno was pointing to. They walked for silence for a while longer until Kazu decided it was enough for now.

“We should take that break now,” he said with a frown and pushed Sammy down to the ground. He rubbed his forehead as he put his bag down before kneeling on the ground to pull out his water flask. “You should drink something while I check if your stitches got pulled,” Kazu mumbled.

He opened Sammy’s clothes to check for any bleeding but was glad when he realised that everything was alright. He let Sammy get dressed again and drank something himself before putting everything back and leant against a tree behind them to relax for a second. Ohno was heavier than he looked.

“You okay?”

“Of course, I’m not the injured one here,” Kazu said with a shrug and looked up to the trees. “But you aren’t exactly a featherweight,” he added with a groan.

Sammy scoffed slightly before moving his shoulders slightly. “I would say I’m sorry. But training and muscles do that to a person. But yeah, you don’t look like you are used to training.”

Kazu laughed softly at those words. “Oh well, I was never trained to be a soldier. Still, I wasn’t attacked and almost killed by wolves. So I think I win this argument. How about you try not to belittle me.”

“I didn’t.”

“Yes, you did. You do it the whole time. You look at me as if I’m worth less than you.”

“Your manners are just so different from what I’m used to,” Sammy said with a frown.

“So and this means what exactly?”

“You could be one of the dancers in the gardens. That would explain your readiness to get off your clothes,” Sammy said with a sneer.

Kazu grimaced a bit at the scoff of the other even if he didn’t get that reference. Oh God, it would be so awkward for him to be in the city. “I don’t really know what you are implying, but it sounds horrible.”

Sammy blinked in surprise and confusion at the honest innocence in his eyes. He chuckled but shook his head. “Just forget it. Let’s continue now. If we go a little further, we should arrive at the river banks and then we can rest for the night. I don’t think we’ll be able to reach the city today. I’m too slow for that.”

Kazu sighed but nodded. That sounded like a good thing to do. He packed his bag again and raised to his feet in one fluid motion. He was glad that Sammy didn’t protest as he helped him up to his feet.

“This way,” Sammy said in the end as he took the first steps. Kazu nodded and fell to step beside him. He looked down to the floor as they walked silently. He didn’t know what was running through Sammy’s head, but it probably wasn’t anything good.

—

They reached the river bank later than Kazu would have liked, but he supposed that it couldn’t be helped. With a small sigh, he helped Sammy sitting down on the lush grass.

“I will go upstream to fill the water flask. If you feel up to it I would appreciate it if you would clean yourself,” Kazu mumbled and took off his cloak to put on top of his bag before taking the water flask.

“I’ll be fine,” Sammy huffed.

Kazu chuckled softly and got up to leave the other man alone. It was kind of funny how Sammy wanted to look like the big buff man he honestly wasn’t. At least right now.

Kazu smiled when he was finally alone and breathed in deeply. It felt as if he could feel free for the first time today.

“How are you Niji?” he asked the dragon when Niji climbed on his shoulder.

“Sleepy,” the dragon answered yawning deeply.

Kazu chuckled slightly and kissed its head. “You slept all day. How about you stretch your wings now? We’ll stay down there for the night and will leave just in the morning,” Kazu explained carefully.

“Sounds good. I’ll sneak under your sleeve in the morning,” Niji promised. Nino rubbed its head lovingly with his fingertips.

“I’m sorry that you have to hide in this form nonetheless, Niji,” he said sadly. “I would understand if you decided to roam through the skies at your home mountain,” he whispered.

“It’s fine. I want to be with you,” Niji declined, and headbutted his chin softly.

“Okay. But it probably won’t change. I also don’t know how normal it is for the people around here to have lizards as pets.”

Nino pouted as Niji giggled at his words. He sighed and put him on the floor. “So hush you. I have to go back to make sure that Sammy won’t drown. Take care.”

“I will. Nothing will also happen to you,” Niji promised as he changed into his true form and vanished into the air. Kazu looked after him with a soft sigh and smile. He wished he could be as free as Niji was. He wished he could fly with him together but for that Niji was sadly still too small. He shook his head to dislodge his thoughts and filled the bottles of water.

He went back to where he left Sammy, lifting his eyebrow as he saw him looking through his bag. Kazu cleared his throat slightly.

Sammy looked up, looking at least a bit sheepish and sorry for his doings. “Well I hope you cleaned up at least,” Kazu snorted and knelt beside his things to repack his bag. “If you don’t have anything else you want to check out you should go and get firewood. You seem fine enough to move around.”

“I…”

“Don’t. I don’t want to hear it. Just do as I told you and make yourself useful,” Kazu said and lifted his hand to wave him away.

He waited until Sammy left before letting out a loud sigh. He couldn’t believe it. He looked through his bag and made sure to put everything in its right place again. He was happy that he had nothing of importance with him that would tell anybody who he really was.

Kazu rubbed his shoulder before whispering a new incantation to hide the markings of his studies again before taking off his clothes to wash himself down. Kazu said a prayer, keeping his eyes on the border of trees until the prayer was done.

Then he finally relaxed into the water and took the time to open his hair and wash it down. The further they came from the mountains the warmer it was getting which was actually pretty good.

Kazu had realised that the cold weather wasn’t for him already. And this weather reminded him of the time at the dragon nest. He heard Sammy coming back and looked up to see him stacking the wooden logs up to make the fire. He watched him for a second before deciding that he had to face Sammy sooner rather than later and stepped out of the stream.

Sammy looked up, and he could feel his eyes on his body. “So do you want to check for any birthmarks that identify me as a witch? Or whatever those dancers you were talking about have on their bodies?” he asked with a frown. “But do it fast; it’s cold.”

“No, I’m sorry,” Sammy said finally and adverted his eyes. Nino sighed and put his yukata on. He closed the belt tightly before taking care of his hair.

“I overstepped my boundaries. And for that, I apologise. I won’t do it again.”

“Okay, accepted. And I would appreciate it if you stopped questioning me. I don’t do it for you. Do I? And we both know that Sammy is a fake name, but I accept that you have your secrets you don’t want to share.”

“You never were much in any cities were you?”

“No, I lived in a small shack with my family until I decided I wanted to head out for the world. Guess them dying helped though,” Kazu explained.

“So you are completely clueless about anything?”

“I know about medicine. I know that the forests are dying and I know that monstrous beasts are lingering in the woods that come closer to the cities all the time. But since I’m used to be in the forests, I know how to avoid them mostly.”

“I understand. I’m sorry about your family and won’t mention it anymore,” Sammy said.

“I’d appreciate that,” Kazu said with a sigh and put up his hair before putting his coat over himself to wait until the fire was up to warm them up. They ate dinner in silence and after Sammy was sure the fire was safe got to sleep. Kazu woke up during the night once when Niji got back to them and greeted it silently before getting back to sleep, feeling right away much safer with it close to him.

Chapter Text

Ohno watched Nino as he took care of his pack and made sure everything was in its place the next morning. Nino had been cold to him since yesterday and almost not spoken at all. He felt sorry for what he had done, but he had been too suspicious of this stranger in the middle of the forest.

Nobody was as kind as this man and didn’t expect anything in return. Satoshi had lived his whole life knowing that. Nobody was ever nice to him without any other thoughts. So he had learnt early not to trust anybody.

Nino was different Ohno had realised that yesterday. He should have realised earlier probably because Nino had been nothing else than kind from the beginning and rescued his life. He would have died if not for this boy beside him.

Now that he knew that Nino didn’t know anything about the world outside he was worried. It was easy to get lost in the city especially if they entered the bigger ones. Nino moved with a grace that he had only seen in the dancers at the red light district, and he knew that people would mistake him for one of them. Ohno wasn’t sure if Nino could really fight them off or if he even would. If Nino was so trusting with everybody as he had been with him, it was dangerous for him. Even more so if Nino kept being so free with taking off his clothes and not making sure they were fully closed.

He felt Nino’s eyes on him but still tried to fake sleep and was glad when Nino seemed to believe him. He was really naive Ohno thought as he opened his eyes again and watched Nino lift his robes as he stepped into the river. Ohno shuddered as he thought about the coldness of the water. He frowned as Nino moved further into the water and put the cloth into his belt so that it wouldn’t get wet.

Nino lifted his hands into the air as he closed his eyes and let his head fall back to look into the sun that crept over the top of the trees.

A blinked as he watched Nino. He was beautiful like that and looked otherworldly. It took a while until Ohno realised that Nino was praying and a hiss escaped his lips. Nino looked back at the sound and frowned before moving back again and ending his prayer in such a calm way that Ohno was shocked.

“Your form… Those are the prayers to the Old Gods,” Ohno said as Nino came back. Nino shot him an almost glare and Ohno tried not to get intimidated.

“So what?”

“It’s forbidden to pray to the Old Gods. It’s the way of the witches and dragon keepers.”

Nino snorted as he put a hand through his hair before clicking his tongue as he found some knots in the long strands.

“Are you going to kill me?” he challenged with a lifted eyebrow.

“The king's guards will if they see you,” Ohno explained with a sigh. “The king himself has forbidden the ways of the Old Gods.”

“What kind of king tells people what to believe and kills people that do it another way? Either a very cruel or a very fearful one,” Nino said thoughtfully.

Ohno chuckled slightly at his words. He knew the king was both. Feared by the people for his cruelness and fearful of anybody that might come in between him and the power. Ohno was sure that he would probably even kill his own heir without batting an eyelid.

“Just be warned that you shouldn’t do that wherever people will see you. They have to report you if they do and then you will be put to death.”

Nino watched him for a while silently. Ohno could feel him judging him. He knew that fear of Gods was silly. They were just imaginary things after all. They held no real powers.

“Okay, thank you for the warning. I will be careful,” Nino said with a shrug. He knew that he couldn’t pray in the cities and because of that, he had taken a moment longer to say his prayers and ask for the protection and leading hand until the next time he was safe to pray. He hoped that he would be able to do so whenever he found some private place to stay.

“Are you ready to go?” Ohno asked after a moment of silence.

Nino nodded slowly and took his bag. “I think so,” he mumbled feeling nervousness creeping up in him. He didn’t want to show it, but he was scared about entering a city and being face to face with different people.

Ohno watched him slowly and then smiled a bit when he saw the nervousness in his eyes. It was kind of exciting to see him not as secure anymore. That made him a bit more approachable and fitted more to the rest of his appearance, Ohno thought.

Ohno nodded as he took his bag and then retook the lead. Nino walked behind him playing with one of his hair strands as he looked around. Ohno almost thought that Nino was saying goodbye to the forest but that was silly, he knew. Nobody would be able to converse with plants, and he had outgrown the belief of fairies a long time ago. But it wouldn’t surprise Ohno if Nino still believed in them. The other man seemed to have a completely different upbringing.

—

Kazu let go of his hair and rubbed the head of Niji around his wrist. If the small dragon stayed completely still people could think that it was just jewellery. Kazu was glad that he didn’t need to hide it entirely that way and could feel it steady presence, but he also felt very sorry for the small dragon.

Dragons were meant to be free and fly in the air or enjoy the waters of rivers or the rustling of trees. They were not fit to hide their real form so often as Niji did and then have to be bound to a person or inside of cities. But he couldn’t deny that he wasn’t ready to let Niji go and be all alone here.

His eyes fell to Sammy in front of him, and he was surprised at how calm the other man was. He knew he probably shouldn’t be since Sammy was used to the life in cities. He was the complete opposite of him. But still, Kazu thought with slight wonder, Sammy hadn’t freaked out as much as he had feared as he had realised what his beliefs were.

Kazu wasn’t sure if it was only because Sammy still felt terrible because of the day before, but he wouldn’t comment on it but be thankful that he reacted the way he did. He hoped that if they found quarters to rest for the night’s he could pray more often than he had feared. If Ohno accepted his beliefs, he might be able to pray with him in a room.

If they would stay in any rooms, Kazu didn’t know what he should expect from it all. He didn’t even know if Sammy had been serious as he told him he should follow him. It would help if he were serious. Sammy knew how it all worked, and he could follow his example to fit in a bit hopefully.

Sammy sighed after a while and stood still. His eyes wandered over Kazu’s body, and Kazu tried not to shiver at the look in his eyes.

“What? Why are you stopping? Are you hurt?”

“No. I feel almost as new. So stop worrying about any wounds. It’s not the first wound I had, even if it’s the first one that had been taken care off so well. I’m stopping because I want to warn you.”

“What?” Kazu asked with a frown and crossed his arms in front of his chest.

Sammy chuckled before moving forward and pulling a leaf out of his hair. Kazu stiffened slightly and felt his ears getting hot.

He took a step back, and Sammy lifted his hands. “Sorry. But you are going to draw attention on you,” Sammy said slowly pulling at his hair roughly.

“You move with grace, your robes seem to be of quality, and your features are soft,” he explained calmly. “They all will think you are from the gardens or something like that,” he explained.

“What are you talking about? I don’t understand,” Kazu answered and tilted his head to a side.

Ohno sighed as he tried to think about how he could put it delicately. “They will think you are there to please men,” he said slowly. Kazu still frowned for a moment as he tried to work out what Ohno meant before he paled considerably.

“Is that what you thought of me?” he demanded with furrowed brows.

Sammy laughed but shook his head. “Not for long. When I first woke up, I thought you were a runaway, yes. Then I thought you were a spy,” he explained with a shrug. It had been the only logical thought after all. A whore would have never been able to survive in the forest and be so knowledgeable. A spy, though. Spies that were there to lull important people feeling safe around them while getting all the secrets or being able to be close enough to kill them wasn’t that far fetched. But he had realised that Kazu was neither.

Kazu nodded with a frown and tugged at his hair. He couldn’t change his features, and he didn’t want to cut his hair. He could try to move differently, but his movements had come with his training for fights. If he changed it, he feared that his movements wouldn’t be so fast and smooth in a fight if he needed it anymore.

“So what should I do? I can’t change myself. Let them think what they want.”

“I just wanted to warn you. They will think that especially if you are not alone but travel with me. But it’s not all bad,” Sammy hummed thoughtfully. That way Nino would be under his protection in a way and they would be able to blend in, and nobody would recognise him.

Chapter Text

It was a small village they entered, and still, the people around them were throwing glances at Nino already. Because of that Ohno got more glimpses than he would have liked as well. He tried not to scowl too much as to not draw more attention to him than he already had, but it was difficult. He hated it when people were staring at him. He had always hated it, and he had never gotten used to it — the opposite of his father who loved being in the centre of attention.

Nino was looking around with wide eyes, seemingly not realising that he was stared at. Ohno would have been fooled if he hadn’t already spent so much time with him in the woods where Nino seemed to feel comfortable. He carried himself a little bit more stiffly than he had before and the grip to his arm was tighter than necessary. But he still looked around very much and with big eyes, seemingly very curious about it all.

“One could think you have never been to a village before,” he whispered to the man beside him. Nino blinked as he focused back on Ohno. Ohno couldn’t help the smile that appeared on his face the moment he saw the wonder in those big orbs. They seem to be honestly overwhelmed by what they saw.

“I never have been. I told you, we lived in a small hut in the middle of the forest. We had everything we ever needed. We never went to the city,” he mumbled with a small frown. That, of course, wasn’t completely true. He had never been to the city, but they had loyal servants that went to buy whatever extra things they needed. It was mostly fabric for new clothes or some things that couldn’t be harvested easily.

Nino felt a slight pang in his chest as he remembered the kind older woman and man that worked for them. To even think about the boy they had - a late pregnancy - was too much for him and he had to close his eyes for a moment to calm down his heart. He and their boy had been very good friends, as it was only natural since they had almost the same age. Not being able to rescue him had been almost the hardest. The adults, they had known what could happen to them but not that boy. He had known less than Nino had, and Nino’s knowledge about his family secrets hadn’t been too broad, to begin with.

Ohno frowned as he saw the sadness coming into his eyes and he put his hand on his arm to squeeze it slightly. “Is everything okay?” he asked as lowly as before.

“Yes, thinking about their death just hurts,” Nino answered with a faked smile. “Are all cities as big as this? And with so many people?”

Ohno almost laughed out loud at that question. He shook his head with an amused grin on his lips and tilted his head to one side. “It’s a rather small village. It’s no big city, and the people aren’t that much. I’d like to think that everybody knows everybody here. You won’t have that in a big city.”

Nino’s eyes widened, and he licked his lips quite uncomfortable. He couldn’t believe it, and he was not exactly looking forward to visiting the bigger cities then. There were already so many people that he felt slightly faint with it all.

Ohno smiled before tugging him forward softly. He was almost disappointed that this wasn’t the big city because he would have enjoyed the shocked look on his face, on the other hand, he was also glad that it wouldn’t be way too much from the start on.

“We should look for somewhere to stay. I wouldn’t want to force someone out of their house,” he mumbled with a small grimace. Those small villages seldom had an inn or something like that, but people always tried to accommodate visitors even if that meant having to leave their homes.

Nino grimaced at that mention. He hoped it wouldn’t come to that. He always felt terrible if he disturbed people. But he didn’t say anything as he continued to look around with a small smile. This village looked nice at least. Yes, the people were looking at them, but there were mostly curious eyes following them. Nobody seemed to hate them at first sight. They found a well in what appeared to be the middle of the town and Ohno led them both there.

“We should be able to ask around from here,” he said with a thoughtful hum. The well-marked the middle of all towns in this kingdom, and it was the place where most people came to. It was also easier to navigate from here, and the possibility was high that wealthier people were living close to the town square than on the seams.

He looked at Nino’s whose eyes were glued to the small stone well and the children that were playing around it with a lifted eyebrow before steering him right to the rim of the well and motioned him to sit down.

“Wait here; I’ll get you when I know where we might be able to sleep tonight,” he said.

Nino nodded with a frown as he sat down. “I can still walk…” he mumbled with a shrug which made Ohno laugh.

“I didn’t think otherwise but I’m faster on my own and people might find it strange if you ogle at their houses. They would either think you are slow minded or you are impolite because you look disapprovingly at them.”

“I’m neither,” Nino huffed. Ohno just shrugged once more and stretched out his back.

“Either way. It’s easier for me alone. Just wait here,” he said curtly in the end. He flinched at his own words but didn’t apologise as he left with a last nod to the man. It also wouldn’t hurt to go alone so that he would be able to get some information about what was going on in their central city. Why did his father send him to that godforsaken place with word that people were in danger? There was nothing like that. At least this village seemed to be in peace.

—

Kazu sat back down with a small frown and put one hand into the sleeve of his robe. His fingers found the little head of Niji, and he caressed it for a bit as he watched the children play a game in front of them. He knew that they were looking at him curiously - hell, why shouldn’t they? Their parents were, and for children, it was at least more logical to do so.

“Hello, who are you?” one of the children asked him with an almost scary look on his eyes. Kazu chuckled softly at that. The kid was working hard at being brave while not knowing if he didn’t want to run away right away.

“Hello there, I’m just a traveller,” he said with a small smile before sliding down from the well and squatted to be on the same height as the boy in front of him. “What are you playing?”

“Knock down the can! Do you want to play with us?” he asked after looking back at the other children who looked on curiously.

Kazu laughed softly before nodding. “If I may. But I don’t know the rules. So you have to explain them to me.”

“Okay,” the boy who had talked to him first took his hand to pull him further to the group of children who grinned happily and began tugging him forward again.

“What’s your name?”

“Nino,” he answered with a grin as he squatted again to look at the children. “And what are you doing here?”

“Visiting. My companion and me we want to go to the big city,” he explained slowly.

“The big city is scary,” one girl said with a frown.

“Is it? How so?”

“Mummy and daddy say there is a monster living there,” she whispered after looking around.

“Shh… You can’t talk about it,” a slightly older girl scolded her with a slight glare and looked at Kazu.

“Yeah, mummy said we couldn’t talk about the bad man to strangers, they could be spies,” a boy said.

Nino frowned deeply but then smiled softly. “I won’t tell anybody. I promise. But how about the game? It looks fun, and I’d like to try,” he said softly before settling down to listen to the children telling him all about the game and its rules before standing again.

He thanked them when he was given one flat stone for him to use and grinned when the children decided that he would be one of the last to throw so that he could watch the others go. He smiled as he finally concentrated on the game and ran around with the children.

Kazu didn’t know how much time he spent playing with the children, but the next time he looked around he was aware that Sammy was sitting on the place he had abandoned earlier, watching him with unreadable eyes. Kazu smiled as he stood and waved to the children to say goodbye before going back to Sammy.

“Sorry, I didn’t realise you were back.”

Sammy shook his head with a warm smile on his face which made him look so much more handsome, Kazu thought. “It’s fine. You looked like you were having fun.”

Kazu agreed before brushing a hand through the tangles that made up his hair now. It would hurt to sort it out later but it had been worth it, he thought.

“I found a guest house. It’s not exactly an inn, but it’s the house of the town leader, and it has extra rooms for visitors. We are allowed to spend the night there, and nobody will leave their homes for us,” he said with a small grin when he realised the worry in Kazu’s eyes.

“Let’s head over, and then we can sort out about dinner,” Sammy mumbled but trailed off when there was a tug on Kazu’s robe.

“We have dinner around a big fire. Will you come and tell stories?”

Kazu chuckled but nodded after a small glance into Sammy’s direction. “Of course we’ll come, right Sammy?”

“Uhm… Yeah, if we are welcomed,” he mumbled with a small shrug. He hadn’t thought that these people would share one meal a day with each other. But it fitted with the tight-knitted image he had of this town.

“YAY!” the children cried out happily. Kazu chuckled slightly as he waved at the children when they ran home because it was time for lunch as one of the oldest girls reminded the horde of kids.

“We should head for the guest house as well,” Sammy said after a second.

Kazu nodded as he walked beside him. “Can you tell me about the main city?” he asked carefully after a second of thought. He was worried about the things the children had said.

Chapter Text

Kazunari sat on the bed and leant against the wall at the head of it. He looked out of the window as he caressed Niji who had fallen asleep on his lap in his small lizard form. He smiled a bit as he watched the beautiful moon illuminating their room.

After all the time he had spent on the floor in the forest, it was strange to feel the soft mattress of the bed under his body.

Sammy was still out talking to the owner of the inn they were staying for the day, and Kazunari had been excused of their talk to go upstairs to relax after his hard travel they had. Kazunari didn’t feel very tired because of the travel; they walked just a short distance today after all. But he couldn’t remember a time that he had met so many strangers or people in general. Talking to all of them, thanking them for the food and shelter for the night had been tiring for him.

“Niji, do you need to hunt today?” he asked as he prodded at Niji’s head to rouse the dragon from its sleep. “It’s your last chance to go before I have to close the window for the night,” he said as the dragon blinked its eyes open to look up to him.

Niji chirped slightly as it shook his head and curled up on his lap again. >I’m full, thanks, the food was excellent.<

Kazu rolled his eyes with a small smile and a shrug. Niji had been running around in disguise earlier at the feast, so it had to be expected that it had eaten its full.

Kazu looked down at the sleeping dragon on his lap. It was a beautiful bluish hue in this form with yellow eyes. But he loved the dragon more when it was in its pure form. A sigh escaped Kazunari’s lips as he saw how high the moon was already in the sky and got up after putting Niji down onto the blanket. He made sure that it was hidden under the cloth and got ready for bed. He had declined the offer of the owner of the in for a warm bath. That was a luxury that he honestly didn’t need.

Kazu knew that the people here believed that he was some trophy figure for Sammy. He didn’t care about that, but he wouldn’t do anything to support that opinion. He washed his face and body with the slightly cold water from a bowl before opening his hair and making sure that it was combed through without any knots left before changing into a more comfortable robe to sleep.

He heard the door open just as he closed the knot of his robe and looked over his shoulder when instead of saying anything, Sammy stopped in his step. He tilted his head as his eyes wandered over Sammy, who looked a bit gobsmacked.

“Is anything wrong?” he asked with a deep frown as he turned around fully and crossed his arms in front of the cloth.

“No nothing,” Sammy said after he cleared his throat as he closed the door behind him. “I see you are ready to rest.”

“Yeah, the feast was tiring, and I’m full what makes me even more sleepy,” Kazunari replied softly as he sat down on the lone bed.

“I see. Then you should probably rest. I will wash myself and then pull out some blankets to make a second bed,” he mumbled as he pulled his eyes from Kazu’s form on the bed.

“Sammy, do you know anything about monsters?” Kazu asked after a moment he watched the other get ready for bed. It probably was not the best topic when they were about to go to bed, but he was curious. He couldn’t forget about the words of the children.

“Monsters? I believe they are just fiction, fantasies of young children and old women to scare the little ones,” Sammy said as he put a few blankets on the floor to make the bed. Kazu had thought about giving up the soft bed, but he was sure that Sammy would be too proud of that. So he slid his legs under the thin blanket that would protect him from the cold of the night.

“But?” Kazu prompted when he realised that Sammy had stopped talking but was still looking completive.

“But, as they say, there is always something true in stories. People report sightings of dragons now and then, and they say they slaughter them. I have never seen one, so I still don’t believe they exist. But many people thing otherwise. So why shouldn’t I believe in monsters?”

Kazu tried not to flinch at the mention of dragons. His fingers found Niji’s neck to caress it and keep the small dragon calm. The loss of its mother still cut deeply to his dragon friend. How could it not? Kazu again missed his parents after these past few years. For Niji, it had to feel like even less time had passed.

“Sometimes the monsters hide in human form,” he mumbled. When Sammy turned to look at him with grave eyes, he continued to meet his eyes stubbornly. It took a few minutes until Sammy sighed deeply and sat down on the makeshift bed.

“Yes sometimes the monsters are men,” he agreed softly, looking slightly defeated. Kazu felt somewhat bad for whatever he had said that caused it, but he didn’t know how to make it feel better.

“So there are rumours of monsters around?”

“Yes, Nino, there are. Let us sleep. But you should know that humans are not peaceful creatures by birth, and so are animals.”

Kazu watched him before lying down. He pulled the blanket over himself as he coaxed Niji to climb onto his stomach. He sighed softly because Niji was perfectly warm. “Good night, Sammy.”

“Good night, Nino.”

Nino closed his eyes as his body calmed down while caressing Niji.

—

When Ohno woke up the next morning, he could already tell that Nino was awake already. It was strange that Nino was awake before him each day.

He sat up and rubbed his slightly itchy eyes. He had drunken sake last night with the inn keeper, and it always dehydrated him slightly.

“Good morning, Sammy,” Nino’s voice reached him, and he looked up to be offered a cup of water by the other man.

He said his thanks before taking the cup and taking a sip to be able to clear his throat. He blinked when he realised that Kazu was already dressed mostly. The kimono was wide open on his upper body and held mainly by the tight belt around his waist.

He stood with his back straight and one arm across his muscled stomach. Ohno had already seen Nino half naked or naked a few times. But it threw him off each time when he saw the tight muscles under his skin. It looked as if Nino was trained in fight, but everything else of Nino’s demeanour didn’t fit with that.

Ohno tried not to groan as his eyes travelled over Nino’s body. He had always been more interested in his sex than in the lithe bodies of women. Something his father had always detested in him even if Ohno knew that he had boys - they couldn’t be called men as they were too young for that - in his rooms for the night whenever he wanted.

He hid a grimace behind his cup as he took another small sip of the water. Maybe there were more monsters in the cities than in the woods. “Do you want to stay here another day?” he asked Nino as he stood and washed to get ready for the breakfast the inn owner had promised him for this morning.

“I think we should continue to travel, don’t you?”

“I do think so as well. I was sent to the woods because there were sightings of trouble. I lost the men I was with when we came across the wild beasts. I don’t know if they survived or died, but I should head for the main city to check on them.”

“You were sent?”

Ohno nodded at his question. Nino frowned a bit before wincing slightly as a small lizard climbing up his arm and draping itself around his upper arm. “Ouch, your talons, be careful,” Nino scolded it before he finally put on the upper part of his kimono and lifted his eyebrow at Ohno’s look.

“Why do you have that?”

“I found it ill and hurt shortly after I lost my parents and I helped it to restore its help. It decided to stay with me,” Nino explained with a shrug as he tidied up his place. “You should get ready if we want to continue our travels today.”

“Yes, you are right,” Ohno mumbled deep in thought as he got ready and put back his things.

They went out to the main room where the breakfast was already waiting for them with their host sitting at the table already eating.

“I suppose your company was already asleep when you were back in your room?” the man asked Ohno who shrugged at his words as he sat down.

“Yes, sadly, so. I suppose travel was more tiring than I thought. Sadly though, we have to leave your hospitality today again as I need to continue on my trip to the main city. Serious business, you see,” Ohno said smoothly while he helped to serve Nino before starting his breakfast.

Nino frowned slightly at the words but decided it was too tiresome to try to decipher them, so he just thanked softly for the meal before partaking. They bid their goodbyes shortly after they finished their meal to continue on their way.

Chapter Text

Kazu sighed with boredom as he sat in a room with some of the women of the mansion they were staying at. The cities they visited got bigger than they had been before and it was still strange for Kazu to see so many people in one place. He didn't feel all that comfortable to have so many eyes on him as well. He just wasn't used to it.

A thing he got used to pretty quickly though had been that most people supposed that he was some sort of consort of Sammi. He still didn't know a lot about the other man, but he knew for sure that he wasn't just anybody. The people in the cities seemed to know him and behaved strangely around him. Kazu supposed that he wasn't just a mere foot soldier but one of the higher ranked officers, not that he cared. It was just the only explanation he could come up with to why all people easily made space for them.

"Nino-san, do you care for more tea?" one of the maids asked him shyly. He blinked a bit as he looked up at the girl before nodding with a small but warm smile. These women had been nothing but kind to him even if he didn't care for their gossip or needlework.

"Thank you," he said as he handed over the delicate cup for her to fill it once more. He was curious about what the men were probably talking about. He had been sent with these women to the other room since their talk wasn't interesting for the kind of them. It had been the same for a few spots already. The bigger the cities got, the more they seemed to separate women and men.

Kazu played with the bracelet around his arms for a moment before forcing himself to listen to the gossip again. Sometimes women knew more than men thought they did after all. He drank his tea while looking at the window outside. Niji had gone to stay close to the forest and for its meals. Kazu had thought it better as well since their close quarters here in this city would be dangerous for the small dragon.

"Nino-san are you enjoying yourself?"

Kazu looked up a bit confused and as if in a daze at that question. He nodded slowly with a small smile. "Of course, your company is very nice," he answered carefully, not sure as to what they meant.

"I meant, in general. It's nice of the lord to take a consort for such a journey. He has to show you so much. He s a fine young man after all," one of the younger women said with a faraway looking her eyes.

Kazu tried his best not to snort at that. Sammi was more like a brute with him than like a gentleman. But then again, their companionship had nothing to do with lord and consort so that he could understand the confusion.

"I learnt a lot," he agreed finally. It was no lie, after all. With Sammi at his side, he learnt a lot about the people around him and Sammi. Kazu wasn't sure yet but he probably also learnt quite a lot about himself already too. He didn't dislike all humans as he had thought at first. They weren't all the same either. It was interesting how the communities came together and how they lived. He still felt out of place here, though. It wasn't as if he had felt entirely at home at the dragon host either, dragons and humans were quite different as well, but it had been more comfortable there without all the judgemental looks.

Kazu tuned the girls out again when they started talking about the trips they had taken and which kind of cities they would love to visit. He thought about what they said about Sammi. He wouldn't have thought that the other man was a lord, and now he wondered what that meant and how he had become one. Was he one of the persons who were responsible for the fall of his family? Kazu didn't know, but he was sure that his family had been betrayed when the new king went to conquer the throne. He drank his tea while declining all kinds of alcoholic beverages that he was offered.

He liked the bitter taste and the burn of sake or beer, but all the wines that were served were too sweet for his liking.

"Nino-san, our lordship, he surely satisfies you? It can't just be the money that you'll travel with him on foot?"

Kazu blinked at those words and stared at them for a second. He needed a bit until his mind processed what they were talking about. He felt his cheeks heat up at the implication and cleared his throat slightly. "I don't think it would be becoming of me to tell you that," he said in the end with as much dignity he could and emptied his tea.

The girls exchanged giggles and grins with each other at those words and for a second Kazu was sure to have said the wrong thing. So he stood up when he realised that his cup was empty and bobbed his head slightly. "I should head to bed. It's getting late," he excused himself before leaving the room as slowly as he dared and hoped it didn't look as much as the escape as he had feared.

Just in front of the door was a maid standing to wait for any orders and Kazu looked at her with a half smile. "I would like to go to the room prepared for the lord and me," he said, slightly embarrassed about the implication of it all. Sammi be damned he couldn't just stop the charade right away.

"Of course, this way," the maid said and inclined her head for him to follow her what he did happily. He entered the bedroom they had been given looking at the bedrolls that were lying together in the middle. A small frown appeared on his face when he saw that, but he was too tired to care. He knelt in front of the wash basin situated in the room and began to wash his face and free his hair from the up-do he put it in this morning.

"Sometimes I wonder if I've gotten myself a consort for real," Sammi said when he suddenly entered the room and stopped right at the doorway.

Kazu looked back over his shoulders with a small roll of his eyes. "I don't think any consort would travel with you through the woods on foot," he said before turning back to brush out his hair looking at Sammi through the looking glass he was facing.

"Then, I remember your mouth." There was a smile on his lips now, making Kazu wonder what kind of preferences this man had.

"Be happy I didn't tell anybody how much you snored during the nights when they asked me about the kinds of nightly activities we might have, those silly girls."

"I never had the patience for girls' talk," Sammi said with a frown and Kazu took off his outer robe to be comfortable for the night before he got up to let Sammi get his nightly routine done.

"That's because you never really listen. It's not just gossip. Women know things that are important for a household. Sadly men seldom listen."

Sammi snorted at those words and removed his clothes. "They have to listen, they don#t have to be heard," he murmured.

"Silly, both are important," Kazu scolded. "But I know that you're too thick to understand. It's always a two-sided in all kind of things."

"I can't believe you have the nerve to tell me such a thing! I have no obligation to listen to you!" Sammi said sharper glaring him down.

Kazu lifted an eyebrow as he pulled back the covers and slid into the futon. "Only the dumb won't listen to others," he said calmly as he pulled the covers back up.

Sammi got down and put his hand around Kazu's throat. "I should kill you or better, even just make you the thing everybody thinks you are," he whispered.

Kazu looked back with a hard stare without moving from his touch. "You would be dead before you could lay a finger on me," he warned him. "Now why don't you put your heated head in the cold water to calm down? It's not my fault if you're in a foul mood. You could have joined the women and me. The girls would have loved to talk to his lordship."

Sammi opened his mouth to argue but finally realised how serious Kazu was and let him go. He got up and put a hand through his hair, pulling at it almost harshly. "You're right. I was out of line, and I apologise for it," he said with a sigh and finally moved away to get ready for bed.

Kazu laid still until he could hear Sammi falling asleep beside him. He was sure that he would be able to take the other down, but he had a feeling that he would just run into problems if this man were killed while he was close.

Chapter Text

Kazu ignored Sammi most of the morning as he got slowly ready and then opened the small window to enjoy the fresh breeze and sun on his face. He smiled as he felt the warmth spread over his body and relaxing his tight muscles.

He packed his bag and just was about to tell Sammi that they probably should leave when he stiffened. He could hear Niji's very urgent voice deep inside his head. "You have to go. People are coming to kill the man you're with and kill you as well!"

"Niji?" he whispered confused as he looked out of the window and just saw the shadow of his dragon there in the sun reflecting the light on its glass body.

"What's up?" Ohno said stiffly when he saw Kazu looking out with wide eyes. "I said I was sorry about yesterday. You don't have to think about killing yourself."

Kazu turned around as he looked at Ohno in confusion. For the moment, the surprise and shock had overridden that memory and annoyance about the night before.

"I don't know who you are, but I know you are no mere soldier or merchant or whatever you want to tell me. I don't care, but we have to move."

"Huh? Why?"

"They sent people to kill you," Kazu explained.

Ohno opened his eyes as to say something against his words or demand for a proof (which Kazu didn't have admittedly), but he sighed seconds after and nodded. "I should have thought so," he whispered before getting his things. "Then we should go. And I won*t ask you how you know. You sure you are no witch?"

"Very, and does it matter right now?" Kazu asked with a frown.

Ohno shook his head as he put on his pack and gave Kazu his. "Let's go then," he mumbled and strode outside. Kazu wasn't so sure if it was genius to go out, but they couldn't climb out of the window without getting seen it was too late for that now. Ohno was short worded when he thanked their hosts for the night and declined to stay until breakfast, saying that they had planned for an early start. Kazu bowed deeply in front of them before hurrying after Ohno. They entered the forest soon after and Kazu made sure to call for Niji's guidance.

He prayed for the safety of his dragon, but luckily, Niji was swift and small. It easily could hide just above of the trees out of sighs of any enemy. Also, the enemies were more concentrated in finding them than the looming dragon above them. "This way," Kazu finally whispered when Niji told him which ways were safe and which not.

Kazu dragged Ohno into a cave of a hill, making sure to hide their tracks at the entryway. He could feel Niji coming down to sit in the entry and protect it with his body, which instantly took the colour of the stone around him. "Thank you, my friend," he whispered and smiled when Niji chirped warmly at his words.

He went further inside and sat on the other end where he found Ohno already being. He put his robes close around himself and closed his eyes.

"Are you scared?" Ohno asked in a whisper, making him look up again.

Kazu thought about the question for a second before shaking his head. "No… The entryway was hidden. For people not used to living out here, it would be invisible. You ran almost across from it after all," he said with a small smile, not mentioning that if he was really in a pinch, he and Niji could probably take the men on. It helped that people seemed to underestimate him.

Ohno hummed in understanding and drew his legs closer to his body. The other seemed to be very sure of himself. He carried himself with a confidence that Ohno knew came only with lots of training. Somehow he couldn't even start to imagine how Kazu would look during a fight and somehow he wanted to watch it, as strange as it was.

"Shush now, they are getting closer," Kazu mumbled before standing up again. Ohno watched him getting closer to the entryway again without making any sound, and he tried to hear what the other heard, but it was almost impossible to hear anything besides the blood rushing through his ears. He wanted to call the other back, as he was sure it was safer inside but he didn't want to draw any attention to them and bring the danger even closer. He sighed as he put his head against the cold stone at his back.

This all meant that Ohno wasn't able to head straight home. Not as openly as he had planned, after all, it also showed that the attack of the beasts and the loss of his men wasn't an accident after all. Ohno honestly wondered if they were killed or made it just look like they were. He knew there were many loyal men to his father, and he had never shown any real interest in the kingdom after all. But he knew one thing for sure. He couldn't let his father continue to do what he did.

Ohno groaned as he hid his face in his hands as he rubbed his it harshly. He hated thinking about all this. It didn't make sense, nor did it change anything.

"Could you keep silent?" Kazu hissed softly at him as he looked outside with a concentrated look on his face. His stance was strained and concentrated as he looked out. There was a staff in his hand and for a second Ohno wondered where it was from, but he supposed it was from somewhere in this cave they were in. He was getting paranoid for the strangest of reasons he thought with a small sigh.

Nino had been the person who had already rescued him that one time and nurtured him back to health which hadn't been easy. It would have been so much easier for him to leave him there to die. And everything he had done was thinking that somewhen in his sleep Nino would murder him or bring him somewhere where other people would do it. It was stupid, really. But it didn't help that Nino was so enticing without seemingly even to realise the effect he had on Ohno.

"They seem to be gone," Kazu mumbled after a while of looking outside to see if something or someone moved. His stance relaxed only a bit, and he moved back to where Ohno was still seated. He tilted his head and knelt in front of him. "Why are they looking for you?" he asked carefully.

Ohno shrugged slightly at the question before sighing softly. "I honestly don't know. It seems as if they want me dead, but I'm not too sure why that is," he said truthfully. He didn't understand why his father would want him dead, but that seemed to be going on.

He tugged at his hair a bit unhappily before standing up. "I would love to know, though. We need to go to the main city, I believe, but it will be more dangerous than I had feared. I would understand if you won't accompany me further," Ohno said with a small bow of his head.

Nino shrugged his shoulders, watching him going in circles. "I need to go there myself, I believe. So I would track along without a problem. But I believe it will be foolish to go there right away," Nino said with a soft smile as he stood again. He rubbed his chin deep in thought before turning to the opening. "We should leave. As homey as this place is, it would be in our disadvantage if we fell asleep here and were to be ambushed here."

"You really make me wonder about your upbringing," Ohno mumbled as he watched him going to the opening again this time urging him along.

"Why? Do you still think I'm a witch?"

"No, just a very peculiar person who knows lots of things he shouldn't if he was a son of a mere farmers hand."

"I never said I was that," Nino replied with a small smile and a shook of his head.

Ohno hummed in wonder as he realised that to be true. "And I suppose you won't tell me who you are?"

Nino grinned cheekily at the question, before tilting his head to the right. "Are you going to tell me who you really are?"

Ohno grimaced at that since he wasn't ready to tell the other yet about it. There was still too much suspicion in him for that.

Chapter Text

“I have a question,” Ohno said when they settled down in the cave after the soldiers were gone. They had decided to stay here the night and plan for the next few days.

“What question?” Nino asked, looking over at him. Niji was still in front of the opening of the cave, making sure that they were safe and he could feel his calmness seeping through their connection.

“Can you use a staff to fight?”

“I would’ve been silly if I didn’t,” he said with a sigh. He moved his shoulder in a small shrug as he watched the opening for any signs of Niji as he decided what to tell. “I was taught how to fight,” he said in the end. “I can use other things as well, but since we are in a forest, the stick was easy to get,” he said with a small smile.

“Don’t you carry weapons on you?”

“Where should I hide them. You’ve seen me naked, and you’ve gone through my pack. Did anything look like a weapon?” Nino scoffed at his question and looked back at him with a lifted eyebrow.

Ohno blushed slightly at the memory and shook his head. “No, you are right. I was just wondering since the staff had been just the right length and width.”

“Again, you are comparing me with a witch. I come to think that you wish to meet a witch and I have to question why. Do you want to kill it or do you want to bring it into the main city to get recognition for whatever reason? Or do you want to use it?”

“I just never met someone like you,” Ohno mumbled with a sigh. “I’m sorry, I really don’t think you are a witch. I don’t even believe they exist. They are just a story to scare the little ones. Same with monsters, dragons or Gods,” he mumbled.

Nino hummed slightly at the words. “Monsters always exist; they just wear different kinds of skin, and they might look not like you think they should.”

Ohno looked up in confusion, but then he just nodded in understanding. Nino knew at least more about the forest than he did so he probably knew what he was talking about.

“You can use my sword if we are ever in a pinch,” he offered.

“I would prefer you to use your weapon if there is any danger. I also don’t like using swords. I’m more used to any staffs or throwing weapons.” Nino saw in Ohno’s face that he thought his choice of weapon to be weak, cowardly and for a woman but he didn’t care. He was trained to fight side by side with a dragon, weapons with a broader range were more logical to use than swords or daggers.

At least Ohno was smart enough not to say his thoughts out loud, Nino thought as Ohno just nodded and accepted his words. “So ever used a naginata?”

Kazu laughed as he nodded softly. “Yes, it’s the most beautiful weapon to use,” he agreed mournfully when he remembered the perfect one he had used during his training with the dragons.

Ohno shook his head with an amused grin. He knew that he probably should be more worried; not everybody was allowed to carry weapons nowadays. But that would be unfair, Nino had rescued him more than once now.

They stayed in silence for a bit before Nino sighed deeply. He felt tired even if it wasn’t that late yet, but with all that excitement, he probably shouldn’t be that surprised. “So we have to travel while hiding,” he said, looking at Ohno.

“Yeah, it seems like that,” Ohno groaned. “We have to be more careful now than we have been before. I’m sorry for all the problems I’m causing you.”

Nino shrugged. He could travel more or less open because he supposed nobody knew him, but with Niji it wasn’t that easy as well. He felt more comfortable to keep hidden. “I’m fine with it. But not for today. Today we’ll stay here and tomorrow early in the morning we can start anew.”

“Sounds like a plan,” Ohno agreed.

Nino nodded as he stood to retrieve his bag and pull out the maps he had. “They are not the newest ones, but they have small towns drawn that are probably safer,” Nino said as he put them on the floor to kneel over them looking them over. He put a long strand of hair behind his ear, glancing at Ohno. He knew that those were safer towns they were the towns his family had trusted until the very end, the ones that had traded with them and didn’t tell on them, hopefully at least.

Ohno observed Nino blinking as he realised that he was staring at his butt that looked very nicely accented with the way Nino knelt. “Okay?”

“I want you to check for a way we could take to the main city or wherever you think we could go without you being killed. I need to get out and get us something to eat for dinner. We left in such a hurry that we don’t have anything with us. I won’t be recognised as easily as you.”

“What about a fire?”

“Should be fine if it’s small and at the back. I don’t want to freeze to death tonight it will be cold. There are sticks inside, and I really would be happy if you would promise me to stay here.”

Ohno nodded with a serious face, which made Nino smile thankfully. He was still sure that if Ohno died while he was with him, he would be the next put on trial because people knew they travelled together and he couldn’t hide his face forever.

“Take that staff with you,” Ohno mumbled, and Nino agreed as he went to the opening of the cave to take the staff and then leave.

Outside he stopped taking Niji’s snout between his hands. “Protect the opening,” he asked the dragon. Niji grumbled slightly as he wanted to follow Nino and make sure that he was alright. “If this man dies, we might get into problems, warn me if the men come close again.”

“Okay, I follow your orders,” Niji said with a pout, which made Nino laugh slightly.

“I will hurry and bring you something as well.”

“I can hunt,” Niji disagreed being worried about his human, but Nino shook his head.

“I will feel more comfortable if you don’t eave me tonight.”

Nino could see Niji fight with himself probably wanting to tell him that he could go hungry but decided against him. Nino nodded proudly as he caressed the snout softly. Then he took a deep breath before leaving Niji and Ohno behind to get them the food.

—

The night had been gone calmly. Nino was sure that Ohno hasn’t slept a wink, but he felt rested, mostly because he trusted Niji to warn him whenever someone would get close.

Nino woke up to the smell of tea leaves and smiled thankfully at Ohno when the other offered him a cup. “Thank you.”

“You’re welcome. You seemed to have rested well.”

“Yes, I thought one of us would be enough to stay awake all night,” Nino said in a teasing voice as he put out the rest of the food he had gotten the day before. They ate in silence, and Nino packed his things back up.

“Can you hide your sword?”

Ohno nodded before wrapping it in cloth and put it away in a way that people wouldn’t see directly that he carried a sword with him. He offered Nino the map with the markings he had made for their new journey which Nino studied for a bit. “Okay then let’s go,” he decided as he put them away in the folds of his kimono.

“What about your small lizard? Did you lose it because of me?” Ohno asked when they left the cave.

“Huh?” Kazu asked in confusion as he looked over his shoulder to Ohno. “Oh, Niji,” he asked as he remembered that Ohno had seen Niji once. For a second, he didn’t know what to say, but then he felt Niji’s magic surrounding him and felt the small dragon slid on his shoulder as it shrank to its lizard form. “No, it stayed safe with me,” Nino whispered as he put his hand to his shoulder for Niji to climb on.

“He slept under the folds of my collar. He likes it there; it’s warm and dark,” he mumbled as he stroked Niji’s head. Thanking him silently for his protection during the night.

“Good,” Ohno seemed to be honestly happy as he looked at the small lizard. Nino smiled as he let Niji hide again and curl up around his neck to take a nap. Nino knew Niji chose that place because he was the most comfortable there, but also because his skin would protect Nino if anybody were trying to put a sword through his neck from behind.

They exchanged little words since Ohno was still sleepy. Nino didn’t are he made sure to get the right path to the small town Ohno had chosen as a first resting place and carefully nudged Niji awake.

“Can you tell me if it’s safe?” he whispered carefully keeping his eyes on Ohno to make sure he wouldn’t see him talk.

“It should be.”

Nino hummed in thanks at his answer before he followed Ohno to the town.

“Nino?” he heard a yell suddenly and stopped in his tracks as he turned on his heels from where the husky voice came. Ohno stopped as well looking at Nino before his eyes fell on the stranger. Nino froze as he looked the man over. His face was slightly scared, and there was a burnt mark on his arm as well, but still, Nino still recognised him quickly.

His mouth fell open as he took a few steps closer to the man whose whole face lightened up when he got a better look of him.

“It’s you,” he said happily as he got closer in quick steps embracing Nino suddenly who couldn’t help himself when the warm arms surrounded him and held him tightly.

“I thought you died,” Kazu choked as he hid his face, trying hard not to cry.

Chapter Text

Kazu wiped his eyes when the other let him go. The man smiled brightly as he patted his hair. "How did you survive, Masaki?" he asked slowly.

Masaki was about to answer when they remembered Sammy, who was looking at them from a distance. Masaki's eyes hardened slightly as he looked him over. "What are you doing here with him?"

Kazu blinked a bit confused before looking at Sammy with a small frown. "I rescued him from being killed by a horde of wolves," he whispered. "We run into a few problems, but he promised me to bring me to the main city."

"I see," Masaki mumbled before smiling softly. "You both look like you need a place to sleep for tonight."

"That would be nice," Kazu nodded with a relieved smile.

Sammy coughed softly, making Kazu look back at him. "I don't want to disturb your heart-rending reunion but are you sure you can trust this person?"

Kazu's eyes hardened as he turned around entirely. He crossed his arms in front of his body, looking Sammy over. The Aiba's had always sworn his family loyalty and Masaki had been his childhood friend from when he had been little helping him more than once. There had been talking about letting people think Masaki was him so that he would be safe. "I trust him more than you, as I know who he is," he said calmly.

Sammy snorted slightly at those words. "You mean, you knew him. You don't know."

"God, I don't know what's wrong with you now. I will trust Masaki with my life and yours. You were the one that brought those men upon us, and I honestly don't care what you are going to do, but you promised me to trust me from now on."

Sammy looked at them, and Kazu could see the fighting within him. He honestly didn't know what was wrong with him and why he reacted so awful to Aiba, but he didn't care. He would not back down now. In the end, Sammy deflated slightly before he nodded.

"You are right. I apologise for my reaction."

"Apology accepted. Come now, I normally stay with the priests in the monastery, but I have a small house on the edge of town," Masaki said as he tugged Kazu's hand in his softly to make him follow.

Kazu smiled as this was just like in the past when he had been too fearful of going anywhere without his parents. Masaki had always taken his hand, and together, they went to discover their small world around their home. It was thanks to Masaki that he had known how to survive the first days.

Soon they arrived at the small hut close to the forest. It looked small, but there was smoke coming from a hole that promised them warmth inside. "Close to here is a warm spring. So you can soak in there and relax," Aiba offered them. "After dark, nobody will go there. In fact, it's empty most of the time because it's a bit out of the way of town."

"Sounds good," Kazu agreed as they entered the room and he put down his small pack close to the fireplace. He picked Niji from its hiding place, caressing its head as he looked it over to make sure the little lizard was all fine. He then put it down close to the fire so that it could soak up the heat. He knew that Niji loved the heat and he wanted it to enjoy a bit of pampering after protecting them so well yesterday. He stood again and met Masaki's eyes, which widened slightly with understanding crossing them. He wanted to talk so badly with the other about everything, but he knew that it wasn't possible with Sammy around the corner.

"My lord, do you want to relax in hot water first while we prepare the food for dinner."

Sammy's eyes tightened slightly at his words and for a second Kazu feared that he would deny them the time alone but after a few seconds the tightness in his shoulders lessened and he nodded. "That would be wonderful. If you could show me the way, Masaki-san."

"Of course, Kazu will you be alright here?"

"Yes." Kazu smiled as he watched Sammy take out a new kimono from his pack and vanished behind Masaki outside. Kazu sighed as he sat down in front of the fire looking at Niji who moved forward to emerge in it. "You worry," the dragon said.

Kazu chuckled softly as he put a hand through his hair. "Of course. I might put Masaki in danger, yet again. But I'm too happy to have met him again to ignore him now."

"It's his decision to do not yours, it always is."

Kazu nodded with a hum as he lifted his head to look outside where the sun was going down. "I know."

—

Kazu looked up from his place in front of the window when Masaki came back. "I found some tea leaves and prepared the hot water."

"Good," Masaki said as he pulled out some mugs and put them on the table as Kazu poured the tea inside. He sighed as he sat and just looked at Kazu for a while.

"You almost haven't changed since then," he said finally. Kazu blushed slightly as he looked at the table. He took the warm mug in his hands. "But I can sense that you've grown a lot. So you were safe then?"

"I found Niji, and I wanted to bring him somewhere safe. The dragons kept me and trained me," Kazu explained softly before he looked up. A small frown appeared on his face as his eyes fell to the scaring on Masaki's cheek and neck. He lifted his hand to stroke the disfigured skin sadly. "You got hurt. How did you survive?"

"Your mother couldn't stand the thought of an innocent child dying. Your grandfather got to you and sent you away, right?"

"Yeah, he told me to run and not to look back until I'm safe. He wanted me to survive. I didn't know why, but I was scared and did as I was told."

"That was very brave of you. Your mother used the last she had of her magic inside to send me somewhere. She wanted to bring me close to you because I wanted to help you, but it didn't seem to have worked, huh? The priests found me, and they took care of the burn marks and took care of me."

"They are good people then?"

Masaki shrugged with a little sigh. "In a way, yes. Do you know who you rescued?"

Kazu shook his head, nibbling on his lower lip. "No, but he was the first human I saw after I had to leave the dragons. I couldn't let him die just like that, and I healed him. He doesn't know who I am either or that I can use magic or that Niji is a dragon," he mumbled before he drank the tea slowly.

"That's good then," Masaki breathed before he pulled softly at his hair. "How did you end up here?"

"People are trying to kill him, Niji warned me, and we hid last night before choosing a new route with the help of the old maps."

Masaki sighed softly as he drank his tea. "And what is your plan now?"

"Sammy promised me to bring me to the main city. I don't know yet what I will do there, but I was told that I have to go there."

Masaki hummed in understanding. He took his hand in his own and squeezed it slightly. "Then, I will go with you. I want to make sure you are safe."

"But what about your life here?"

Masaki shrugged slightly as he looked over Nino with a sigh. "I'm spending my days here close to the forest, sometimes I help at the monastery, and I try my best to heal the people and animals, but honestly they don't need me here."

"But it might be dangerous. I can't bring you to a dangerous place. Not again," Kazu said, his fingers going back to the burnt mark on Aiba's shoulder. His finger's tingled he wanted to do anything, but it would be too hard to explain, and he didn't know if he would be able to heal the scarred skin. There was a pain in Masaki's eyes as he looked him over, and he wanted to say something as the door was opened suddenly.

Both men flinched as they moved their heads looking at Ohno who was standing there with a dark look on his face, again. "I would say I'm sorry to disturb you, but I didn't know how close you were."

Kazu frowned at his words in confusion as he stood. "I prepared tea, please have some," he mumbled as he poured the hot water in a third mug. Niji came close to him again, and he put him on his shoulder. Masaki was watching Sammy with a slight grin on his face when he was met with the dark glare of Sammy.

"Kazu do you want to use the hot spring as well? It will relax you."

"That sounds good. But shouldn't I help with the food?"

"Nah I can do it myself. It will be ready when you are back. I will make some stew, so take your time."

Kazu smiled as he nodded. That sounded actually very good. Masaki got up to pull out a new kimono for his friend. "I will wash your clothes after dinner," he offered as he caressed Kazu's head, actually enjoying the teasing of Sammy without Kazu realising what he did. For the younger, it was just as if they were still little, running together through the wilds and spending every waking hour together.

"I can do it myself," Kazu mumbled a bit ashamed of the pampering, but Masaki shook his head.

"For today I want you to relax. You look worn out, and if your companion stops glaring at me, I might do the same for him."

"Okay, then thank you." Masaki sighed as he led Kazu outside and showed him the path to the spring. Kazu put off his garments, handing them over to his friend before sinking into the warm water with a sigh.

"I will leave you alone now. Please take all the time you need."

Kazu smiled as he nodded and Niji slid off his shoulder, settle down beside him. Masaki vanished since he knew that Kazu would need time alone to reconcile with nature and Gods. Niji watched over Kazu as he transformed in his dragon form, making it clear that he would look after him.

Chapter Text

Kazu came back to the small house, Masaki lived in feeling more relaxed, clean and grounded. He talked to Niji in low voices before allowing the dragon to stay outside to enjoy the evening and stretch its wings. He knew that Niji felt caged if it had to stay close to him for so long.

He opened the door after he was sure that Niji was safely out of sight, stepping into the room. Sammy was sitting silently on a small stool at the table frowning as he looked in front of him. Kazu suppressed a sigh as he stepped fully inside, letting the door close behind. “Thank you again, Masaki, it had been wonderful to soak in the heat of the onsen,” he said as the eyes of the others fell onto him. Masaki smiled happily as he nodded waving him over.

“Try the stew, please. It’s ready, but I want to know if it tastes good.”

Kazu grinned as he stepped closer to try the delicious smelling stew before nodding. “It’s perfect. Thank you, Masaki. Is there anything I can do to help?”

“No, it’s fine, please sit down and enjoy the tea.” Kazu did as he was told nodding at Sammy whose eyes seemed to follow his every move. Sammy’s eyes were dark as he swept over his figure with a deep frown.

“You look hideous,” he said with a grumble.

“Excuse me?”

“Those garments are too big for you. You look like a boy wearing his father’s clothes,” Sammy huffed.

Nino rolled his eyes before shrugging slightly. “My robes are dirty, and these are clean. I’m happy with it,” he said. He didn’t care how he looked, and yes, his robes were more comfortable to wear than these, but they were warm and smelled a little bit like home, which was strange, but it relaxed him a lot.

Sammy rolled his eyes but decided not to say anything as the stew was served to them. He thanked Masaki gruffly before starting to eat without waiting for Masaki to be seated completely. Kazu glared a little bit at the older but decided not to say anything. They were tired, and he supposed that Sammy would be more comfortable tomorrow in the morning. At least he hoped so.

They ate in silence, and Kazu cried out in surprise when Sammy suddenly fell to the side, his eyes closed, and his breathing even and deep. Masaki was not bothered as he put his arm around the other man before his face could hit the table, huffing slightly as he dragged Sammy up before putting him on the lone bed in the hut making sure that he was lying down peacefully and with a thin blanket over his body.

“How…” Kazu stopped talking as he looked Masaki over as he came back and finished his bowl. “You drugged him? Why?”

“Because I need to make sure to talk to you without the fear of him listening in. Eat up; I promise I didn’t put anything into your food, and I put only sleeping powder into his. He won’t feel anything tomorrow, and it has no side effects. I promise.”

Kazu watched him for a moment without knowing how to react to that. It was scary to realise how easy it had been for Masaki as neither he nor Sammy had suspected anything. Then again, he remembered that this was Masaki. He trusted Masaki, he knew he could, and he wouldn’t let anybody tell him differently.

Kazu nodded as he continued to eat a bit stiffly. He trusted Masaki, he really did, but still, deep inside he feared that he would react just like Masaki. When he finished his bowl and felt no different from before he finally relaxed again breathing out through his nose deeply. “Why didn’t you warn me?”

“Because he would have known. Kazu, tell me, do you really not know who this is?”

Kazu shook his head slowly as he rubbed his forehead. “No first I thought he was just a traveller, but I realised that he isn’t just that. The people in the villages we have been until now seemed to know him. We were allowed to stay in inns or houses without problems, and people called him ‘my lord’,” Kazu explained slowly.

Masaki sighed softly before he nodded in understanding. He looked at the sleeping figure before biting his lips slowly.

“You know more, right?”

“Yes, but I don’t know if I should tell you,” Masaki said honestly. “But then again, I promised to protect you to your parents before they rescued me and to be by your side if you need me. I was scared that I wouldn’t be able to fulfil my promise, but I can now and will do so.”

“I don’t understand.”

“And you don’t have to, not yet. But back to your companion,” he said with a small frown on his face. “Kazu I don’t know if it is smart to travel with him because he is the son of the man who chased after your family and killed them.”

Kazu paled at his words, looking over at the man. He felt like throwing up with that knowledge. Kazu stood, stumbling slightly back as he almost fell over the stool he had been sitting on. Masaki was observing him so he was right there beside him before he could fall in a heap. Kazu heaved slightly as he felt his stomach turn around when his eyes fell on Sammy - no not Sammy, but Ohno Satoshi - Kazu remembered, the name deeply burnt into his mind. “Outside, I need to go outside,” he stuttered and was thankful for the steady, warm hands of Masaki who helped him out of the hut and then down to the grass without falling flat on his face.

Kazu heaved as he emptied his stomach, feeling dizzy with it. He didn’t know why he reacted so badly to the news, but he couldn’t help himself.

“What’s wrong?” he heard Niji’s frantic voice as the dragon landed behind him, holding his body up. Kazu felt tears in his eyes, spurred by the overwhelming disorientation he felt. He buried his head in the cold scales of Niji, grabbing him tightly as he felt Masaki’s hands on his back, forcing him around.

“Drink this,” Masaki said, watching him with careful eyes. He shoved a warm cup into his hand as he knelt in front of Kazu, forcing him to take a sip of a bitter-tasting drink that had Kazu coughing in seconds. Masaki held the cup safely in his hands as he forced him to take small sips until his head cleared and he felt strangely calm.

Masaki’s stance relaxed when he saw that Kazu was calm, and his eyes were bright again, and he squeezed his hands softly. “I’m sorry for this,” he whispered. “How are you feeling?”

“Drugged,” Kazu mumbled as Niji moved around to glare at Masaki. But the man calmly looked back without any remorse.

“You were losing yourself, and I couldn’t allow that.”

Kazu parted his lips to disagree, but he knew he couldn’t. He had felt strange even if he didn’t understand why. “So his father killed my family?” Kazu repeated, feeling strangely hollow inside. It hurt.

“Yes.”

“I don’t understand. Does he know? Is he laughing at me behind my back?”

“Did you tell him?”

Kazu shook his head. He couldn’t believe that Ohno was silently hurting him like this. He breathed in deeply through his nose before releasing the breath through his mouth. He needed to calm down and think clearly, but he still felt so confused. “It hurts,” he said in a broken whisper.

“Oh, my Kazu,” Masaki whispered as he embraced him warmly. “I’m sure he doesn’t know. He is not hurting you on purpose.” Masaki didn’t know what Ohno thought or whatnot, but he knew that the jealousy he saw in the king’s son eyes was real. Even if he knew who Kazu was, he didn’t want him to harm right now. He could have in the past, but now he seemed to want other things from his oldest friend.

Kazu was crying, hiding his face in Masaki’s neck as the older swayed them forth and back. Kazu couldn’t help himself. He wanted it to stop hurting, but he didn’t even know for sure what hurt and how he could make it stop. His powers were rushing out of his body, leaving his body feeling feverish as he used up more energy than his body could produce.

Masaki was still hugging him tightly, trying to ignore the heat as he tried to calm Kazu down to stop him somehow.

Niji was making distressed sounds trying to comfort Kazu, but it didn’t understand the emotional stress the other had. Human emotions were too foreign for the dragon and it had never seen Kazu like this. It just knew that it was dangerous.

Kazu knew deep inside that he should try to stop and regulate his emotions again but he couldn’t manage, that way it didn’t take long until all of his energy was used up, and he sacked unconsciously against Masaki.

Masaki sighed as he carefully propped him up, caressing his cheek before lifting him. “I will put him to bed, Niji. He’ll be fine, I’ll make sure of it,” he said to the dragon hoping that the beast would understand him. Kazu’s head fell against his shoulder, and with a sad gaze, he carried him inside to put him on a makeshift bedroll, trying to make him as comfortable as he could before giving Niji -transformed into a big lizard- space to climb on top of its master to protect him in his sleep.

Masaki sighed tiredly as he stood to prepare a few things for the next day. He wanted to make sure that Kazu wasn’t in pain the next day.

Chapter Text

The next morning Nino stared at Ohno, who was still sleeping on the bed before turning around and changing into his garments, giving Masaki the ones back he had been wearing. The older man was already awake and busying himself with cleaning the shack he lived in, writing out notes for whoever might end up here after him

"What will you do?" Masaki asked as he packed the robe into his backpack as well. Nino watched him silently for a second before sighing slowly and caressing the head of Niji.

"You have to change," he told the dragon instead of answering right away. Niji gave a small thrill but changed into his small lizard form again, curling up around his neck. He looked up at Masaki with a little shrug. "I don't know. You are sure I can't convince you to stay here?"

"No, I made my decision. I want to come with you and keep an eye of you."

"Okay," Nino said and breathed slowly through his nose to calm down, as his eyes fell on Ohno again. There was a strange feeling in the pit of his stomach, and he felt suddenly ill.

Masaki put his arm around him to lead him outside right the moment when Nino realised he felt like throwing up. "Calm down. Breath in, and out again." He rubbed Nino's back softly until he had calmed down again.

"Sorry," Nino mumbled as he rubbed his forehead, hiding his face behind his hands.

"It's okay. It's normal for you to feel confused after yesterday's revelations. Maybe you'll feel better if you tell him?" Masaki said, his eyes on his hut to make sure Ohno wouldn't be listening in. He was convinced that his potion wouldn't work that long on the other man anymore.

"I can't; he'll hate and kill me."

Masaki rolled his eyes slightly as he hugged him softly around his shoulders. "I don't think so," he said with a sigh. "But I can't force you. You should try to think about what you want to do. I'm sorry, but he will see that something is wrong when you react that way each time you look at him."

Nino grimaced at his words. He wasn't even sure if he wanted to continue to travel with Ohno, but then again, he had enjoyed their time in a way, and Ohno would be useful for him. It was easier to get close to the king if he travelled with his son, Nino supposed.

"I will go in and prepare breakfast so that we can go once we finish. You should use the time to think it over and pray, okay? You haven't done your morning prayers yet," Masaki said with a soft smile and touched his hair lovingly.

"Masaki?"

"Yes?"

"You were living with the priests, right?"

Masaki nodded as he looked him over curiously. "I did, they were very nice to me and raised me without questions, and they taught me well."

Nino snorted lightly. "I can see that with all the potions you know to make," he said with a pout.

"It's all herbal medicine," Aiba answered with a laugh. "Didn't you learn?"

"Urgh… Not really I remember one or two things, but it was boring. And when I found Ohno, I used up all the paste the dragons gave me," he said with a very prominent pout on his lips at the memory. He had been foolish when he had healed Ohno with the paste and all of his magical energy. He knew that now. Still, he didn't really regret it. He didn't know why but helping Ohno had felt (and still did) right.

"Aww, poor baby."

Nino stuck out his tongue at the tease but then got serious again. "Do you hate the old Gods now as well? Does everybody? I don't understand this new religion. I only know that it hurts them."

Masaki moved his shoulders a bit in thought and then shook his head. "No, I remember what we learnt when we were small children, but I also know the teachings of the priests. I accept both, and I'm sure some people mix them up. Old traditions are hard to forget and old beliefs even more so. But many have arranged with them. It has been like that for over two generations now, after all."

Nino frowned as he bit his lower lip deep in thought. "I see," he said after a few minutes. He would think about it later, he decided. For now, he needed to decide what to do with Ohno. One step at a time. Just like Morga had always reminded him when he thought everything was too slow for his liking and he wanted to do everything at once. That had never been a good idea.

He stood after Masaki left to go back to the onsen to be closer to nature and did as he was told. As always praying helped him to clear out his mind, and he felt much calmer on his way back.

When he arrived at the cabin a short while later, he found Masaki dishing out the food on the table with Ohno sitting at it already waiting for Masaki to finish. Kazu stayed hidden for a while looking at Ohno, trying hard to keep his emotions under a wrap. He didn't want to confront Ohno right now. Right now Ohno was looking angry and mad - probably because of what happened yesterday - and Nino didn't want to have that anger directed at him right now.

Niji nuzzled his cheek, giving a supporting thrill when he stood there for too long. Nino sighed but took comfort from that as he finally entered the cabin. There was a warm, welcoming smile on Masaki's face as he put down soup in front of the seat he had sat on yesterday.

"You are right on time."

"Thank you for the food," Nino said softly as he sat down across from Ohno who looked him gruffly over without a word. Nino looked down at his bowl, feeling quite uneasy under the hard eyes.

"Good morning," Ohno said then, surprisingly soft.

Nino blinked as he looked up with open surprise. It took a second for him to reply: "Good morning. I hope you did rest well?"

"I prefer not being drugged, but it was fine," he said with a side glance to Masaki who grinned back totally unapologetic. Nino hid his face behind his sleeve so that Ohno wouldn't see his amused grin.

"I apologise my lord, but as a soldier, you probably should be more careful," he said then. "Especially if there is somebody out there to murder you."

Nino got serious as he remembered the threat that was upon them. How could he forget about all that over his own emotions?

Ohno frowned but in the end he did agree to much to Nino's surprise. Masaki hadn't been very polite after all.

"You are right," Ohno said with a sigh. He had only thought about physical attacks, but poison would be a possibility he didn't want to think about. "I only thought that my enemies might have the same code of honour I do." Which was stupid, he realised. But he had been a bit too occupied with his mysterious but very cute rescuer than to think of that.

Nino was silent as he ate his breakfast, looking at Ohno now and then. But he was mostly listening to Masaki and Ohno talking about who might be trying to get to Ohno.

Nino sighed softly as his mind wandered, and he remembered the way Ohno had never outright harmed him but looked out for him instead. Yes, he had looked through his things, and he didn't trust him entirely, but he had not tried to seriously harm him - besides that one time, that was still a mystery to him as to what Ohno had wanted to do precisely. On the opposite, Ohno had let him pray, he had made sure they were being treated well in the different villages and had been on the lookout then as well if he had wanted to pray.

Nino finished his breakfast before he twisted his hair to one side so that it was out of his face. "We should go," he said then. "Masaki do you need more time to get ready?"

"No, I'm ready. Just need to wash the dishes and pack the rest of the food so it won't get bad. But you can wait outside for me, or you'll help me with the dishes. And I need us to head over to the monastery so that I can tell them that I will leave. The priests gave me the cabin when I told them I don't want to become one of them."

"No, thank you for the dishes, and yes then we will go there first," Nino said with a scrunched up nose. He stood to leave the shack with Ohno following behind to stand outside and look at the forest line, still deep in thought about what he felt about Ohno.

"Don't you worry?" Ohno asked after watching him for a while in silence.

Nino flinched slightly but forced himself to look up with a calm smile on his face even if his emotions were so confusing right now. "About what?"

"About Aiba-san."

Nino's eyes hardened a bit at his words as he continued to stare at him. Ohno lifted his hand in surrender with a sigh.

"I didn't mean to insult him. But someone is trying to murder me - for which I'm sorry to drag you into my mess, by the way. You seem able to fight for yourself but a priest? Isn't it like a death sentence?" Ohno said in a hurry, stumbling awkwardly over his words as he did so.

Nino shrugged at his words and relaxed a little as his lips twitched as he tried not to smile. "It'll be fine," he said finally. There was no stopping Masaki. He knew that. He didn't understand why he wanted to come with them so badly, but he would follow them now.

"Don't you want to ask about those who want to see me dead?"

Nino was silent as he observed him for a while silently. He thought about his question for a while until he realised why he didn't demand answers. He wanted Ohno to tell him on his free will, and he feared that Ohno would expect him to explain everything about him in exchange. Even if Ohno didn't say that to him, his unconsciousness would tell him that he should say to him because Ohno did.

"No, I won't force you to tell me if you don't want to. It's not as if that changes anything on what will happen anyway. It might be better if I don't know," he said calmly, realising that it was the truth as he spoke those words. For now, he didn't want to know anything or tell Ohno anything. It would be nice if Ohno trusted him enough to tell him all the secrets, but it won't change anything. So there was no reason to force him, Nino decided. Yes, he knew who Ohno was thanks to Masaki, but there was no need for Ohno to know more for now. He didn't need to make it easy for the other. Nino heard the door open and turned around to look at Masaki who was frowning down at them as he looked from one to the other.

Nino glanced back at Ohno, who looked a bit frustrated and troubled at his answer, but he thought it might be better not to mention it. Not right now.

"Let's go then."

Chapter Text

Nino looked at the big monastery as they finally arrived. It wasn’t a long track, but it was further away from Masaki’s hut than he had thought. He sighed as he watched it silently.

“Do you want to come in? Talk to the priests?”

“No, thank you,” Nino said with a smile. “I will stay here. I don’t think I would give them as much respect as they deserve or expect.” Masaki chuckled as he nodded slowly.

“I see what about you?” Aiba looked at Ohno expectantly, but the other man also shrugged before shaking his head.

“I always thought that believing in invisible things. They are not real and do nothing for us,” he said with disdain written all over his face.

Nino snorted slightly, making Aiba’s eyes twinkle in amusement. Mocking the Gods in Nino’s proximity wasn’t the best thing to do, but he saw how Nino took a deep breath to not get into a rant about it all. It probably helped that Ohno was mostly mocking this new religion.

“Okay, I’ll be fast then. Don’t get too comfortable,” he teased the men who looked at each other a little bit uncomfortable now that they realised they would be alone out here. He turned around and finally entered the monastery leaving the others behind.

Ohno put a hand through his hair as he looked over to Nino who avoided looking anywhere close to him. In fact, he was silently murmuring to his lizard.

He watched as Nino paled and even swayed a little suddenly and before he could stop himself, he stepped closer to him to catch him before he could fall.

“What’s wrong?”

“Nothing,” Nino mumbled as he bit his lips hard. He sat on the ground, breathing in deeply. “Sorry I just felt a little bit dizzy suddenly.”

“I could see that,” Ohno huffed softly as he knelt beside him. Nino moved back a bit insecure as he came so close, but Ohno rolled his eyes, putting a hand behind his neck to keep him still. “I just want to check your temperature and not kill you or something.”

“I know,” Nino said as his eyes fell to the ground, staring at the grass below.

Ohno sighed as he put his hand on his forehead for a moment with a concentrated frown on his face. “You are not warm so no fever at least, are you feeling ill?”

“No, I’m good,” Nino whispered, almost inaudible. He watched Niji as the small lizard/dragon wandered down his arm to wrap around his wrist while licking at his hands for a bit. Nino smiled softy but with a sad frown on his face at the same time.

“You don’t look good. Did that friend of yours put something in your food?”

“Stop insulting Masaki, or I swear to the Gods that I will behead you and I won’t care about what will happen to me. I don’t know what’s wrong with you and yes, I know that it was wrong for him to drug you yesterday but, but I trust Masaki, and I hate when you talk about him like that,” he hissed as he looked up at him with blazing eyes.

Ohno flinched at the heat and hatred that came from those eyes. He looked down at his own hands. “I’m sorry,” he said in the end. He didn’t know why he reacted so harshly about Aiba, but he couldn’t help himself it seemed. He watched the small lizard in Nino’s hands and finally carefully held out his hand, moving his fingers curiously as to how the little animal would react to him.

Nino watched Niji with a small smile when the lizard nipped at the fingers of Ohno before giggling when Ohno moved his fingers again just to be attacked with more vigour.

“I still don’t get how you managed to tame a lizard,” Ohno mumbled. “I know about farm animals, dogs and cats but other than that?”

Nino shrugged as he watched the small lizard. “I never tamed him. At least not how you would tame wild animals to listen to your commands. I found him hurt, and I tended to him, and he decided to stay with me. I think I’m at fault here. He won’t be able to survive in the wilderness anymore. He is used to getting fed by me…” Nino half lied. At least it was true that he didn’t tame Niji and that he took care of the small dragon when he found it.

“Oh, I see. But it’s cute.”

“Yeah Niji is really cute,” Nino agreed before getting up slowly. “Masaki should be back any second, and then we need to go.”

“We’ll still have time to go to the city,” Ohno said as he got up, looking at him like he would faint any minute. “If you don’t feel well we should stay a day somewhere so that you can rest.”

“I’m fine, honestly.” Nino shook his head as he patted Niji’s head and let him climb up to his shoulder. “And I don’t mean the city. The city has to wait.”

“Huh? But wasn’t that the plan.”

“Yes, but… I can’t go there right now, I need to be somewhere else, and I understand if you need to go to the city right away.”

“Would you tell me where to go and why?”

Nino bit his lips as he looked Ohno over, who seemed to be honestly worried about him. “Not yet, I’m sorry to ask so much of you. If you want to come, you need to trust me.”

Ohno observed Nino for a while silently. He was thinking about what to do. He knew it would be smarter to leave and go to the city alone, find some people who he could trust who were loyal to him and then try to defeat his father without people realising that he did it than it was to follow Nino. But… But he didn’t want to let the other go in some unknown danger.

“You promise we’ll go to the city later on?”

Nino nodded with a serious expression. He didn’t know much, but he knew that the city was where they belonged where he could undo all that was wrong. “Of course.”

“Okay, then I come with you.”

Nino smiled happily at his promise and declined his head softly. “Thank you,” he whispered just as Aiba stepped out with a small frown on his face.

“The priests say that the constellations are changing,” he said as soon as he approached them. “And they wished us all the best. I didn’t even tell them about you, scary old men,” he grumbled with a shudder.

Nino chuckled softly as he put an arm around Aiba’s shoulder. Ohno’s eyes got a bit darker for a second before he reminded himself to get a grip and not growl at them both. He just got back Nino’s trust somehow, and he didn’t want to lose it right away.

“There are things in the air, I believe. Masaki, we need to make a little detour. I hope it’s okay with you?”

Aiba shrugged a little as they left the place to enter the woods again. “I told you I'd follow you. Where to I don’t care as I believe when the time comes, we’ll arrive at the place where we are meant to be.”

“Right, right,” Nino said with a twinkle in his eyes which made Ohno groan finally.

“Please, could we stop with this crap about fate and stars and constellations?”

“Our lord is getting grumpy,” Aiba said with a laugh, winking to Nino before letting him go and walking behind them on his own.

“Seems like it,” Nino agreed. “Sammy is always grumpy, though.”

Ohno sighed as they continued to talk about him as if he wasn’t there at all, following them silently in the forest. At least, he thought, Nino was smiling again, and there was no sign of the weakness he had seen earlier today.

Chapter Text

Nino led the small group through the forest in silence. There was a deep frown set on his face as he felt the heart in his chest tighten. He knew that the others were watching him, but he was honestly glad that they didn’t question the path he had chosen.

In his mind, he could hear the sorrowful cries of the dragons, and it hurt him deeply. Still, he wanted to make sure that it was really the end and that there was nothing he could do to change this cruel fate.

Niji was cheeping softly into his ear as he came closer to his destination, and he caressed its head softly to calm it down even if it was hard. He could feel the little body shivering on his shoulder as it spasms trying to withhold the need to change into his dragon form and fly high into the skies to join its brothers and sisters.

Nino took a deep breath-stopping finally in hist steps. He turned around looking at Aiba and Ohno with bright eyes, trying hard to hide his fears and tears.

“Nino…”

“I’m sorry, but I can’t take you further,” he whispered with a bowed head. “I will be back soon. But please… I need to go alone.”

Ohno’s look sharpened as he looked Nino over. “Why?”

“Because it’s holy ground,” Nino said softly, meeting his eyes. “I can’t take you there.”

“And you want me to do again just as you say and trust you?”

“Yes, I’m sorry. I realise I’m unfair to you…”

Ohno bit his lower lip, but finally, he nodded in agreement. “I forced myself upon you, so I’ll stay.”

Nino nodded as he turned around to vanish behind a few tall trees and bushes.

Ohno sighed as he looked at Aiba who sat down on the dirt and leant against a tree. “You know what’s going on,” he mumbled as he began to pace around.

Aiba shrugged slightly before sighing. “Not completely. Nino is always a mystery.”

“You don’t say.”

—

Nino stepped throughout some evergreen vines with small white flowers on them out to a wide opening. In the middle of the opening was a huge tree. The trunk was wide - wider than should be possible here on the world - and the branches vanished into the sky while the roots would be deeply embedded into the earth. Nino laid his head back to look up even if it was impossible.

Niji jumped down from his shoulder and gave a full-body sneeze as he changed still in the air to his true form with an anguished cry. Nino felt tears slipping down his face as he went closer to the tree.

He had never been here. He only knew about it from stories from his parents and later from Morga and the images the dragon planted into his mind as he learnt all about who he was and what he was meant to do.

“It’s dying,” he whispered as he finally reached the trunk and put his hands against it to feel the rough wood under his fingertips. The tree of life was dying, and he didn’t know what he should do about it. “Niji what should I do?” he asked the dragon when he sat down beside him, putting his head on his knees as he looked up at him with big eyes.

“It’s still alive.”

Nino looked at the closest branches which looked limp the leaves that were supposed to be bright and colourful looked wilted and lifeless. Nino could feel that it has lost the energy it was supposed to have. But Niji was right. It wasn’t completely dead. Not yet, at least.

“Is she still alive?”

“No,” Niji said as he sat up looking to the sky where he could hear the other dragons mourn the loss of their great mother. “She fought, she lost, she’s dead. But you are not.”

“I don’t understand,” Nino mumbled, blushing when Niji snorted unbelievingly and stepped back.

“Stop lying to yourself, or we will all vanish from the ground of this Earth. You need to wake up and take the decisions in your hands. Do you want to meet your parents that badly that you will destroy everything? That’s pathetic.”

Nino glared at the dragon as he stood, an arm around himself as if to protect from the harsh words. “I’m no hero. I’m not special. I can’t do anything!”

“Liar!”

“You saw the king’s son. It’s not me. I’m just… I’m not strong enough to fight against them. My parents weren’t. It’s unfair to me.”

“Well, it’s unfair to us to not even try. The king is old the wizard old and bedridden.”

Nino bit his lip as he shook his head softly. He was not made for fighting. He didn’t want to fight. He was scared regardless of all the bravado he showed Ohno. Nino had always been secure in the knowledge that he - or more likely Niji - would always be able to deflect soldiers following them. But actually going to the snake’s nest? That was stupid.

Niji’s eyes blazed as he realised that Nino still didn’t want to fight, not step into his fate. He moved his wings to get to the air.

“Leave!”

“But…”

“No, you don’t have the right to be here. You are betraying her trust into you like that, and we can’t follow someone who would rather see the world crumble around himself just because he is still a scared little child. You are no child anymore.”

“I’m no adult. Neither are you! And you can’t leave, it will kill you.”

“I grew up… And I would rather die than continue to follow you. I trusted you when the bond was made. Now I’m not sure if I should rather regret it.”

“Niji…”

“No leave us to grief and honour our great mother. We don’t need hollow prayers.”

Nino opened his mouth to deny his words but found that he couldn’t. He stumbled back when Niji moved his wings harder, calling up a storm. He had never been scared of any of the dragons, but right now, he didn’t know if he could continue to trust Niji not to hurt him.

—

Nino left the clearing, going back to the others and almost stumbling to the ground when he could feel Ohno’s arms around him to protect him from his fate. For a second, he fought against the grip around his shoulders before he relaxed.

“It’s all your fault.”

“Nino, what’s wrong?” Aiba asked in confusion as he stood and went closer to him.

“It’s dying, and Niji left. He called me a coward.”

“Are you sure?”

“Yes, they are grieving. Morga is dead, Masaki. Goddess, I’m so stupid.”

Ohno looked at them in utter confusion. He didn’t know what they were talking about, but it hurt to see Nino so troubled. He carefully helped him down to the ground as it didn’t seem that Nino’s legs would be able to support him.

“I don’t understand. What’s my fault? And I’m sure your lizard will come back.”

“Niji is no lizard,” Nino mumbled shaking his head. He rubbed his face wincing when there was lighting in the sky and harsh rain shortly after.

“They are grieving,” Masaki whispered in wonder. “Nino, what happened? You need to calm down and explain.”

“Niji got fed up with me. He told me I lost my way and that he won’t follow me anymore.”

“Niji will come back, Nino,” Ohno said softly, trying his best to comfort him.

Nino’s lips twitched slightly at the sound of his voice. It was clear that Ohno didn’t understand the problem at all. Niji was nothing but a pet lizard for him, nothing to be upset about, and still the other tried to make him feel better. He sighed as he realised what the problem was.

“But did you lose your way, Nino?” Masaki asked, forcing him to focus back to his oldest friend.

“Is the world really worth rescuing, Masaki?” he asked instead of answering. Wouldn’t it be so much easier just to let time do its thing? It had been humans that killed Morga, wasn’t it their fault if their world now crumbled?

“If you really think so, then Niji is right,” Masaki said as he looked at him with disappointment evident in his eyes. “And you not only lost your ways but it’ll be your fault if all these deaths were void. As the storm won’t cease for a while, I will look for somewhere to stay over the night. I think you should talk. Be fair for once, will you?”

“Masaki…”

“No. I know what I said that I wouldn’t trust him, that you shouldn’t also but if he’s the reason he should know.”

“He’s not…”

“You said so yourself: It’s your fault. Explain properly. My lord, maybe you will be able to put reason to his head. I would at least be very thankful if you won’t kill him upon hearing the truth. I have faith in your feelings, so I hope at least you won’t disappoint.”

Ohno nodded a bit dumbfounded and watched as Aiba left. He blinked at the anger he could feel radiating off of him, and even if he and Aiba weren’t on good terms, it was surprising to him that this much anger was possible in the priest. He had felt comfortable (even if annoying. But Ohno could be honest, if needed, and knew that his dislike mostly came from jealousy of the natural, relaxed way those two were around each other after just meeting.)

When they were alone, Ohno sighed as he watched the stubborn boy in front of him. And for once since meeting Nino Ohno felt that he was still a petulant child and nothing more. Strange, he thought as he crossed his arms in front of his chest, sitting up straighter to look more threatening and powerful. “So? What the hell is going on?!”

A/N: I’m sorry. So sorry in my mind all makes sense, but I can’t put it down, yet I hope it’s not too bad or awful. Please trust me; it will all come together (hopefully soon).

Chapter Text

Nino stared down at the floor for a moment until he looked up again to meet Ohno’s stern gaze. He could see that Ohno wouldn’t be content without any explanations now. Nino rubbed his heart where he could feel the pull of his bonded friend, it hurt more than he thought it would, and he hoped that Niji was okay. There were still tears running down his cheeks, but he ignored them. He knew those came from the hollow feeling of the dragons mourning their great mother.

“Niji is no lizard, never was,” he said finally, his words seemed foreign in his own ears, and it was hard to keep speaking. Ohno clicked his tongue at his words but said nothing as he still stared down at him, waiting for more.

Nino breathed in again and closed his eyes as he looked back to the sky. He could see the hidden figures of the dragons high above him, and in his mind he could hear Morga’s voice clearly, telling him that she loved humankind and the hope she had put into him to rescue it, them. But he wasn’t sure that she was wrong now that this humankind she had loved so dearly killed her.

“I’m waiting.”

Nino refocused on Ohno, shaking his head to stop these intrusive thoughts for the moment. He eyed Ohno in silence for a while, asking himself if he was really okay for being the reason for his death. But then again, perhaps his father would kill him just like he killed his parents. Then it wasn’t Nino’s fault, right?

“Niji is a dragon,” he said finally licking his suddenly dry feeling lips even if that was silly with all the rain pouring down on him.

Ohno scoffed at his words, lifting an eyebrow as he looked around. “Where is Aiba hiding? Such a silly joke on my expanse. I wonder why ever I decided to follow someone like you who deemed me unworthy of the truth.”

Nino’s eyes blazed slightly in anger. He didn’t care for Ohno to make fun of him or not believing him anything, but that. Dragons were real, and because of people like Ohno’s father, one of the oldest was dead now. He raised from where he was crouching on the floor to his full height. It wasn’t as impressive as Ohno’s, sadly. He was slimmer than Ohno, to begin with, and Ohno knew how to impress and rule power over other people. Regardless of what Nino learnt from the dragons, it had never been about influencing others.

“Dragons are real, and they are no monsters of stories to scare little children. They are no monsters at all rather the opposite. And you foolish humans just decided to kill one of the greatest of them. You are blind and foolish not to see how much they suffer,” he said, glaring at Ohno who frowned at his words, before following Nino’s look to the sky earlier.

For a second he wasn’t sure if Nino was meddling with his mind or if Nino thought what he said was true even if it wasn’t. Then again, why should Nino lie to him now? Ohno had seen how hurt the other man honestly was, how hopeless he had seemed just a few minutes ago (still was if he was honest) and he didn’t believe that he travelled with a crazy man until now whose mind has fully snapped here.

“I have killed nobody,” he said as he lifted his hands to calm Nino down. “And as far as I know you are just as human as me. Also, I can’t believe that dragons, if they exist, are weak enough to be killed by humans.”

“Dragons are not immortal,” Nino said with an eye-roll, but a tiny smile on his lips that Ohno counted as a success. “And you’re wrong again. I’m the last son of the dragons. My ancestors were the first to wander this Earth,” he whispered, pinching the skin at his wrist, showing how nervous he actually was about this.

Ohno held back a scoff at those words. He couldn’t believe these words. “Are you now?” Ohno sighed as he rubbed his forehead. “Sorry, I can’t believe that, but I also can’t understand how you would come up with all that just to mess with my head.”

“I’m not lying. I’m tired of hiding, and I’m hurt. And yes, maybe I’m confused right now, but I know who I am,” Nino said with a frown.

Ohno held up his hands in answer. “Okay, well. What do you mean “worth rescuing”?”

“Killing the dragons means opening the crack between worlds. Dragons protect humankind from monsters they banished when they created this all. With Morga dead… They will come here again, and the dragons won’t fight them without someone to lead them. They are hurt; they are mad and confused.”

“They or you?”

“Them and me, honestly,” Nino answered weakly as his legs crumpled under him and he fell down again. The tears didn’t stop and honestly Ohno wasn’t sure if it was tears or just the rain as Nino’s voice hasn’t broken once until now.

Ohno sighed as he looked over Nino, who was still crying and how that was possible; he didn’t know. Yet, he stepped slowly closer and knelt in front of him. Nino flinched when he came closer, and Ohno carefully put his hand on Nino’s to stop him from further pinching at his skin and hurting himself.

“I see. And if they don’t do anything, all humankind will die? Right away?”

“No,” Nino choked, his tears finally finding their way to his voice at being touched so carefully.

“Nino, I can’t tell if everything you are telling me is right or not. But I swear the world won’t fall apart just right now. So you can mourn the loss of that Morga.”

“Morga would probably be disappointed in me,” Nino whispered as he wiped his tears.

“If Morga was as great as you say, I think, she will understand.”

“But I lost Niji.”

“Niji is upset, he will come back,” Ohno said softly as he squeezed his hands softly in between his own.

Nino laughed sadly tugging one hand from Ohno to wipe his cheeks before hiding his face behind it. “Thank you for trying to comfort me even if you clearly don’t believe me. I can show you,” Nino mumbled as he tried to stand up again, but his legs wouldn’t comply with his demands, and he stumbled down just as he managed to get halfway up.

“Okay, but not now. You seem to have exhausted yourself,” Ohno mumbled as he caught Nino before he could fall into the mud again. “I also think we should finally look for that shelter Aiba-san has promised.”

“I can walk on my own,” Nino said wriggling in the hold of the other.

Ohno rolled his eyes as he tightened his grip around him. “Stop wriggling, or you’ll fall and hurt yourself and probably me too. So stay put. You almost broke your nose just standing up. So where did that Aiba-san vanish to?”

“That way,” Nino said as he gave up and leant against Ohno just for a second. Or so he thought, but Ohno was really warm, and he was freezing.

“If you say so,” Ohno mumbled as he carefully carried him into the directions Nino told him. He was glad when they finally found Aiba preparing a small fire in a cave.

Aiba looked up in surprise when he heard them before his eyes widened at them. He jumped up, coming closer to them. “What happened?”

“I think he tired himself out,” Ohno mumbled as he looked down to Nino who seemed to have fallen asleep.

Aiba bit his lips as he put a hand on top of his forehead with a deep frown. “Put him down he should rest,” he said finally. “Close to the fire, please. He needs the warmth. The death of the great mother dragon will affect him and now that Niji’s gone…” Aiba trailed off uncertainly as he watched Ohno putting Nino down on the small free space he had already prepared. He had thought Nino would be up to at least dry their clothes, but his health would be more important now.

“Take off your wet clothes before you got ill as well, I don’t want to take care of two stupid, ill people,” Aiba said with a frown as he bent over Nino to carefully remove his robe while making sure he was fine and not somehow hurt without their knowledge. But there seemed to be nothing but the bruise on his wrist to be worried about. When he was content, he left him to his sleep, praying for Niji to be safe because he knew that it would kill Nino’s heart if something terrible happened to the small dragon he cared for so deeply.

A/N: It's short but maybe someone'll like it.

Chapter Text

Nino moved around restlessly on the space they made for him to rest. Aiba had put his outerwear on top of Nino when it had finally dried in front of the fire to be able to take off the rest of his clothes to let them dry as well. A small moan escaped his lips when he moved again, pulling down the garment with that movement.

Aiba sighed as he got up to righten the cloak around the frail figure of his old friend. His fingers wandered over the forehead to check the temperature, and he clicked his tongue in unhappiness. Niji was away now for more than a day already, and since Nino had come back with Ohno, he had only woken once after lots of prodding so that they could force something to drink down his throat before he fell to this kind of sleep again. Aiba didn’t know enough about these bonds and the nature of persons Nino’s family belonged to, to say if this was normal with Morga dying and Niji leaving or not.

He looked up when he heard Ohno stepping into the cave again shaking out his wet hair and the cloak he had worn to protect his clothes from the rain that was still pouring down. “How is he?”

“He still has a fever,” Aiba said as he got up to change the wet cloth he had put on Nino’s forehead. He frowned down at the smaller man but knew there was nothing more that he could do. They would need to wake him up later again to force more of his herbal remedies into him, but that was for later. “How is it outside?”

“It still rains, and I’m worried about the streams. They are close to bursting and if so we might be too close to the river to be safe here,” Ohno said as he pulled at his hair with an unhappy face. “There is almost no fish left there also because of the fast currents, and I haven’t seen Niji at the space where we lost him. I’m not sure that a lizard could survive this rain as well,” he mumbled with a sigh.

Aiba shook his head at his words. He knew that Niji was still alive, probably weak if Nino’s condition was anything to go by but still alive. “There is nothing we can do right now then,” he said softly as he sat down in front of the fire again. It was small but hopefully enough to dry the wood they had brought inside, if not Aiba didn’t know how they would survive without the warmth of a fire or how beneficial the smoke would be if they tried to lighten the wet wood. He looked back at Nino, hoping that whatever kind of illness took his friend would lose their hold sooner rather than later.

—

”Little prince, open your eyes.”

Nino moaned softly but forced to open his eyes at that demand. He blinked in confusion as he found himself lying on hard stone. He carefully sat up, looking around. “What happened?” he asked as he rubbed his face.

He leant against the cold stone behind himself, feeling directly comfortable being here again at the mountain with the dragons. He felt safe and secure and wanted to stay here forever. His mind wandered to the things that happened, and his face fell when he remembered that Morga was dead.

“It was time for me, little prince,” he heard the voice again and finally recognised Morga’s voice. It sounded a bit different from what he could remember of her, but still, the warmth, as well as the slight scolding in the voice, were the same as he was used to.

“Where am I?”

“Silly boy. Did you think I didn’t take precautions? The moment I caught you, I could feel the big emptiness inside of you. You got to come to hate your kind, and you had all the reasons to do so. They haunted your family and in the end, even killed them, would have killed you if your grandparents weren’t there to force you to run and hide. I had hoped that my teachings, being with Niji and meeting humans, would have helped you to convince you to step into the heritage you have.”

“But it didn’t.”

“Did it not, little prince? Are you sure you are not only stubborn and scared?”

Nino frowned as he pulled his legs closer to his body and hid his face behind them, thinking those words over. Did he believe that all deserved death? He bit his lips as his mind wandered to the children he had met. They always welcomed him with open arms, bright, curious eyes and smiles that made Nino want to indulge them and play with them. He then thought about the adults in those small villages. They had shared the little they had, and even if there were people who were jaded many were the complete opposite of that.

He sighed as he pulled at the sleeve of his robes. “Morga would you be disappointed?”

“With your decision? No, whatever you decide, I will accept it without feeling any contempt. But little prince, I want you to be happy, and I don’t think you would be, knowing that you could do something.”

“I wanted to protect you all, but you died. I failed, I don’t know if I have enough strength, and Niji hates me.”

“Niji doesn’t hate you, silly boy. He is just as hot-headed and stubborn as you are. He is also still young.”

Nino smiled softly as he remembered Niji’s antics whenever something didn’t go as he wanted. He could be like a baby sometimes. But that time, he had looked furious at him. So he wasn’t so sure if Morga was right.

“And about strength, little prince. You are not alone, are you?”

Nino’s mind wandered to Ohno and Aiba before he could stop himself. He didn’t know what they thought of him now or if he could trust them fully. But he wanted. God, how he wanted to open up to them. “Is it safe?” he asked out loud.

Morga laughed softly at his question. “Nothing is ever completely sure or safe. But is being scared really worth of not even giving it a chance? I know you wish for absolute secureness, but you have to learn that such a thing does not exist little prince. I know the world is scary, living is scary, and it’s fine to feel that way. But it’s not good to run away or hide just because of that.”

“But that’s hard.”

“I never said it would be easy, little prince. Now, I need you to wake up and face the world, decide what you want to do and be secure in the wisdom that I will still be there for you and trust in you.”

“What is if I need guidance? Or if I fail? Morga, will you hate me then?”

“You are stronger than you think. You and Niji both. You have grown up and aren’t the scared little child anymore, and if we raised you right, you will find your way.”

Nino opened his mouth to argue but felt unable to do so.

“Now it’s time to wake up. This is no place for the living as is living in the past. Little prince, I have only one wish, stop thinking of what happened but about what you want to happen.”

Nino closed his eyes as the light engulfed the cave he had called home for months and the next time he opened his eyes he groaned at the pain engulfing his body.

—

Aiba moved as he heard Nino moving and groaning he carefully lifted his head and caressed his still warm cheeks. “Nino, can you hear me?”

Nino carefully sat up with Aiba’s help enjoying the cold hands on his heated face. “Masaki, what happened?”

“I don’t know for sure, but I think it has to do with your quarrel with Niji. We weren’t able to wake you up for the last few days.”

“Days?” Nino stared at Aiba, not understanding what he was talking about. Days was near impossible, but he could see the worry in Aiba’s eyes and supposed that he was telling the truth. “Niji! Where is Niji?”

“Not here. We haven’t seen him since then…”

Nino’s eyes widened before a frown appeared on his face. He struggled to stand up much to Aiba’s dismay, but he ignored him.

“What do you think you are doing?” Ohno’s voice cut through him suddenly, stopping him in his tracks and looking up. Ohno had been out again, getting some herbs Aiba had told him would help with Nino’s fever - hopefully - and just came back.

“I need to find Niji,” Nino said as he looked Ohno over feeling hot and cold under his fiery gaze.

“And I think you need to rest. You made us worry enough,” Ohno said slowly as he came closer. Nino recoiled back into Aiba’s arms which were still holding him up. But he knew that he couldn’t wait. The pull at his bond shared with Niji was weak. “You are ill.”

“No, I feel good,” Nino lied.

Ohno clicked his tongue and lifted his eyebrow, making Nino look down a bit ashamed.

“Okay not good, but I will, promise, but only if I find Niji.”

“Nino be reasonable. There is a storm going on for days now. Niji couldn’t have survived until now. I’m sorry.”

“Niji is no lizard,” Nino said, seething silently. “Gods but you are right. He won’t survive for long. And if you won’t let me pass right now, I will force you, which will only make me weaker.”

Ohno snorted slightly at his words, Nino looked not like he was strong enough to stop him right now. But the fire in Nino’s eyes finally made him stop. “Okay, but you won’t go alone,” he decided in the end.

Nino wanted to argue but then relaxed as he realised Ohno wouldn’t back down without a fight. He sighed as he let the other put a cloak over his shoulders and then put an arm around him. “I will carry you if you falter in any way,” Ohno warned, looking back at Aiba. “Can you make some of that herbal concoction against the cold of yours?”

Aiba giggled but nodded. He had come to like Ohno over these last few days, and he knew that Nino was in safe hands for now. “Of course.”

Ohno chanced a small smile before following Nino’s orders outside. Nino followed the weak pull of Niji until he knew they were close. “Let me go,” Nino asked Ohno.

“I don’t trust you not to hurt yourself,” Ohno mumbled.

Nino rolled his eyes. “As touched as I am for your worry. Please let me go for a bit, I promise I won’t faint or die in the next ten minutes, and if I take longer you may come and get me, okay?”

Ohno watched him for a long time. His grave eyes were resting on Nino’s slightly pinched face. He wasn’t sure that he could trust him, but in the end, he nodded. Nino released the breath he was holding. He knew he looked pitiful and he felt like it, really. He had never gotten used to being ill - the worst time had been after he had broken all of his bones with this dumb fall that seemed a lifetime away now - but he knew that it would be better once he had rekindled with Niji. And he also knew that he could only do that alone.

—

Nino carefully entered the tree line that hid Niji from the eyes of the others. His heart hurt as he finally came eyes to eyes with the dragon. His skin was grey, and Nino could see how weak he was now.

“Niji,” he whispered, lifting his hand when Niji growled in warning. He smiled sadly as he got closer. “You can’t hurt me, so don’t try.”

Nino slowly got closer to Niji until he could cup his face in his hand. “My Niji,” he whispered, closing his eyes as he put his forehead against his head. “I’m so sorry. Can you ever forgive me?”

He looked into the eyes of Niji, his heart crying for the little baby dragon he had known. Their fight and the loss of Morga had forced Niji to grow up finally, and it hurt Nino that he wasn’t there for him. He mourned for the little dragon he could carry around without problems (or almost no problems Niji had gotten bigger after all). Niji now was all grown up. He was huge, and Nino knew that if he were healthy, he would be able to carry all of the small group without problems.

“You’re stupid,” Niji rumbled finally, making Nino shiver as the voice resounded deep in his mind.

“Yes, I know.”

“Will you run away again? I don’t want to be with a coward.”

Nino smiled with tears in his eyes as he shook his head. “I will try, at least. I can’t promise any success though,” he warned as he caressed the cold snout of Niji. It took a moment, but finally, Niji pushed his face more against his hands.

“Then I’ll stay,” he whispered. Nino smiled as he got up to his tiptoes to press his lips against his snout before letting him go.

“Ohno is coming,” Niji mumbled as Nino tiredly leant against him.

“He warned me that he would fetch me if I needed longer than ten minutes. Just to make sure I haven’t fainted yet.”

“You got ill,” Niji said guiltily. Nino sighed as he lifted an eyebrow as he looked Niji over.

“Says the one who is almost dying,” he scolded, giggling because he could swear the dragon blushed. “Can you change?”

Before Niji could answer that though or even try to do as he was asked Ohno stepped through the last leaves hiding them from view with a deep unhappy frown on his face and a scolding on his tongue as he stopped dead in his tracks as he stared at Niji. “Wha…”

“Guess now it’s too late,” Nino mumbled, frowning when Niji snorted in amusement at his words.

Chapter Text

“May I introduce you to Niji,” Nino said as calmly as he could, elbowing Niji softly when the dragon growled.

“Niji?” Ohno choked while still staring at the dragon with wide eyes. He remembered Niji vividly, and Niji had been just a small lizard not this… This monster.

Niji huffed growling again slightly as Ohno stepped closer without realising it.

“No, you stop this attitude right away,” Nino scolded the dragon who seemed to sink into itself making low sounds in the back of his throat as he looked over the small man, making itself smaller it seemed. Nino’s face was stern for a moment longer before a soft smile appeared on his face.

He looked beautiful at that moment, Ohno thought to himself as he stayed back watching Nino caressing the snout of the beast. It was strange for him how calm Nino was right now. Whenever his eyes strayed to the dragon, he felt fear in his heart, and he wanted to drag Nino away from it to make sure that the other man was safe.

Ohno cleared his throat when he realised that the other swayed a little bit and remembered the illness that had taken hold of the other for the last few days. He stepped closer, lifting his hands in an attempt to calm the dragon as he tried to think about how to tame someone like that. With horses, he knew but dragons…

“I won’t hurt him,” he said as he remembered that Niji seemed to be most protective of Nino and care for the other human.

“But he was ill, and is still weak,” he said, not mentioning that Nino probably had already fainted and was leaning heavily on the dragon. Otherwise, he didn’t understand that Nino wouldn’t talk to either of them.

Niji whined lowly as he nudged Nino with its snout. That movement rustled Nino, and he began to slide down. Ohno’s steps fastened, and he caught the thinner man before he could fall to the floor.

He scooped him up into his arms and carefully carried him princess style to make sure that he won’t fall again. Nino moaned softly, and Ohno made sure that his head was settled down comfortably.

Niji came closer, and Ohno stiffened slightly, taking half a step back until he forced himself to calm down. Niji made a sad sound again as he tried to nudge Nino again. He huffed his warm breath over Nino who in return snuggled closer into the other.

Ohno chuckled softly before looking around with a sigh. “I need to bring Nino back. We stay in a cave with Aiba-san. He will be worried, and Nino should be more comfortable,” Ohno explained.

Niji observed him calmly, and Ohno hoped that he understood him. Otherwise, he would feel really stupid about speaking with him. “I… I suppose you can come but not like this. You won’t fit.”

Ohno still felt scared about the dragon and a part of him wanted to kill the creature just to make sure that he won’t hurt anybody or destroy the world. In his mind, he could hear the voice of the people who had raised him, telling him about all the awful things dragons used to do. But then he remembered the fond look on Nino’s face when he had been close to Niji and the love that shone in his eyes for the dragon, and he knew that he wouldn’t be able to hurt him. He didn’t want Nino to be mad at him or sad in any way. Ohno sighed as he turned around to finally leave the clearing to bring Nino back to the safety of the cave.

He watched the pale, drawn face of Nino thinking about how much the other man had changed him already. He could hear Niji’s heavy body following him when he breached the tree line and then a smaller body climbing up his leg. He faulted in his steps, stopping for a second until he could see the little body of a lizard settling down around Nino’s arm. A small smile appeared on Ohno’s face when a tongue slithered from Niji’s snout, and he licked at Nino’s cheek with a sad thrill.

“What happened?” he heard as soon as they reached the cave. Aiba stepped out with a worried look on his face as his eyes fell on Nino.

“Nino fainted. I think he is still too weak for any long marches,” Ohno said as he carefully knelt on the floor to put Nino back onto the makeshift bed. Just a second later Niji was on Nino’s chest, observing them make sure that they wouldn’t hurt his master.

Aiba smiled softly at him and caressed the small head. “I’m glad you are back, Niji. Let me check on Nino for a second, okay?” he asked the dragon.

Niji looked back for a second before he slid down from Nino so that Aiba could open Nino’s robe and check him.

“He is just sleeping. He is exhausted,” he explained after rearranging his clothes and putting a cloak over the lithe form. Niji waited until Aiba sat back, before climbing back up on Nino’s chest, rolling up to a tight ball there and falling to sleep with a small sigh.

“I believe Niji is exhausted as well,” Aiba said as he finally stood, looking back at Ohno who was still staring at Nino, worry evident in his eyes.

“But he will be okay?”

“Yes, a few hours and when he awakes he will be hungry. Both will be, my lord,” he promised in a soothing voice. Ohno nodded as he pulled slightly at his hair. It was silly how much he worried about the other man, but he couldn’t help it.

—

Ohno watched Aiba in silence as the other prepared some stew for them to eat while also keeping an eye on the two still sleeping. Aiba hummed low in his throat as he tried their food before stirring the herbal water he had insisted on preparing. He poured two bowls of the hot drink, offering one to Ohno.

“Thank you.”

“You’re welcome, my lord. Thank you for keeping an eye on Nino.”

Ohno sighed as he looked at the taller man while carefully sipping the hot drink. Aiba had called him my lord since they met and even in the days they had spent there he hadn’t changed it, regardless of how often he had told him to call him Sammy just as Nino did.

“You know who I am.” It was a statement rather than a question because it was too apparent for Ohno.

Aiba watched him for a moment over the rim of his bowl before he nodded. “I do, my lord, Ohno Satoshi,” he said gravely.

Ohno huffed a small chuckle at those words. It was strange to hear his name being spoken after so long.

“And I know who your father is.”

“And you know who Nino really is,” he mumbled with a small pout. He wanted to know more about the other man, and somehow it was disturbing to sit across from somebody more knowledgeable than he seemed on first glance.

“Yes, but I won’t tell you,” Aiba said with a small twinkle in his eyes. “It would be unfair to him. His secrets are safe with me.”

“And mine?”

“I have never sworn loyalty to you, my lord. It lays with Nino, and it will stay with him forever until I die.”

“So he knows,” Ohno said, looking curiously at Nino before looking back at Aiba.

Aiba shrugged carelessly at his words as he emptied his cup, licking his lips clean with a small smirk.

They fell into silence, Ohno watching the sleeping man in silence. “I need to go back,” Ohno mumbled after a while.

“Huh?”

“If what you and Nino said is true and I tend to believe you now that I’ve seen Niji.”

“Just tend?” Aiba asked with a laugh. “My lord, is it so hard?”

“It’s not what I was taught. It’s the opposite honestly,” he murmured with a small embarrassed smile, looking down at his fingers. “But if it’s true I need to go back to my home. I need to help my father…”

“My lord, I apologise if I overstep my boundaries, but your father needs to be stopped. He is at fault for the deaths of hundreds of innocent lives.”

“He tries to protect his people,” Ohno said slowly, but it was clear that he didn’t even believe what he was saying.

“You know that this is not true, my lord,” Aiba said patiently with a sad, but a comforting smile on his face.

“He just wants power…” Nino’s voice added itself to the conversation.

Ohno flinched as he turned around to look at Nino who carefully sat up, waving Aiba away when the man came over to check upon him.

“Masaki, I’m fine,” Nino sighed. He still looked tired but also a little bit healthier than he had for days.

Aiba huffed but forced some drink into his hands, glaring at him when first Nino didn’t want to take it.

“You’re a nuisance,” he mumbled but took the drink before looking at Ohno who looked hurt for a second.

"You wake at the most peculiar moments," Ohno tried to joke weakly.

Nino smiled cheekily in answer: "I can feel your turmoil. It's hard to stay asleep during that. Your father..."

“He has his faults, yes, but he is not all bad,” he said weakly. They were talking about his father after all and even if he felt no love for him, it felt wrong not to try to defend him.

Nino observed him for a long time before he put the bowl down and carefully shuffled closer to him. Niji woke at his movements and jumped off him to roll up on the cloak Nino left behind with a small huff and purr.

A smile twitched on Ohno’s lips before he could help it. Niji in his lizard form was very cute, he thought. Much like his master.

Nino tentatively took his hand in his own and squeezed it tightly before caressing it with his thumb. Ohno felt himself relaxing slowly as he looked at their hands, realising how pale Nino still was. His skin was darkened by all the sun that shone down on him during their travels, but Nino’s skin didn’t seem to care about that.

“I’m sorry, there might be good traits about him. We don’t know him as you do,” he said.

Ohno sighed deeply, his eyes still on their intertwined hands. He liked the feeling of the small soft hand around his own. “No, you are right; he always thinks of himself first. He might be my father, but I know that he looks at me with disdain. I’m not what he had hoped for. Then again, I’m not sad about that anymore,” he confessed.

Nino chuckled as he lifted his hand and put a kiss on the inside of his hand. “I’m sorry to hear that. But I think he is blind if he can’t be proud of you. To be able to accept and see more than you used to know is not everybody can do,” he mumbled before he let go of Ohno.

“Is their food, I’m sorry, but I feel faint with the lack of food in my system. We can talk more later. Niji come and join us you need the strength.”

A/N: I did it XD sorry pupi if it’s not what you have asked for but it’s a small step?
If you are interested: https://reveetoile.dreamwidth.org/236861.html.

Chapter Text

Nino giggled as he watched Niji trying to transform into its small baby dragon form. “Sorry, my friend. There is no way to redo your growth. You’ll stay an adult. And you are a magnificent strong dragon,” he whispered coming closer to stroke the big snout. Gone were the days when he would have been able to carry the small dragon around in his arms or be able to hug him fully as he did when he had gotten a bit bigger. He still felt sorry for Niji to have forced him to grow up, but he knew that Niji was stronger for it.

Nino sighed when Niji purred deep in his throat, and he continued to stroke his hard skin. It was warm under his fingers, and he loved the feel of Niji breathing under his palm as he touched the weakest spot on his body. It was magical to know how much Niji trusted him, and he swore to himself to never disappoint it again. He had almost lost Niji once already, and he didn’t want to repeat it.

Nino watched as the sky turned orange before he stepped slowly back. “I should go and pay my respect to the mother tree again,” he mumbled with a scrunched up nose. The last time he had done the opposite really, and he didn’t want to leave here with the memory of his argument with Niji at this holy place.

“And then we should head for the city,” Ohno said as he stepped out behind them.

Nino looked back at him a small smile on his lips when he saw how hesitant Ohno was to come closer to him and Niji. Masaki didn’t have this fear, and it was somehow cute. “Yes, we should. No more running, right Niji?” he asked the dragon who chirped in agreement. Nino closed his eyes softly. He really didn’t know how to do this all. Should he just go to the king and tell him who he was and that he wanted to have back what belonged rightfully to him?

Nino didn’t think that the old king would step aside just like that. But that was for later.

“Masaki are you ready?”

“Yep, don’t rush an old man like that,” Aiba said with a fond smile as he strapped his bag around his shoulder to make it secure. Nino chuckled softly as he rolled his eyes.

“You are not that much older than me,” he teased to which Aiba snorted lightly.

“That may be the truth, but I’m still older and wiser. Lead the way, Kazu we’ll stay with you for as long as we are allowed. Then we’ll wait for you to pay your respects and wish Morga farewell as she deserved.”

“Yes,” Nino choked slightly at the memory of his beloved mentor. Nino held out his arm, and Niji changed into his lizard form again to climb up his sleeve and roll up around his neck. He could have just flown to the tree, but after the long absence of his master, he wanted to be as close to him as possible.

—

Masaki hummed softly under his breath as he looked around the trees for herbs and other things he could use for his potions and medicines. He feared that there might be a need for them sooner than they could hope for. He had read the old scrolls during his time with the monks, and even if the old men didn’t believe in the tales about the ancient Gods anymore, they kept them hidden from the king’s men as they thought it was important to preserve them. They all had read the scrolls, and there were some lessons on them that Masaki had visited whenever he could between his duties.

He had hoped they were just fairy tales, but with the fall of the grand dragon and the almost week full of rain, Masaki wasn’t so sure anymore. His eyes wandered around carefully as he picked up some herbs that would help to draw out infections in wounds when he heard some rustling - again.

It wasn’t the first time he had heard it since they went back here and once or twice he had seen watchful eyes on them. But nobody had come close. He didn’t know for sure if Nino or Ohno had realised that there was someone following them. Niji had, Masaki knew. He had seen the observant eyes blink open once or twice when there was a sound.

Masaki wasn*t sure if there was any danger for them. If the dragon didn’t see any reason to do something about the intruder, it was probably safe, but it did nothing to soothe his ruffled nerves, honestly.

Then he remembered that people were out for Ohno and a small groan left him. He got to accept Ohno in a way, yes. But that didn’t mean he cared a lot for him. Masaki knew, though, that Nino cared a lot for the other man even if he didn’t realise it fully yet and therefore he knew that he couldn’t ignore dangers for the other.

Masaki grumbled under his breath as he turned around to look at Ohno who was sitting on a stone, looking thoughtful as he observed the lines of trees into which Nino had vanished to. Masaki was curious if the other man wanted to know what was so special about a tree or if he honestly respected Nino’s beliefs. He hoped for the latter, honestly.

Masaki tightened his grip around the staff he had in his hand when he heard another rustling, and with a fast movement, he grabbed the stranger to pull him forward and then press the tip of his staff on his throat.

There was a shriek that got Ohno’s attention, and he blinked in surprise and confusion at Aiba’s stance. “What?”

“There was someone following us, my lord,” Masaki answered swiftly as he bowed his head, while still staring down at the man under him.

The stranger glared at him, and Aiba tried not to whistle at the expressive eyes that were showing no fear. He could hear Ohno come closer and then gasp as he saw the man he had pinned down.

“Masaki, let him go, please,” Ohno asked.

Aiba clicked his tongue at the request but moved back just as he was asked. He gripped the wood under his fingers more tightly, his eyes still on the other man, he wanted to make sure that he was fast enough if the other would do something funny.

Ohno looked back at Aiba. He was surprised at how easily Aiba had managed to pin the other man down. He hadn’t heard or seen him moving. Part of that was because he had been lost in thought, Ohno knew, but he also suspected that under this robe and demeanour were more muscle and talent than he had thought.

A small sigh left his lips as he looked down at the man on the ground. He was surprised to see the other here, and he was silent as he watched a ton of emotions ran through those deep eyes. When they settled down on relief, he felt his shoulders relax and knelt to help him up.

“What are you doing here, Jun-kun?” he asked one of his personal guards and closest friends. He had been ill when he had started on this journey that was why he hadn’t been with the group Ohno had taken to the forest. Ohno didn’t know what would have happened if Jun had been with him. Maybe he wouldn’t have been in such danger with the others around. Or he would have lost Jun because the people with him wouldn’t have hesitated to kill one of the very few real loyal people in the palace.

“I couldn’t stay with your father when you were dead. I heard rumours about a lord travelling with a whore and that your father wanted him dead. I had hoped… But not really believed. To see you well…” Jun stopped as he raised to his feet when he heard someone come back. He fell into the stance that Ohno had taught him and Ohno rolled his eyes as he smiled to Nino.

Nino’s eyes were slightly red, but overall, he looked better than he had last time here. Jun relaxed as he recognised one of the people that had travelled with his lord and he furrowed his brow when the boy didn’t look that surprised to see him here.

“What are you doing here, my lord?” he decided to ask in the end. He was disappointed that Ohno hadn’t come back if he was well and he was confused.

“That’s a long and complicated story, Jun-kun,” Ohno groaned. “One that I don’t know how to begin and where to end it right now. Trust me if I tell you that there had been no other choice and that fate is the reason I ended up where I am right now. The same fate that brought you to join our group today as we just wanted to finally head back to my father’s city.”

Jun snorted slightly. He didn’t believe in fate. It was no luck of fate that he ended up here. It was hard work and a long search that had led him to find his lord finally again. But he nodded as he had long ago learnt not to object his lord.

Chapter Text

Jun looked from one young man to the other and then back to his lord. He supposed one of these men would be the whore the people had talked about. They were both pretty enough to be one, he thought with a small sigh. He wanted to ask who it was, but something held him back. And it wasn’t necessarily that it had to be a rude question (because he honestly didn’t care), but that both men seemed to carry a hidden strength inside that made Jun think that both could probably kill him if he said something wrong.

He sighed a little at that thought. How came to this group together? He honestly didn’t know, and he worried. If one of them was a whore and a skilled one at that, that could mean that they wanted to lure his lord somewhere just to kill him but if that was true, why hadn’t he been killed just yet?

“You think too loudly,” the man who had caught him suddenly said as he appeared beside him.

“What?”

“Your thoughts. They are loud inside your head; it’s as if you are yelling them.”

“What kind of sorcery do you use to know what I think about?”

“I’m no sorcerer or anything like that. I’m just an ordinary monk. But as such, I learnt how to recognise feelings on people’s faces and yours are very loud and clear.”

Jun stopped walking for a second, staring at the man in front of him, before his eyes wandered to the front where his lord was walking beside the slender man he had seen close to him all this time. So this was the whore then. He was small, and not the natural beauty but Jun could see it in the way he carried himself that he was a proud man. Seduction would be natural for him, he thought with a small frown on his face. But how could whores carry themselves so proud like that? He only knew the ones from the city, and they always seemed to make themselves smaller, cuter and more seductive. They would hang on your arms and always look at you with faked adoration in their eyes. There was nothing like that in this man.

“This is so confusing,” he muttered in the end.

“What is?”

“Why does my lord travel with a whore?” he asked a bit frustrated. “And such a peculiar one at that?”

The monk laughed bright and loud at those words, making the frown on Jun’s face deeper as he glared at the other.

“Oh, no. Nino is nothing like that. He is no whore, I think he sees himself more like a traveller,” he said in the end.

“Nino?” Jun asked in confusion. Something was nagging in the back at his mind at that word. Something that he had overheard a long time ago, but it hadn’t seemed important enough for him to remember apparently since there was nothing more than a whisper that he should know this name.

“What do you know about this Nino?” Jun asked after a while of silence.

Aiba frowned at those words before he shrugged slightly. “He had lost his parents when he had been young. Kind people raised him, and we were friends when we were younger. We met by chance, and I decided I wanted to travel with them since I am not suited to live my life in the monastery. I always wanted to help other people and studied medicine. I think I can be of more use in the city,” he said with a small smile.

Jun nodded with a small sigh. Again, the other had told him more about himself than about Nino, which was kind of frustrating.

“I see,” he mumbled and started walking again, as he realised that his lord and Nino were already a few feet in front of them and he was worried about losing them.

—

“How does he do that?”

“Who and what?” Nino asked in confusion as he looked up at Ohno by his side. He let the calmness that was Ohno wash over him after the prayer that had unsettled him so much.

He feared for this world, and its residents. He hadn’t expected that, honestly.

“Niji, how does he change his appearance? Can he only change into a lizard?”

“He is a dragon. Dragons are magical beasts and can, therefore, use magic. That’s by the way why your father had them all killed. Or more likely, your grandfather. And yes, only a lizard. Because they are so close to their real beings. Lizards are small dragons in a way.”

“What kind of dragons do exist?”

“All kinds. They are the protectors of this world. So of course, they reign over the skies, the waters, the lands and the fires.”

“Oh I see,” he mumbled with a frown as he watched the small blueish dragon on Nino’s shoulder. He had thought that the lizard had looked different when he had first seen it.

“Niji is special,” Nino said as he patted the small dragon on his shoulder who licked his cheek, making him giggle.

“Special how?”

“He is a storm dragon,” Nino explained as he caressed his head. “So he changes forms, he often looks like glass and is see-through if he flies. It protects him.”

“Huh… Interesting. I thought they were all the same…”

“Just monsters, right?”

“Yes,” Ohno said with a small blush on his cheeks. He was learning slowly that the humans are more monstrous than any beast could probably be. But it was hard to accept.

“Do you hate humans?”

“No,” Nino said carefully as he stared down in front of him. “I’m human, in case you forgot.”

“I’m still not sure about that, honestly,” Ohno mumbled.

Nino giggled slightly at his words and then glanced back to where Jun and Masaki were supposed to be. He stopped turning around to look behind them.

“Where have they gone?”

”They stopped a few minutes ago,” Niji explained. Nino rolled his eyes and looked at the small dragon.

“And you didn’t tell me because?”

“They are not my duty to protect.”

“But we are?”

“No, only you. But you want to protect Ohno, so I have to do the same.”

“Figured,” Nino groaned rubbing his eyes. He looked back down the path and then to Ohno, who was watching them with curious eyes that shone from his amusement.

“What’s going on?”

“Apparently Aiba and your friend stopped a while ago. Niji didn’t tell us because he thought it wouldn’t matter,” he said with a frown down to the dragon who was chirping happily as he settled down around his neck again.

“I don’t think they are far.”

“I suppose,” Nino mumbled unhappily. He didn’t want to linger in the forest. Without Morga’s protection, it wasn’t safe travelling it.

Ohno looked around for a bit listening to any sounds before tugging at Nino’s elbow. “There they are,” he said, his voice warm and soft, close to his ear.

Nino felt a shudder run over his back at the closeness they shared and carefully stepped slightly back, not too far though because he liked Ohno being close somehow.

—

Nino had vanished shortly after they had made camp for the night. Jun had told them that he would look around to make sure they were safe - Ohno didn’t think that was the only thing why he had vanished, but he knew Nino could take care of himself and it was silly to demand from Jun to stay with them when there were other things they needed like wood for a fire, water and maybe even food.

“May I ask a question about Nino?” Ohno asked when he was sure Jun was out of earshot.

Masaki nibbled at his lower lip at his question, but then he nodded after a few minutes. “You may; I might not answer though.”

“That’s fine with me. I would ask Nino, but…”

“I understand some things are easier to talk about with others. If I think that it is Nino’s part of his story, I will tell you so.”

Ohno nodded with a small smile. He could work with that. “Can you understand Niji?”

Masaki shook his head with a small smile. “No, I never would be able to understand dragons. Nino is special in that case.”

“Special how?”

“He’s told you he is a child of the dragons?”

Ohno nodded as he bit his lip. “Yes, but that was his confused mind speaking. He is clearly human. He bleeds, he gets ill, he suffers.”

“So do all creatures on Earth, my lord. I can’t help you see the truth if you continue to close your eyes from them.”

“It’s just so hard to believe. He seems so… Not ordinary but human-like.”

“Because he is a human, my lord. But he is also more. I can’t explain it well; it’s like a hidden strength that carries him wherever he wants, or he is needed. Yes, he bleeds, he suffers, he gets ill. But at the same time, he heals faster than the ordinary human, he can survive things humans can’t, and he suffers in a different way.”

“Does he believe in the old Gods?”

“Yes. His grandparents have taught him the ways. They did to me as well, but I was raised by the monastery for many years after a fire destroyed our home, and killed our families.”

Ohno bit his lip at those words. There was much he still didn’t know, much he wanted to know but not from Aiba’s lips, so he held up his hand before Aiba could tell him more about that fire.

“He will be killed if he continues so in the city with the big temples. My father has forbidden the practices of the old gods. They are bad omens.”

“Nonsense,” Aiba said with a roll of his eyes. “Beliefs are no bad omens.”

“But they say it’s witchcraft.”

Aiba chuckled as he shook his head. “Nothing about it is witchcraft. It’s just another kind of religion. As there are many on this Earth, my lord.”

Ohno licked his lips slightly as he looked at Aiba curiously. “Do you believe in witchcraft?” he asked softly. He still didn’t know which kind of stories were true and which were lies. It was hard when so many things he thought he knew about were not as they appeared to be.

“Yes.” Aiba’s voice was soft but secure. His smile was warm as he looked him over. “But as I told your servant. I’m no sorcerer nor a witch. And I want to tell you another secret: There are monsters in this world, there are skinwalkers as well. There always have been, and as the world tilts to one side, they might start appearing more often again.”

“Nino already told me that the dragons protected this world. I don’t understand why and how.”

Aiba’s eyes got a little sad at those words. “They did, they love their creation and want to protect them…”

“What’s wrong? What is it you are not telling me?”

“To put the balance right again, there needs to be a sacrifice, my lord. There always needs to be a sacrifice, and I told you the dragons, the old Gods love their creation of humankind, and they don’t want to see them suffer.”

“I don’t understand,” Ohno said with a frown. “You talk in riddles.”

Aiba sighed as he shook his head. “I’m not allowed to tell and to interfere. I’m meant to watch and make sure nothing goes astray.”

Ohno looked him into the pained eyes in silence as he tried to decipher the meaning of those words. In the end, he couldn’t understand and stand. “I will go look for Nino if he is okay. There are things I want to talk with him about.”

“You care a lot about him, my lord,” Aiba said with a small smile. “I’m glad to see that. It might help.”

Ohno nodded slightly. “I do. When I saw him crying about and being so vulnerable, my heart ached for him. I don’t want to witness that again, or even think about him having to go through those emotions all alone.”

Aiba smiled as he nodded. It might not be love, not yet, but it was more than he could have hoped for his best and oldest friend.

Ohno turned away to walk down the path he had seen Nino taken earlier that night, thinking about fate and all that Aiba had told him.

He found Nino in a clearing, he was moving in a graceful dance barefooted in the grass the moon shining brightly down at him while he was chanting a prayer under his breath.

Ohno could see Niji shielding Nino from curious onlookers and smiled when a bright thrill from the dragon seemed to invite him to walk closer to the boy that occupied his thoughts.

Chapter Text

Ohno stepped further into the small opening that Nino was in, still entranced with the sight he was seeing.

“Beautiful,” he whispered, stopping Nino midstep.

“Eh?” he asked his mouth falling open as he looked at him wide-eyed, before turning around and staring at Niji with crossed arms.

“You promised me to make sure nobody would come close.”

“I promised you to not let a threat come close,” Niji disagreed with a snicker in his voice.

Nino blinked but then he groaned. He was still not sure that Ohno was not a threat but if Niji decided to trust him he had to do so as well. (and okay honestly, he had already started to trust Ohno, mostly because he wanted to.)

“I’m sorry for interrupting,” Ohno said in the end, he had fought his blush successfully and there was a small amused glint in his eyes.

Nino giggled but then shrugged. He put a strand that had gotten out of his updo behind his ear. “It’s okay. I have just finished anyway.”

“Do you always pray like that?”

“No. Praying normally doesn’t need to be that elaborate. You saw me pray in the places we stayed in the towns.”

“I remember,” Ohno nodded a little. Nino’s prayers had always been different from the one he had learnt as a child.

Nino grinned a little, making Ohno cock up his brow in question.

“What is it?”

“Beautiful?” Nino asked with a teasing grin, chuckling when Ohno blushed again. He took a step closer to Nino, lifting his hand to sort out the folds of his kimono when they could hear Jun’s voice.

He stepped back, putting a hand through his hair.

“My lord, where are you? It’s dangerous in the woods after the sun goes down,” Jun cried out loud.

Ohno sighed softly. “We should head back to the others. And… Please don’t pray to your Gods when Jun is close. He was trained to punish people following that kind of religion.”

Nino pulled at his hair, opening the knot holding it back while motioning for Niji to change. Niji did as he was told, winding up around his arm, and licking his cheek while Nino put his fingers through his hair to loosen the knots and pulling it up in its usual hairdo with the help of his magic.

“Isn’t it silly to do that? Punishing people because of what they believe in? That’s wrong. What did they do to have to endure that?”

Ohno shrugged uncomfortably as he followed Nino leading them back to the rest of their group. “I know. And I wouldn’t do it.”

“No, I won’t let you,” Nino whispered.

Ohno knew he probably should feel threatened but it was rather the opposite. “May I ask you a question?”

“Yes, you may.”

“Did you ever question your fate?”

Nino hummed softly at the question. “I question it all the time. I would love to know what it entitles, but I don’t know as nobody does know their fate. It’s not for us to know.”

“Why is that?” Ohno frowned slightly at his words, stopping Nino before they could step through the last trees and meet the others at the fire.

Nino looked back as he took his hand to pull him along. “Knowing that would make me want to change it and that never ends well. Come on, the rest is waiting and I’m hungry, my lord,” Nino said, somehow making that last word sound like a teasing nickname instead of a title.

And that made the use of it somehow okay.

—

Ohno watched Nino from the place he was supposed to sleep. They were all huddled close together or were supposed to at least. He had woken up when the body beside him started to move and get up, careful not to wake them.

Of course, that hadn’t worked with him, mostly because he couldn’t sleep. There was too much he had to think about after today. It was strange to have Jun with them now, but it was also nice to have someone close that he knew and that had no secrets from him. Having Jun around meant on one hand that he knew the other man was okay but it also meant that he was in bigger danger than if he was safely in the palace following his father’s orders.

He looked up when he heard rustling from where Nino was. He flinched slightly when he was met with attentive eyes from the other man and slightly glowing eyes coming from Niji, who was still in its lizard form around Nino’s neck.

Nino beckoned him over after a moment with a teasing smile. Ohno carefully stood, trying hard not to wake the other two up.

“Seems like you couldn’t sleep either,” he whispered when Ohno sat down beside him. Ohno shivered slightly and pulled his coat closer around himself.

“Lot on my mind, I suppose,” Ohno said with a small sigh.

Nino nodded with a sigh as he pulled his legs closer to himself. He put his chin on top of his knees with a frown on his face. “Me too,” he whispered patting Niji when the dragon thrilled sadly.

“No Niji I’m not having second thoughts,” he whispered with a soft smile on his face.

“Aren’t you scared?” Ohno asked curiously.

“Scared about what?” Nino asked with curious eyes as he looked the other with a side glance.

“About being in the city.”

“No, I’m curious honestly. I never have been around so many people. My grandfather used to tell me about the greats of the king’s city.”

“It’s not like in the old stories anymore. My father explained to me that there was a big war when my grandfather fought the bad forces. Much got destroyed then.”

Nino grimaced at those words. He wanted to correct Ohno, but he was still not ready to tell him yet. Especially not with Ohno’s friend here.

“Why can’t you rest?”

“Because your wriggling kept me awake.”

“I didn’t move, and you already told me you have a lot of things to think about.”

“True, I apologise for my words then.”

Nino chuckled but then he hugged his legs a bit tighter and closer to himself. “What is on your mind then?”

“My father, the dragons, the crack you have talked about, and Jun being here…”

“You care a lot about your friend then?”

“I do. We grew up together. He was told from a young age that he is supposed to protect me, and we trained together. I helped him a lot, to get where he is now. And he is one of the strongest men working for my father.”

“I think he is working for you more than for your father,” Nino whispered. “And honestly, it’s good to know. Ohno?”

“Yes?”

“You know that this will not end pretty, right?”

“I know,” Ohno answered in a small voice, before sighing. He moved slightly to put his hand on top of Nino’s shoulder. He stroke it with his fingers and stared into the last glowing coals. Ohno hoped that it wouldn’t be the man beside him. But with his father’s army against them, there was a pretty slim chance for them.

Nino looked up to the other with a small smile. He straightened up slightly to put his hand on Ohno’s to squeeze it. “We won’t think about anything like that for today. Go to sleep, Ohno. You need it.”

“I don’t want to want you to be up all alone, thinking depressing things.”

“I’m not alone,” Nino said easily as his fingers wandered over Niji’s back. “I never am.”

“But you also need to sleep.”

Nino looked serious when he looked up at the other and shook his head. “Not as much as you do. Please, Ohno, I need a bit alone. I will go to sleep soon.” Nino moved forward to kiss his cheek much to Ohno’s surprise and silent delight.

“If you say so,” Ohno mumbled as he got up and carefully stepped over the others to lie down on his bedroll again. Nino looked at the three men for a second before staring back to the coals with a little sigh.

He frowned as he thought things over. It was going to get dangerous soon and in more than one way. He could feel the crack opening and it worried him.

“Niji,” he whispered when he was sure that at least Jun and Masaki were sleeping.

Niji looked up at the sound of his name. Nino frowned as he tapped his nose. “Don’t give me mean looks. I need you to leave. I will be fine with the rest. You heard the lord. His friend is one of the best soldiers in his lines, I have Masaki. And I’m sure he knows and can do more than he is letting show. I need you somewhere else, please. I will need you in the city, and I need to know then that the rest of your kind knows who I am and that I will step up.”

Niji grumbled slightly but in the end, gave up. He moved upwards to head butt the man. “Take care, Niji. I will need you back healthy and well, okay?”

Niji thrilled in answer and then turned around to leap off Nino’s hands. He changed as he jumped up to fly away. Nino shuddered when Niji was finally gone. He felt strangely alone for the first time in a long while. He stood to walk over to the rest to his bedroll.

Ohno turned around to hold his hand in his own. Nino looked up in surprise but then smiled as squeezed the fingers in his own. “Good night, Ohno.”

“Good night.”

Chapter Text

Ohno woke up when Nino moved beside him. Nino was mumbling in his sleep in a language that he didn’t understand right away. He blinked his eyes open, looking down at the boy beside him. He was surprised when he felt the fingers twitch against the palm of his hand, but he couldn’t help the soft smile that appeared on his face.

Nino’s fingers were cute, warm, and very soft against his skin. He moved a little to look into the sky. The moon was lower than it had been when Nino came to the bedroll for sleep. But it was still a bit until morning would come. He moved back to his side to lie down more comfortably and squeezed the hand in his own.

There was a frown on Nino’s face, and Ohno very carefully moved his other arm to be able to caress the wrinkled skin. “Calm now,” he whispered against his hair when Nino gave a muffled groan as his body moved closer to Ohno’s body. Ohno held his breath for a second until he felt Nino settle down close to him, his mumbling going silent again as he fell to a peaceful slumber.

Ohno didn’t manage to fight the smile that appeared on his face at that, and he caressed the fingers lying in his own hand as he settled down again. His free arm moving under his head as he fell asleep again.

—

Nino woke just as the sun went up. He moved to his back or at least tried when he realised that his hand was in another. He moved his head instead just to be faced by a chest. Slowly the memories came back from last night, and his cheeks got warm.

He finally extracted his hand from Ohno’s and roll onto his back. He put some distance between them, smiling softly at Ohno when his movements woke the other.

“Good morning,” Aiba’s chipper voice sounded, and Nino sat up in surprise. The heat in his cheeks flared up, and he crossed his arms in front of his chest as to not hide his face.

“Good morning, Aiba-san,” Ohno said as he put a hand through his hair, entangling his locks and making the strands of hair stick up. Nino fought a smirk at that look.

“Good morning, Masaki,” he said in the end as his cheeks went back to a standard colour. “Where is Matsumoto-san?”

“He wanted to clean,” Aiba said with a small shrug. “My Lord, did you sleep well?”

“Yes, thank you, Aiba-san.”

Aiba nodded as he busied himself with his pack. He glanced back at the two people who were exchanging small, shy looks. He chuckled softly as he moved to the fire to start it up again.

Nino’s eyes fell again on Ohno as if he couldn’t help himself, and with a small chuckle, he got up on his knees and knelt behind him. “Let me,” he mumbled as he pushed Ohno’s hands away from his hair. “You are just making it worse.”

“Sorry,” Ohno said and closed his eyes halfway as Nino’s nimble fingers started to untangle his hair and bring them down again.

Nino’s eyes stayed lowered as he could feel Aiba’s eyes on them, and it was more than a bit embarrassing. He only moved back when he heard Jun coming back. He went over to Aiba, who was frowning as he checked his bag.

“What is wrong?”

“We are low on food,” Aiba whispered with a little sigh. “You never were one for rations, and I didn’t have a lot of food at home before we started. Having another mouth to fill…”

Nino frowned as he nodded in understanding. “But it’s not far until the city. We can collect food on the way.”

“So, you intend to go directly there?”

“Yes, I said so, right?”

Aiba frowned as he nodded. “You did, but now that Niji is gone,” he said in a whisper.

“How do you know he is gone? He might be just out hunting,” Nino said with a frown.

“Because he would never leave you with Matsumoto-san alone.”

“I’m not alone. Why does everybody think I’m alone? I have you now, don’t I? And I have the Gods if you were gone.”

“You are unbelievable sometimes,” Aiba said. “Will you really be fine without Niji?”

Nino looked down at the floor for a moment. “I miss him. But I know he’ll be fine. He will tell the rest of them to be careful about the threats coming through, to not give up just yet.”

“You think they would?”

Nino shrugged as he rubbed his face. “I don’t know. They are mourning.” Aiba nodded with a small frown on his face, and Nino smiled guiltily. It was his fault. He had flipped that day, and with that, the dragons had given up hope into him and shut him off. Not all, but enough.

“Niji will do his best.”

“I’m sure he will,” Nino mumbled as he finally pulled out the pack they had filled with food to bring to the fire. A frown appeared on his face as he saw Jun looking at him.

“It’s the last we have,” he explained as he put it down beside Ohno.

“Then our lord should have it,” Jun said with a frown. “It’s his right.”

“Is it now?” Nino asked.

Ohno caressed his fingertips, making Nino blush again, but it helped to relax him again. “We can distribute,” he decided as he handed out the food.

—

“Come with me,” Ohno said and tugged at Nino’s hand, who looked up in confusion.

“My lord?”

“I want to take a bath, and I don’t think any of us should go alone.”

“My lord, I can go with you,” Jun said as he stood halfway.

“You should start cleaning up the camp. I trust you to make sure we don’t leave anything behind.”

Jun looked like he wanted to argue, but he was not ready to defy his lord like that, so he just nodded. Nino got to his feet when Ohno tugged at his hand again and followed him calmly.

“I won’t help you bath or even watch your bath,” Nino told Ohno as they left the camp behind.

Ohno rolled his eyes but tugged him closer so that he was right beside him. “I’m very capable doing that myself, thank you. You didn’t pray this morning.”

Nino shrugged a little bit. “I don’t need to do it every day,” he mumbled.

“But you would like to.” Ohno smiled softly at him as he squeezed his hand. “And I won’t be able to get you away from prying eyes in the city.”

Nino smiled softly as he followed Ohno to the place where he had prayed the day before. “Thank you.”

Ohno settled down to watch him pray for a while until he got up silently to take that bath, as to not raise Jun’s suspicion.

Nino looked up when he was finished, only half-surprised that he was alone. He sighed as he stood up again, straightening out his clothes with a small frown before he went back to the camp. He hesitated for a moment as he saw Jun alone at the fireplace, and with a sigh, he finally stepped into the clearing.

“Why are you not with my lord?” Jun asked as he turned around for a second. Nino shrugged as he came closer to the fire. He scuttered the fish bones they had for breakfast into the fire to let them go up in flames.

“Your lord told me to leave him, so I did,” he explained after whispering his thanks to the wind, he couldn’t help himself.

“I don’t trust you.”

“There is no reason for you to do so,” Nino agreed as he got up again to finally put out the fire. He frowned when Jun’s hand shot up, and he grabbed him hard around his wrist, pulling him down back.

Nino hissed in pain as he landed on the floor as he had not thought of Jun actually doing this. He shook off his hand or tried at least, but the grip got tighter, and Jun pushed him down to the ground, closing his hand around his neck. Nino stared up at him with a glare in his eyes but didn’t move.

“What are you playing at?” Jun asked with an icy voice.

“Nothing,” Nino said through gritted teeth.

“You look like the perfect little bastard. Getting along just fine with the lord, who you seem to have wrapped around your finger, making him do whatever you want and putting him into danger.”

“I do not. He was in danger when I found him,” Nino said as he held to Jun’s arm to stop him from gripping him too tightly. “And I would prefer it if you would let me go.”

“I won’t until you tell me who you really are.”

“You won’t trust your lord?”

“He can be a fool, and it seems like he lost his mind, being with you. I was taught about witches like you.”

“I don’t understand your people’s obsession with witches. The lord is obsessed with them, as well. It makes me think that he might be actually happy if I am one.”

Jun snorted, but he felt his grip falter around the other one as he met his grave eyes. He had thought the other would show any fear, but there was nothing, and that scared Jun more than he wanted to admit even to himself.

“Who are you? I could just kill you if you stay silent.”

“Your lord won’t be happy with that,” Nino said.

“I don’t care if he would kill me over it, as long as I know he is safe. So tell me, who are you, and what are you hoping to gain from my lord?”

Nino frowned, but in the end, he sighed. “I am Ninomiya Kazunari, the last child of the dragons,” he said very calmly and quietly. “And I really would prefer it if you would not hold me down anymore, but let me go.”

Jun gasped as Nino’s power pushed him off so that he could sit up. “You want to kill my lord.”

“Maybe at the beginning. But not anymore,” Nino said as he stared at him. “The lord doesn’t know it yet.”

“And why shouldn’t I tell him?” Jun asked, coughing slightly as he tried to overcome his shock.

“Because you wouldn’t hurt your lord like that,” Nino said as he stood.

Chapter Text

“What is happening here?” Ohno’s grave voice flow over their camp.

Both men looked up at the lord, who was looking at them with a severe gaze. His hair was still slightly wet from the bath he had enjoyed earlier, which made him look softer than he was probably aiming for.

Nino smiled as he looked back at Jun, who was looking from him to Ohno and back again, fighting with himself and what he was going to tell Ohno.

“Nothing, my lord,” Nino said in the end as it became clear that Jun lost his bravado from earlier. “We just had a pleasant talk about the weather and if it’s going to hold until we reach the city.

Jun actually snorted at those words but didn’t argue when Ohno shot him a look, but luckily didn’t ask them any further. There was a frown on his face as he looked Nino over, seeing the dark bruises around his neck.

Ohno clicked his tongue as he strode closer to Nino, who stayed silent as he watched Ohno coming to a stop right in front of him.

Nino couldn’t deny the goosebumps on his arms as long graceful fingers caressed the bruises decorating his skin.

Ohno’s eyes were hard when they wandered over to Jun, who met his eyes stubbornly. “I won’t be happy if I see you hurting him again, understand?”

“Yes, my lord,” Jun said through gritted teeth as he turned around and stormed from the clearing. “I will go look for the priest.”

“Masaki will be found where the trees are the highest. He wanted to collect herbs there.”

“Then I will check that he hasn’t gotten lost,” Jun said primly as he finally left.

Nino sighed as he turned around to look at Ohno, who was still staring at his neck with a forlorn look. “My lord, don’t worry about me. They are already fading,” Nino said as his fingers wandered over the skin.

He didn’t feel any pain, and he knew that in an hour or so, there wouldn’t even be a shadow left.

“It’s peculiar how fast you heal,” Ohno mused.

Nino burst out in giggles as he shook his head. “Again, contemplating if I am a witch?” he teased good-naturally. He had gotten used to it already and found it quite amusing. More so since he really thought that Ohno wouldn’t bat an eyelid if he knew how close to the truth he was.

“You’re the child of the dragons. There must be perks being that,” Ohno said with a small grin.

Nino’s eyes twinkled at those words. “And wouldn’t you love to know what that includes?”

Ohno shook his head, somehow looking incredibly fond as his eyes wandered over Nino’s form as he made sure that he was okay.

Nino sighed a little but felt warm inside as he felt the eyes on himself and held still as to give the other time to check him over.

“There are sticks in your hair. Seriously what happened between you and Jun?”

“Nothing you have to worry about, my lord. Please don’t be too hard on him. He just wants to protect you.”

Ohno sighed as he nodded. He put his hands on top of Nino’s shoulder, who frowned but didn’t fight as Ohno turned him around.

Chuckles escaped his lips when he felt Ohno’s fingers in his hair as they sorted it out. It was a strange feeling, but somehow very relaxing as well.

—

“You look sullen,” Masaki said as Jun finally found him. He was kneeling in front of a group of bushes, pulling out greens, and putting it in a bag by his side.

“We are ready to leave,” Jun said instead of answering.

“You argued with Nino,” Aiba observed as he watched Jun for a moment.

The man looked away from the observing eyes and pulled at his hair. “He is unnerving. Nothing seems to disturb him.”

Aiba laughed as he got up and put away his bag. “He can have that effect on people.”

“He told me who he is,” Jun said with a frown on his face.

“Ah, that knowledge would upset you. I’m surprised he told you, though. Nino is very private with such secrets,” he explained with a small grin. He could guess that regardless of what Jun thought, he got under Nino’s skin just as much as the reverse was true.

“I didn’t give him much choice. My lord got angry,” Jun said again, and Aiba bit back a laugh at the pout that appeared on Jun’s face at the memory. He didn’t think that the other man would appreciate it.

“Your lord is very fond of my friend. I’m not sure that he knows how much just yet, but I’m sure he is coming very close to realising that.”

Jun huffed out a breath at those words. “And what is it worth?”

“More than you can imagine, Matsumoto-san. Nino does not wish any harm to your lord. He is very fond of him as well, even if Nino sees it even less than your lord. Your lord gives him hope where he thought all hope was lost,” Aiba said with a smile.

“You speak in riddles,” Jun said with a frown. Aiba laughed as he nodded.

“I suppose I do,” he agreed.

“Are you and Nino close?”

“He is my brother in all but blood,” Aiba agreed with a small grin.

“That explains why you talk so similar,” Jun murmured.

Aiba shrugged. He supposed that was true. “We should go,” he said.

Jun sighed as he nodded. “So, you are telling me I should entrust my lord to your friend?”

“I believe you should trust in your lord. And I can promise you Nino won’t be the fall of your lord.”

“So, he won’t take up the place that belongs to my lord?”

Aiba looked at him for a long time before sighing deeply. “He will do what is necessary for this Earth to become strong again.”

Jun clicked his tongue but stayed silent as he followed Aiba with an unhappy frown on his face. The frown only deepened when he saw his lord tending to Nino like a common man.

—

“Thank you, my lord,” Nino said with a small sigh as he felt the hands fall away from his hair. He looked up when he heard the other two men approaching with a slight frown on his face. “Are you ready to leave?”

“Yes,” Aiba said with a small grin, that Nino tried hard to ignore.

Ohno nodded as he took his own bag and shouldered it. He felt slightly disappointed that Nino was still calling him lord and not by his nickname anymore. He missed it since it put a barrier between them, which he couldn’t tear down, which was awful. He wished they would go back to that time. Everything had been less complicated then as well.

“My lord?” Nino’s voice brought him back from his thoughts, and he blinked as he looked at the younger boy. Nino had put his head to the side as he was staring at him curiously. “Is something wrong?”

“No, sorry, my mind wandered elsewhere,” Ohno said with a small frown on his face, that changed into a smile when Nino held out his hand for him to take. He squeezed the soft fingers in his own, and finally, they left the clearing with Jun at the front, checking for any dangers ahead.

“What really happened between you and Jun-kun?” Ohno asked when he was sure that the younger man was in front of them and not able to listen to their conversation.

“I told him who I was,” Nino said slowly. “He didn’t trust me, told me that I was a danger for you and that he wouldn’t stand by and watch me harm you.” He was surprised by how honest he was, but he found it harder and harder to keep secrets from Ohno or lying to him. It felt somehow wrong to do so.

Hurt flashed through Ohno’s eyes at the words, and Nino looked down at the dirt road to their feet as he tried to move to the side. But Ohno’s hand around his own was still steady, warm, and firm, so he allowed himself to relax just slightly. “I see…”

“My lord, I’m…” Nino stopped talking as he looked up to Ohno, whose brows were furrowed as he looked at him.

Ohno shook his head as he squeezed the hand in his own. Nino’s eyes reflected his fear and insecurity about keeping secrets from him. “I can see that it pains you to not tell me. I wish you would, though. To show you that there is nothing to fear. But as long as you don’t lie to me anymore.”

“My lord, I didn’t lie to you. I didn’t tell you all, that’s true, but all the things I told you were true so far. They might have stretched the truth a bit but never outright lies.”

“Still, you didn’t even tell me your name yet.”

“Oh, but I did. Not my full name, but I told you to call me Kazu, and Masaki tends to call me Nino. Both are parts of my full name. And I told you who I am, the child of dragons. I’m sure if you remember your history lessons and why Jun-kun might hate me for who I am, you would know so as well,” Nino said with a sad smile on his face before he let go of the other to hurry his steps and fall to pace with Aiba. He felt suddenly drained and afraid.

Aiba looked at Nino for a second before his arms snaked around his shoulders, drawing him close. “I’m proud of you.”

Nino giggled softly as he shook his head. “What for? For making a fool out of myself?”

“No, for not killing Jun-kun earlier and for being honest. You worked on your temper,” Aiba said with a smile.

“Morga made sure of that,” Nino said with a giggle as he remembered the dragon and her harsh training that he had there. His eyes wandered back to Ohno, who was staring at them with a small pout on his face. He looked away fast, trying to calm down his treacherous heartbeat.

Chapter Text

Ohno hissed as his mind finally caught up with the information that Nino had given him. He stared at the man who was now in front of him, talking to Aiba in hushed voices. He frowned a little as his eyes wandered to Jun, who was in front of their small group. He now understood at least the hatred in the other man. It explained so much.

His first thought was to run up to Nino and demand an explanation from the other man, but he held himself back. He didn’t understand why Nino did what he did. He was kind to him if sometimes a little cold. God, Nino should hate him, his family. At the same time, his father had told him horror stories about the Ninomiya family and how they treated the people, and he should fear the other, but… But Nino was a nice person. He was complicated, Ohno knew that. He did things Ohno didn’t fully understand most of the time, but he was driven and seemed to know exactly what he was doing and had to do.

Ohno supposed this new knowledge should make him hate Nino. Still, to him, Nino was still the beautiful, young, mysterious man he had gotten to know over the last few weeks. A small sigh left his lips. He would help Nino however he could, Ohno had already decided that. This knowledge didn’t change that even if that meant probably that Nino might kill him in the end as well to be free of his family.

“The brooding look doesn’t fit you, my lord,” Aiba’s voice brought him out of his musings with confusion.

“What are you talking about?”

“My lord, what is going through your mind?”

“Thoughts,” Ohno said with a wry smile.

Aiba nodded in understanding. He sighed as he looked to the front where the others were, with Jun glaring at Nino who was frowning as he stared at the floor. “Just don’t take to long and I hope that you wouldn’t break the trust I put in you,” he said as he walked faster again to put an arm around Nino.

Ohno rolled his eyes slightly, but not without amusement. It was something that he had expected to be honest. Aiba was very protective of Nino and Ohno wasn’t sure if it was needed at all.

“My lord, are you coming?” Jun called, and Ohno was about to fasten his steps when a growl stopped him mid-step. He turned around to be met by a beast breaking through the line of trees.

Ohno stumbled back with a yell lifting his sword to defend himself when it advanced to their group.

Nino swore when he saw what was happening. “Stay back!” he said, shoving Jun out of the way when the guard made to stand beside his lord.

“No,” Jun shouted as he tried to get to his lord to help him when there was a source of energy pushing him back. He groaned when he hit the stump of a tree with a thud.

“Masaki hold him,” Nino growled as he stepped over the man. His eyes were blazing in a yellow glow as he finally managed to get in between Ohno and the beast. He pushed him back carefully as to not hurt Ohno or himself with the drawn sword.

Masaki moved swiftly to keep Jun away from the other two men. He knew that it was mostly because Nino didn’t trust his powers yet, and without a person too close, it was safer for him to attack. Ohno being so close was difficult enough. He stared at his long friend, hoping that Nino was as strong as he should be.

Ohno stood behind Nino when the other pushed him softly further. He didn’t want to hinder Nino who was looking seriously as the beast stood in front of them. Ohno didn’t know why but at least it didn’t advance forwards anymore. He stared at the … thing, trying to work out what it was. It was bigger than any animal he had ever seen before, and he couldn’t place it anywhere.

Nino had his arms up to the height of his chest, his palms pointing outward to the attacker. Ohno shuddered when he felt the power coming off of Nino in waves. He was surprised that Nino was able to do so without Niji around, honestly.

“You don’t belong to this world,” Nino said in a soft voice. His hands began to glow slightly, and he stepped closer to the beast.

“What will a little human like you do against that? You four will make a good meal.”

Nino snorted a little as he put his hands in front of his chest. He closed his eyes, saying a small prayer, before opening his eyes again and looking at the beast there.

“How lucky then that I am no mere human, right?” he asked with a grin. He moved his fingers, too fast for Ohno’s eyes to follow, and just a few minutes later, a blue light appeared where the beast had been, and when it vanished there was nothing left.

Nino let out a breath before his eyes closed and he collapsed into himself or would if not for Ohno who let go of his sword in favour of catching the younger man before he could fall.

—

“Is he okay?” Ohno asked when Aiba looked up from where he had examined Nino.

They had settled down after Nino had fainted in his arms and now Ohno was anxious about the other as he had not yet woken up.

“Exhausted,” Aiba said as he rubbed his chin. “Which is not surprising. He used way too much energy to ban that demon,” he said, clicking his tongue. “Then again, it was the first. It was probably to be expected.”

“So it was a demon then?”

“A hell hound, yes,” Aiba said as he sat down finally. “They will appear more often. And with them other creatures. That’s why he is so worried.”

“That is why he wants to go to the city?”

“Yes, the king must be stopped before he opens the crack further.”

“Which crack? What are you talking about?” Jun said with a frown. “And how can you speak so calmly about killing another man. Aren’t you supposed to be a priest?”

“I am not talking about it calmly. But I know what must be done. I got taught as much by his family. The same I got taught about the old Gods and how this world came to existence and the fate that awaits humankind if the dragons leave this world.”

“I still can’t follow,” Jun said bristling slightly as the other stared him down.

Ohno sighed as he sat down beside Nino and caressed his temple. “You really need to stop fainting on me,” he mumbled as he made sure that Nino was laid down more comfortable.

“I don’t think he did it on purpose,” Aiba said, his eyes dancing in amusement. He sighed as he clapped his hands and got up, maybe realising that Ohno wished to be alone with Nino and not talk about this.

“Help me find firewood, and I tell you more if you are a good boy,” Aiba said to Jun who grumbled but got up. Ohno didn’t know if it was because of curiosity or because Jun thought it was part of his duties to make sure they were warm during the night, but he nodded to Jun when he looked at him for a second.

“Make sure he drinks that, my lord. It will help him to feel better,” he ordered.

“Yes, thank you.”

Aiba nodded and then he left with Jun in tow. Ohno sighed as he caressed Nino’s forehead. He couldn’t help himself. He looked peaceful like that, he thought with a small frown.

“I wonder,” he mumbled to himself as he tried to get more comfortable. “Did your mother know how you would suffer when she carried you under her heart?” There was, of course, no answer, since Nino was still out of it. “And would she still have born you if she did?”

A small smile was on his face as his fingers caressed the soft lips, he wondered how it would feel to kiss them. They felt soft on his skin, after all. “And still, and still, Kazu, I’m very thankful that you are here now. Even if that makes me a bad guy.”

“Are you always talking to me when I sleep?” Nino murmured as he blinked his eyes open. He tried to sit up, groaning when he felt his muscles protest with the movement.

“Only when I think you are unconscious,” Ohno said, trying hard not to blush as he propped Nino up. “Drink this. And maybe I will talk to you properly.”

There was a small, shy smile on Nino’s face as he obediently drank the bitter connection Ohno held out from him. He tried hard not to spit it out and closed his eyes when he felt his stomach warming up.

“So you worked it out?”

“Yes, and I wonder if I should call you, your highness, or something like that now,” Ohno said with furrowed brows as he looked him over.

“I will hit you, if you start that,” Nino warned before lifting an eyebrow. “What is wrong?”

“I saw you naked,” Ohno stated.

Nino nodded slowly. “Yes, shortly after we met. You watched me taking a bath,” he said with a small glare as he remembered that.

“I wonder… You have no mark.”

Nino sighed deeply. “You humans are so easy minded. That is why dark forces can take over you so easily.”

“No, they can’t. There are no dark forces anywhere… Okay, that demon probably counts,” he allowed after another look from Nino.

“I didn’t mean that,” Nino said as he carefully opened his robe. He slipped out of the sleeves and let the cloth pool around his waist.

Ohno’s eyes wandered over the pale, flawless skin of Nino’s body, following the lines and trying hard not to stare or blush. But Nino was a very beautiful man, and he was very attracted to him.

Nino’s fingers traced the skin on his hip, to the middle of his back. Ohno’s eyes followed the movement. Just so holding back to hunt them with his own fingers as well when his eyes widened as dark lines appeared on the flawless skin.

“People having magical marks, of course, have the magic to hide them,” Nino explained softly.

Ohno looked up into Nino’s face again before his eyes fell onto the mark. Now he wasn’t able to hold back anymore, and his fingers soon touched the warm skin, tracing the dark lines, not realising the goosebumps appearing on Nino’s body at his touch.

Chapter Text

“I always thought that the marks were the only thing you wouldn’t be able to conceal. The stories all say so. That people can spot witches because of their mark,” Ohno said as his fingertips wandered over the dark lines. They looked as if there was a painting inked into Nino’s skin. Ohno had thought that the part might feel different, but it was just as silken as the rest of his skin.

“That would be stupid, though,” Nino said, moving away to pull up the robe again because he felt slightly cold. There was no other way that explained the slight shiver running through his body. “But I understand the wish.”

“When did you get it?”

Nino moved around and lifted an eyebrow as he was back face to face with Ohno. “A dragon burned it into me.”

Ohno paled at the thought of that all, frowning when a small giggle reached his ear.

“Sorry, your reaction. I was born with it. It’s a birthmark, so to say.”

“Huh… I never heard of a birthmark of that kind,” Ohno mused but relaxed when he realised that Nino had not been hurt like that by anybody even his beloved dragons.

“You have never met someone like me before,” Nino said, wriggling his eyebrows with a giggle. “My whole family has the mark of the dragon burned into their skin. It shows our status.”

“Is it always the same?”

“It should be,” Nino said with a shrug. “I’ve never really seen my mark so I can’t say if mine is the same as my parents had. But my mother had the same as my grandfather had. Since the line of dragons ran in her blood, I think I got the same mark.”

Ohno thought about the long body of the dragon depicted on Nino’s back, the tail curling around his hipbone with the wings wide open on the middle of Nino’s back and hummed. “It’s beautiful at least so far I can tell. Any painter would be envious that something like that exists under your skin.”

“Nobody will see it, though,” Nino said with a frown. “Not that close at least,” he breathed as he closed his eyes. People probably would need to see it if, no when, he reclaims the throne. Nino stood when he could hear rustling that announced the returning of their friends. He righted his robe and closed the belt around his hips securely so that the cloth wouldn’t fall down again.

“If we make camp here we should start with the fire,” he said at the moment the other two stepped into the clearing. There was a frown on Jun’s face when he saw him awake, and he was clearly unhappy that his lord had been alone with him.

“We can continue now that you are awake again,” he said with a frown.

“It’s late, it would be silly to walk through the forest during night,” Aiba said with a sigh. “And I want to check you over. How are you feeling?”

“I’m fine.”

“You are exhausted,” Aiba disagreed. “I can see the shadow in your eyes. You need to take care of your body, or…”

Nino lifted his hand and nodded. “Okay, but I’m honestly fine.”

“We are allowed to worry when you faint,” Ohno took Aiba’s side who nodded at his words and Nino groaned before he agreed that night here would not hurt.

Ohno helped Jun with the fire while Aiba checked Nino over and told him to rest as much as possible while they would take care of the rest. Nino sighed but laid back down to the bedroll that Aiba had prepared. He rolled on his side and closed his eyes to doze a little until Aiba made him eat dinner and then settle down again. He listened to the other men settle down around them, opening his eyes again when he heard the calm, regular breathing that meant that the others had gone to sleep. He was not really surprised to see Ohno on a roll beside him, his eyes glittering in the dark as they were on him. He had gotten used to feeling the other eyes on him and slowly, the burning feeling they left on his skin was more comfortable than not.

“You should sleep.”

“You as well.”

Nino smiled softly as he nodded and got more comfortable. “And I will, when you stop staring at me as if I will vanish.”

“But won’t you?” Ohno asked in an almost inaudible voice, Nino had to strain to hear it. He chuckled as he shook his head.

“No, my place is here, for now, to travel with you.”

Ohno nodded, and Nino watched him relax and settle down slowly. He smiled when he saw how the other closed his eyes with a small sigh.

“And I don’t think that being happy I’m born makes you a bad man,” he whispered, smirking when Ohno’s cheeks turned pink as the other feigned sleep.

—

“What do you have against Nino?” Ohno asked Jun curiously as he watched Nino talk with Aiba and laughing about something that the other had said. It was hard to pull his eyes away and look back at Jun, who sighed as he tugged at his hair.

“It’s complicated to explain to my lord.”

“Try. You are free to share your mind with me, and I won’t punish you,” he said with a frown. “Jun, to make sure: I won’t ever punish you for talking your mind. It will be important to me that you are honest with me. I also need your help when we are in the city, and I need to know I can trust you.”

“I will always be on your side, my lord. I don’t care what happens to your father but only to you. Your father is cruel.”

“Yes,” Ohno whispered with a sigh. He knew how cruel his father could be. He rules with fear in the people, even the closest advisers feared him.

“I wanted to see you on his place,” he mumbled with a frown. “And I don’t think that will be possible with him around, will it?”

“I fear not,” Ohno agreed with a smile. “It’s Nino’s place, not mine. My grandfather did horrendous things to his family and look at what it made out of our beloved lands. They are changing, but not in a good way.”

“I know,” Jun said, almost sullenly. He had just always looked up to Ohno and maybe, just maybe, idolised him a little bit too much.

“He will be good, don’t fear.”

“Do you trust him?”

“Yes, with all my life and yours as well.”

“Okay, then I will follow you and him,” Jun said as he stared to the floor. He knew that Ohno had never been to happy about his heirloom of the kingdom, and this might make him more content now, then it was okay, somehow. “You have feelings for him?”

“I’m attracted to him,” Ohno agreed softly. He didn’t know what his feelings were precise.

Jun nodded with a frown, as he bit his lips. “I understand. So now I shall protect you both.”

“I believe Nino is very capable of that for himself.”

Jun clicked his tongue as he nodded. “That is true so far. But he draws attention to himself. And if you want to be safe in the city, so close to your father then he has to change his appearance, you as well, my lord.”

Ohno’s eyes twinkled as he nodded. “I trust you to come up with something,” he said before he sighed when Nino declared that they should go. He agreed with the other even if he would like to stay hidden inside the woods for just a bit longer, hiding away from all their duties and dangers.

—

“Are you sure that Niji will be there when we are in the city?”

“Yes,” Nino said as he nodded slightly, looking at Ohno beside him. “We are bonded so I can communicate with him. I also know if he is in danger as the other way around and Niji has ways to reach me fast.”

“That’s good then,” Ohno said relieved. “I still don’t understand why he had to leave.”

“Because,” he mumbled. “There might be a war, and they needed to be warned. Niji is swift. It made the most sense to send him.”

Ohno nodded as he stared to the path in front of them, strolling beside of Nino, a concentrated frown on his face. Nino felt his fingers twitch as if to touch him, but he held back the best he could. He shouldn’t be too forward or brash. The tension between them was already strange enough.

“My lord?”

“Yes?”

“Can you tell me about your father?”

“If you stop calling me my lord,” Ohno said as he looked him over with a soft smile on his face. “But there is not much to tell, I fear, your highness.”

There was a teasing in his voice that made Nino blush slightly as he lowered his eyes to the ground. “How should I call you then?”

“I would like it if you used my given name, Satoshi. But if you can’t bring yourself to do so, then I would at least ask you to call my Sammy again.”

Nino’s lips quirked a little at those words as he nodded. “Okay, then, can you tell me about your family, Sammy?”

“I suppose I can try at least.”

Chapter Text

“You look worried,” Aiba observed as he looked at Jun who was walking beside him with a frown on his face. “In fact, since we met you look either worried or mad,” he said with a small grin when Jun rolled his eyes at those words.

“We can’t be all as carefree as you seem to be,” Jun answered with a sigh. He looked at the pair behind them. He didn’t like it really that his lord had feelings for the other man, but he knew that he needed to accept it if he didn’t want to pull his lord’s anger upon himself. And he didn’t. He looked up to Ohno, always had, and probably always would.

“I’m not,” Aiba said suddenly, pulling him out of his thoughts. “I just think that good things will come to you if you smile and accept them. More than if you always expect the worst.”

“Maybe,” Jun allowed with a sigh. “But there are always bad and worse things happening at the castle. The king is not known for his gentle ways or his forgiving mind,” he explained.

Aiba hummed in understanding. “That sounds awful. But it’s not why you look so worried.”

“No, it’s not. We are close to the city. I fear that we might head right into an ambush if we continue like that. I don’t know how the situation there is since it has been many nights since I left my home in search of my lord. It’s been even longer for my lord since he had left.”

“I can see that since I have been a few moons with the lord already, and I’m sure that Nino has been with your lord for a long time already all alone.”

Jun nodded in agreement as he pulled at his hair. “My lord is many things, but he is not good at being inconspicuous. I fear that he would draw the looks upon himself. The same with your friend. He is very unique, exotic almost,” he mumbled as he looked back again. His lord was a well-known figure in the city. But Nino beside him looked like he came out of a fairytale. He had thought so from the beginning, how he walked and held himself spoke of confidence and a kind of sureness commoners usually didn’t manage. Since his skin was so fair and his hair shined as if it had an inbuilt glow it just looked as if someone had drawn him and he stepped out of that picture, seeing the world for the first time.

He supposed it made sense. As far as he knew he had lost his parents when he was small and even if Jun didn’t know how he had survived without his parents around, it was clear that he had been trained and taught by someone very wise, probably in a secluded place where he wasn’t used to many people and the goings of their city.

“What would you suggest that we do to make sure that they are safe?”

Jun breathed, he didn’t like the thought that came to his mind, and Aiba hid a small smirk as he saw the unwillingness in Jun’s whole demeanour as to what he was about to say.

“We have to go first and see if there is something. I can go to the castle, I know all the secret pathways to get to know what they are on the look-out for. You can mingle with the common folk. They always seem do be frightened of me, regardless of how I disguise myself.”

Aiba chuckled at the word as he lifted his hand to draw his fingers over his eyebrows before Jun could step back in his surprise. “It might be because of your stature. It is very imposing.”

Jun blushed at those words and took a step further back so that there was space beside them. He looked at the other two behind them, but they seemed to be lost in their own conversation, and for that, he was very thankful.

“But yes, I think it would be a good idea. Nino can make sure that your lord and he is safe if they stay in the woods. He knows his ways.”

“Is it true that the Ninomiya are following dark powers?”

“Are you fearful that your lord would be in danger with him?”

Jun hesitated a little bit, but he nodded. “Yes, and I don’t understand how he would be able to hide them in the woods if not. It is dangerous as we had experienced just the day before.”

“He has his powers, yes. It’s hard to deny them since you have seen them. But they are not joined with dark forces, I promise. And I can assure you that he will protect your lord with everything he has as long as it wouldn’t kill him.”

“So he wouldn’t give his life for him?”

Aiba shook his head with a sad smile. “No. Even if it would kill him inside that he has to see your lord dies, he knows that it is important that he survives until his task is fulfilled.”

“It is hard for me to believe that something is more important,” Jun muttered darkly. For he had, of course, give his life for his lord.

“The world is,” Aiba answered as he looked back at his friend.

Nino looked up as he felt the eyes on him, his brows were furrowed in question as he saw the look in Aiba’s eyes who only smiled brighter.

“Jun and I decided that it would be best for you and the lord to stay here for a fortnight or maybe longer while we go to the city to investigate if there is danger awaiting you.”

Ohno didn’t look happy, but after a while, he slowly nodded. “It seems to be a wise thing to do,” he agreed with a sigh. “Even if I don’t like it.”

“I suppose you are right,” Nino agreed. “We will wait hidden, and I trust you to know how to find me if it’s time.”

“I will,” Aiba agreed with a small smile.

Jun bowed in front of his lord. “We will hurry.”

“Don’t put yourself in danger because you are imperceptive,” Ohno warned him with a soft smile. Jun nodded and soon enough both men were gone from their spot while Nino and Ohno stayed back.

—

“If I only tell you about the time I have to spend with my parents myself the story is going to be very short,” Ohno said with a sigh after they had walked for a while in silence.

“I don’t mind if you just tell me what you feel comfortable with,” Nino said with a smile, his hand still in his own. He could feel that Ohno was uncomfortable as he thought about his family, but he was honestly inquisitive about the man that he always considered as a monster of. He wanted to know if he was different in the eyes of his very own son.

“My mother died shortly after my birth. I don’t have a clear memory of her just vague images in my mind. A smile, long brownish hair. But those are probably just things I think I remember. I have seen pictures of her so I might have made those things up in my mind in the hopes to remember just a little bit. I was far too young to have real memories. The maids looking after me said that she was ill already before birth, but she wanted to give me life. Sometimes I wish I would’ve died in her arms, then again I’m thankful for her gift to me.”

Nino hummed softly as he squeezed his hand in his own. He smiled when the fingers twitched against his own.

“My mother was a happy, cheerful woman. She sang me to sleep, she hugged me and healed any wounds I could have. And since I was friends with Masaki from a young age, there were a lot of bruises. Masaki always made us have adventures when I didn’t have to attend to lessons. Masaki says I look much like her, just my nose and quirk of my lips are more like my father,” Nino explained in a soft voice. He feared that his words might hurt Ohno, but it seemed right to tell him truths about his family in exchange for Ohno’s stories for him. “She cried for Masaki and me to run, to hide when the fires appeared. She tried to reach my father, who was fully unprotected while the blood of the dragons inside her body made her withstand the heat a bit better. It was still too much, but in the end, I believe it was the stones falling down, broken from the fire that took her life. Not the heat or fires themselves. My mother died trying to protect my father and Masaki’s parents, who were too stubborn to run away and safe their own lives and leaving my family behind. I still remember the burning heat in my back as I ran just like my grandparents and my parents ordered me. I think… I think I would never forget her cries.”

Ohno watched him in surprise at his soft voice and words. He hadn’t expected him to tell him something about himself. He felt a nervous flutter in his stomach as he listened to the secrets surrounding Nino. It was half as if he feared that the excitement about the other would fade, but the opposite was correct, to be honest.

“My father… I don’t know much about him. I don’t see him often. I mostly am by myself when it’s mealtime only once a week we would eat together in the grand hall. We would sit on opposite sides of the table, and he would ask me about my lessons of the week. What I’ve been taught by the many scholars, how I did at my combat training. He mostly gets the information from my teachers, and he is never content with the findings. I seem to never quite reach his expectations regardless of how hard I try. He doesn’t like festivities, so we never have them at the castle. He doesn’t exactly approve me going to the city and mingling with the common folk, but in a way, he agrees that it is important to get to know them to decide what they would need or when disquiet would rise,” Ohno said, a small frown on his face. “He hasn’t changed much over the years as far as I can tell. Sometimes I imagine his hair to grey, but the next time it seems as black as it used to be. I’m sorry that I can’t tell you much. He isn’t a warm man. He is feared by most people. Even I am not free of fear when I think of him.”

“What did he do?”

“He tends to punish people when they don’t do as he wants them to. He doesn’t stop in front of his own kind. But he is not as cruel when it’s me then when it’s others.”

“How so?” Nino asked, not knowing if he honestly wanted to know the answer. Ohno opened his lips to answer when he felt Aiba’s gaze on him. He lifted his eyes to watch him with a frown on his face. He knew that Aiba had talked to Jun about him, he could see it on the guilty expression that was on his face. Still, he fainted ignorance as he tilted his head and listened to their proposal.

He was silent as he thought it was probably not necessary for them to do so. He would be able to shroud their presence from curious onlookers. Then again, if Niji would be late, it could be tiring, and he didn’t know how strong Ohno’s father really was. Also, if there was anything terrible going on, it might be that he wouldn’t be able to keep his cool and reveal them because he got angry. So he agreed with the other two after Ohno did, retaking his hand, as he watched Jun and Aiba leave them alone.

He and Ohno stayed in silence for a while, before Nino tugged at Ohno’s hand. “We should not stay on the path, Sammy,” he whispered as he led him into the rough terrain between the trees instead of the man-made path.

Chapter Text

Ohno followed Nino in silence for a while, before Nino tugged at his hand so that they were side by side again. “Where are we going?”

Ohno asked, half amused, half curious. Nino shrugged a little bit. “Somewhere nice. I think a space with flowers and grass would be good. And water close by.”

“Isn’t it dangerous to stay at such a nice place? Wouldn’t that be the first where people would settle down?”

“Maybe. But I can conjure a mirage so that nobody will see us if they are not looking for us.”

“Sounds good,” Ohno mumbled as he moved closer to Nino. Nino chuckled when their shoulders touched.

“My lord, I didn’t forget about our talk before.”

“Me neither,” Ohno sighed as he scraped his fingers through his hair. He sighed deeply at the thought of their earlier talk.

“Sammy, will you tell me about your father? He is the man I’ll be going against, it would help me,” Nino said softly in the end.

“Would you tell me about your father?”

“Of course, shall I begin?” Nino asked as he led him through a few trees to a burrow with a little smile as he pulled Ohno down with him to sit side by side. Their hands were still clasped together.

“I would like that.”

“Okay, then listen.”

Ohno smiled when Nino turned to face him, taking his second hand in his own as well, staring at their intertwined fingers.

“I think my first crush was my father. I loved spending time with him and learning things from him. He taught me how to follow tracks and to climb and survive in the woods. For me it was a big adventure, now I know that it was meant to prepare me for what might happen, and did happen in the end. I mean I learnt a lot from Morga as well, but in the end, they are dragons. The basics I had to learn from my parents before.”

“That sounds harsh,” Ohno hummed with a frown on his face. Nino giggled as he shook his head.

“It wasn’t. It was fun and playful. I never thought it was preparing me for something. I only realised later, when they were dead, and I was with the dragons, and they taught me even more. And it helped that I wanted to be just like my father. So I was happy with everything he showed me.”

Ohno nodded a little bit as he thought about it. It took a while but then he kind of understood what the other meant.

“I bet it was a cute sight, seeing you following your father,” he grinned then. “Especially if you had a crush on him. Even though I’m surprised.”

“Surprised why?”

“I always thought that the crush of little boys were their mothers.”

Nino shrugged as he tapped Ohno’s long fingers. They reminded him of his father, he thought absentmindedly. His father had very delicate fingers as well.

“I had a crush on Aiba’s mother. She was always laughing and singing. My mother was my mother. I loved her, still, do when I think of her, but I liked how she would hug me warmly and stroke my hair. Not in that way. And I never really cared about gender. I don’t think that’s important if you can see into the people’s hearts.”

“What about mine?” Ohno asked almost in a whisper. He feared his answer since if he came after his father, it had to be an awful one.

“Yours is one of the most beautiful I’ve ever met,” Ohno said with sparkling eyes. “Otherwise I wouldn’t let you come with me like that and tell you these things.”

Ohno allowed a small smile on his face before his face got dark again. “Your family sounds like the total opposite from mine,” he mumbled after a while.

“My father had always been cruel like I already said. He never had a kind word to anybody as far as I can tell. I’m sure he forced himself on my mother and that it was her broken heart that killed her in the end, not any complications. He forced a tight training regime on me and a strict lessons plan. If I didn’t perform perfectly, the guards would report to him, and I would be summoned. I hated these times. First, my father would tell me how disappointed he was in me. Then he would beat me until he thought the punishment I deserved was over,” he mumbled with a sigh.

“That sounds horrible,” Nino whispered, his mouth falling slightly open.

“My father is not a kind man,” Ohno just said with a small shrug as he adverted his eyes to look at the ground. “He never was. And I know that he is even crueller to the people he thinks are even more worthless.”

“I don’t think your father would call you worthless,” Nino said with a small frown. “No parent could hate their child.”

“He said so himself. And it’s okay. I feel no love towards him either. And as I said, I’m lucky. There is worse.”

“Tell me, Sammy. It weighs heavy on your mind.”

“Can you read that too?” Ohno tried to joke, but Nino shook his head.

“But you always have this broken look in your eyes when you think about whatever happened. I know that my questions brought that up and I am sorry for that, Sammy. That is why I want you to share your burden with me.”

Ohno stared at him for a while before he closed his eyes, breathing in deeply. “I was still very young, four or five years old when it happened,” Ohno whispered. Nino’s lips twitched as he tried not to imagine a small child with big innocent eyes, still innocents to the horrible things that happened in this world.

“There was a temple, they sheltered orphans of all ages and in the city there tend to be many orphans. Children being abandoned by their parents because there is never enough food or money to bring them through. The temples are supported by the king and the richer people around, so the children are taken care of there. Of course, it was a temple for the new Gods, the Gods my grandfather brought with him when he entered the kingdom, but… It was all a front. There were no teachings of the new religion but the teachings of the old Gods, teaching about dragons who protect us and are not the monsters my family makes them out to be. My father… He found out. I don’t know who blabbered about it, but I know that he did not survive either, my father killed him just es he did with the temple. We were all forced onto the streets when he got his revenge. It would have been terrible enough if he had just had his guards killed him, but he didn’t.”

Nino moved closer to him, and Ohno felt himself relax at the warmth of the other body so close to his body. He couldn’t help himself. His body now just relaxed if he was close to the other. It helped the horror that was in his body.

“He had them barricade the doors and windows and put the whole thing on fire. I will never forget the cries and smell. And the worst thing was that I did nothing to help or stop it.”

“You said it yourself, you were a child, not much older than a toddling baby.”

“Still…”

“No, Sammy, you can’t take the faults and sins of your father on yourself. He did that all. Not you. You are as much a victim as those innocent people. What happened was horrible, but not your fault. What happened to you wasn’t your fault as well but just as terrible. Did you ever mourn for all the things that happened?”

“I cried over their deaths,” Ohno murmured. “My father called me a weakling and punished me for making me strong and building up an armour.”

“I didn’t talk about them,” Nino said with a sigh and small smile. He shuffled a little bit closer to the other until their knees met. He caressed his wrist with his fingers before they wandered up, cupping Ohno’s face.

“I talked about you. Did you ever grieve over the horrors that happened to you.”

“It wasn’t that bad,” Ohno mumbled.

Nino shook his head as his thumb stroked the tear away running over his cheeks. “It was. But he is wrong. You always were strong, more reliable than anybody else for not becoming who he tried to make you and staying true to yourself.

Ohno would never be able to tell when it happened, but suddenly Nino was on his lap. Ohno’s finger in the long soft locks of Nino’s hair as he tilted the head of the other, pressing his lips against the plastic warm ones of the other. And Nino, to Ohno’s big surprise, didn’t move back but opened his lips, when Ohno nipped them.

Chapter Text

Nino pushed Ohno onto his back as he continued to kiss him. He caressed his tongue with his own, nibbling at the pliant soft flesh of them as his hands wandered under the robe Ohno wear. Ohno groaned into the kiss as Nino’s fingers found the nipples of the other tracing them with his fingertips as he felt them harden under his touch.

Nino moved back just slightly to stare down at the man under him. Ohno’s pupils were blown wide his mouth hung slightly open as he breathed harshly. A small smirk appeared on Nino’s face, his eyes dark when he twisted one of the hardened buds under his fingers. Ohno’s moan was sweet and wanton. Nino moved down again, pressing his lips just for a moment against the ones of the other before they moved further down. He nipped at the sweet skin of the other as his lips found the pulse on Ohno’s neck, biting at it and licking the sweat away from the hollow of his neck.

The tension between them had been so high during those last few weeks, building up until only the smallest thing would tip them off, and it seemed that the sharing of their lives had been that. Nino was not sure if he would be able to hold back right now, but it doesn’t seem as if Ohno wanted him to. At least if the tugging of hands again his own robes was any indication.

Ohno seemed to see the insecurity in Nino’s eyes as he lifted his head again, and his eyes went dark for just a moment. “Don’t you dare to stop,” he pressed out as he pulled him down again to press their lips together into a fervent kiss.

Nino moved back again, ignoring the low whine in Ohno’s throat at that. He looked at him with severe eyes before grinning softly. “Then I won’t,” he promised as he attached his lips against his neck again.

He made his way down, his lips caressing the warm skin under them, as his fingers wandered low to open the belt around Ohno’s waist. He let the cloth fall open without it securing it anymore.

As he reached the darkened buds with his lips this time, he tasted them with his tongue, listening to the sweet sounds Ohno made at his caresses. He moved back again a little bit to look down at the other. His hands spread out on the darkened muscled skin of his stomach, taking in the difference of their skin tones. They spent the same amount of time outside, but still, his hands were pale in comparison.

Still, the darkened nipples of Ohno stood out on his chest as it was. His hands wandered up again, as he couldn’t stop himself, then remembering that there was no need for him to stop as his fingers stroked the darkened skin. His eyes traced the lines of his body until they met the waistband of his hakama trousers that pronounced the bulge in Ohno’s middle more than hiding it from his view.

Ohno looked beautiful right now, lost in his feelings and trusting him not to hurt or to exploit him. And Nino wouldn’t. At least that was what he swore to himself when they had met. He had been honest with him all the time, and he would stay that way. Even if that meant hurting him. But that was something for later.

“Nino,” Ohno groaned as his hips bucked up to get some friction. Nino grinned as he pressed his hips against the other ones, blinking as he broke out of his train of thoughts and observance of his body.

“Yes, my lord, is there something I can do for you?” he asked, a teasing quality in his voice as he nosed the cheek of the other.

“Continue,” Ohno growled as he moved his head to nip at the soft flesh of Nino’s chin, tasting the mole there. He had dreamt of doing that since they had met somewhere in the back of his mind. His tongue licked at the beauty mark, feeling that it felt different than the rest of his silken skin but not less good.

“Your wish is my command,” Nino whispered against his ear as he nibbed at it, and his tongue wandered inside the shell, tracing it as he enjoyed the full-body shiver of the other. His hips moved in small movements against Ohno’s hips their hardnesses rubbing against each other, only their thin clothing a barrier for now. But Nino wanted to change that as he shifted again on top of Ohno to keep his balance as his fingers wandered to the waistband of the trousers Ohno wore. With nimble fingers he opened the smaller band that held them together, opening them fully and pushing them down until Ohno laid completely bare under him.

His fingers closed around the erect dick of the other, pumping it a few times as his lips moved over to kiss Ohno and to swallow the loud gasp that escaped Ohno’s lips.

Ohno’s fingers slipped over the robe Nino was still wearing, and a low growl escaped his lips which was still mostly swallowed from Nino’s lips. Ohno’s hands wandered under the robe at Nino’s shoulders slowly pushing it down as they went down, caressing the soft silken skin of his back. He traced the mark on his hips, imagining that he could feel the differences in the feel of skin, even if it was not possible. But he could feel the small bumps where his moles were, and he tried to find them all with his fingertips.

As he reached his hips, he let his fingers wander to the front to touch the flat stomach, tracing the lines of his muscles with his fingers. At the same time, he tried to decide if he wanted to move them upwards tease the cute little nipples he sometimes could see peak through the low collar of his robe or tease his cock as Nino still did to him.

In the end, his needs won over, and he opened the knot of Nino’s belt with a few problems, swearing at the artful knot Nino usually made to make sure that his long robe would stay in place. As it finally fell open Ohno shuddered as the soft ends of the cloth teased his heated skin.

A moan he tried to stop, fell from his mouth at the caress on his sensitive skin. He didn’t think that he could be so aroused by the simple touch of cloth on his skin. Still, there was nothing he could do to change that, and he was way too aroused to be embarrassed by the reactions of his body even if he tried to keep silent. The thought of getting the attention of animals and then having to stop was scary.

“You can be as loud as you want, my lord,” he said with a bright, still teasing voice.

Ohno whined as the words were pronounced by biting kisses to his waist. Nino sucked at his hipbone as he nibbled at it as well. “The barrier is strong,” he added with more kisses and sucking. He could feel the heat of Ohno’s cock close to his face.

Nino moved his head to the side, licking the head of it, tasting the first drops of cum on his tongue. It was salty and slightly disgusting, but the cry of Ohno made it worthwhile. He closed his lips around the dick, tracing it with his tongue as he swallowed it as deep as he could. One hand was holding Ohno’s hips to the ground while he allowed Ohno to grasp at the other tightly when his emotions got too intense.

Nino felt the cock in his mouth getting heavier and finally let go when all things coming from Ohno’s lips were only swears and indistinct noises. He peppered kisses on the fevered skin of the other as he wandered up again. His hips rocking slightly against Ohno’s to gain some friction on his own hardness. He knew that he was dripping himself with want.

As his lips found Ohno’s again, he slipped in between the open legs of the other man. Ohno sucked in a breath as they parted for a second so that Nino could look down at him. Ohno’s eyes were still blown wide, glassy with lust but Nino was not any better, he knew. Ohno gripped his shoulder as he drew him closer again, he drew a leg closer to his body to open himself up more for the other man, as a finger slipped into him, producing another moan from the older man.

“Do it already,” Ohno said with a shaking voice as he stared at him with a mock glare.

Nino bit back a laugh at his face, diving down instead to kiss him again as his finger slipped out of him again and he pressed in. A loud moan escaped his lips that was this time swallowed by Ohno as he felt the tightness against him. Ohno seemed to tighten even more as he rocked up against him, demanding him to move without saying anything out loud and Nino followed the unspoken request without question.

They exchanged kisses and more caresses as Nino pressed into Ohno again and again. Regardless of how fast or hard his pushes were it never seemed to be enough as between gasps and kisses, Ohno always demanded him to move harder.

Nino’s hand closed around Ohno’s hardness again, pumping it in time with his thrusts as he let Ohno rock freely as well.

He could feel Ohno harden more in his fingers and felt his balls draw up as the moans got more distinct. Ohno was sure that it wouldn’t take much longer until he came. He fastened his thrusts again, letting go of any resistance he had still held on to make this an enjoyable experience for Ohno. When Ohno tightened even more around him, Nino let go completely, biting at Ohno’s lips as he came inside of him.

Ohno’s whole body jerked as he felt the hotness seeping into his insides and the tightening of the grip around his own cock which brought him over the edge as well.

Nino collapsed on top of him as he hid his face against Ohno’s neck, kissing and licking the hollow of his neck again as he breathed harshly against his neck. Ohno shuddered slightly against him, his arms closing around him as Nino’s robe laid like a blanket over their bodies. It took a while until they came down from their highs, but when they did, Nino just moved so far that he could slip out entirely from Ohno’s body and was not digging his knee halfway into Ohno’s hips as he moved his head so that they could exchange another lazy kiss.

Nino’s fingers raked over the side of Ohno’s body until their breathing evened out fully. Ohno’s fingers tapped down his back until he cupped the small of his back with his hand, Nino couldn’t hide a smile when he felt his fingers stroking the part where his mark was almost lazily until his eyes fell close and Nino could feel the fingers stop moving. He put his ear on top of Ohno’s chest to listen to the even heartbeat that put him to sleep as well as he said a soundless prayer and made sure their protective circle was secure.

A/N: Again an NC-17 part I hate >< sorry for this.

Chapter Text

Ohno woke up in the early evening. He couldn’t believe what had happened earlier that day. It had been astonishing to him, both that it happened and how it had happened, but he had enjoyed it very much. He smiled when he felt the warm body on top of his own and pressed his lips against the crown of his hair. Nino sighed in his sleep, and Ohno pulled Nino’s robe a bit higher so that it covered his shoulder so that the other wouldn’t freeze. Nino himself was warm and comfortable so that Ohno did not fear to get cold. He stared at the sky above them, feeling safe and healthy right now and like all of what happened back home was just a bad dream.

Then a shudder went over his back as he remembered the monster they had met just two days before. Nino and Aiba both had mentioned that this was only the beginning and that there might have been more like that one around, just lurking in the shadows and waiting for unsuspecting wanderers to kill and feed on. Ohno closed his eyes as he could just see already that it wouldn’t stop there. Even if neither of the other men said so. Their worried exchange of looks had been enough. If the monsters got stronger and the dragons weaker they would become more and than start being a real threat for all the small towns they had visited that lived so close to the woods and needed a functioning ecosystem to survive.

Ohno still wasn’t sure how his father had managed to tilt the balance like that. He was just a weak man in Ohno’s mind. Yes, he had an army in his back but… But dragons were strong, as far as Ohno had seen of Niji dragons were very strong so he couldn’t understand how mere humans would be able to kill them in such a number that it was a threat to their world. His fingers absentmindedly wandered over Nino’s bare skin, and he knew he was retracing the mark when Nino sighed again in his sleep, his face burrowing deeper into his chest as he rubbed his nose against his skin.

Ohno smiled softly at the cute sounds Nino made but waited silently until the dark brown orbs opened and Nino looked up at him. “Your thoughts are deafening today, my lord,” he whispered as he carefully untangled himself from Ohno’s arms and legs around his body. Ohno frowned softly as the cold air hit his body, but Nino gifted him a soft smile as he offered him the tunic of his own robe to put over his body while he slipped into the arms of his robe, so that it wouldn’t slide down his back again and again. Nino sat up fully and sorted out his hair so that it wouldn’t fall into his eyes all the time.

His face was still soft and the smile warm, so that Ohno didn’t feel too much fear that Nino regretted the things that happened yesterday. He sighed deeply as he gingerly sat up, a small grimace twisting his lips as he felt the slight throbbing in his lower half. He put his tunic around himself just when Nino moved closer again to help him close the belt around his waist in the same way he did his own belt usually. It felt tighter than he was used to but that way he felt much more secure and it wasn’t putting too much pressure on his skin, surprisingly.

“Did you sleep well, Satoshi?”

“Yes, thank you,” Ohno said, still a bit unsure as to what happened now. There was an emotion in Nino’s eyes that he couldn’t really understand fully. It was not regretted or anything like that but in there laid a carefulness and insecureness that he hadn’t seen for a long time in the other’s gaze - Ohno wasn’t sure he had ever seen it if he was wholly honest.

“Let’s have something to eat, and then we’ll talk,” Ohno decided as it was clear that Nino was lost of words and didn’t know how to proceed. He put his hand on top of his cheek and carefully stroke his lips and the small mole with his thumb, which brought a smile again on Nino’s lips even if his gaze had gotten a bit more vulnerable.

“Yes, there is a stream if you want to clean yourself,” he said after a moment. “I can prepare a meagre meal for us from the provisions we have left,” he said with a frown. There was only a little, even if it was the rest of all of their food. Aiba and Jun had taken none since Jun had told that it wasn’t a fulls day march until they would reach the city.

“We’ll be fine for tonight and if tomorrow there is nothing left we will either be able to look for something or the others might come and get us with new rations,” Ohno hummed after a moment of thought in a calm voice.

Ohno rubbed his slightly red cheeks with his fingertips before carefully getting to his feet and walking to the small stream or trying to when he felt the discomfort in his lower half and stumbled a few steps. Nino was by his side in an instant, his hands on his waist to stop him from falling down. Ohno felt himself blush at their close proximity.

“I shall help you, my lord, it seems you are rather unstable on your feet,” Nino said with a small hum in his voice. Ohno tried hard not to blush even more, but it was hard to do so. Still, he was glad that Nino was able to tease him like that, he had felt worried at the serious way Nino had been talking until now.

“And you should probably wash as well,” Ohno said as his eyes wandered to Nino’s stomach where he could see his own semen staining the muscled body.

“Very well,” Nino whispered as he led him to the stream. Ohno sighed as he sank into the cold water, which helped to numb the pain a bit. He watched as Nino stripped off his robe and followed him. His fingers working on his hair to let it wholly loose and Ohno felt his fingers twitch in want. He wanted to explore the silken strands in between his fingers and help Nino to wash them.

“Does it hurt much, Satoshi?” Nino said, and there was worry in his voice. Ohno sighed as he nodded and then shook his head.

It hurt, but that was what he had expected after their activities. Nino swam through the water to him until he was right in front of him. Ohno observed the beautiful features of his face illuminated by the full moon as Nino smiled in apology, and his fingers cupped his face for just a second as he pressed his lips against his cheek.

“Let me make it easier for you, as an apology,” he whispered into his ear. And after Ohno nodded his other hand wandered over his back to his butt to caress the hole for a second with his fingertips before he whispered a few words and Ohno felt warmth spread where the fingers were, as Nino healed him.

Ohno cleared his throat when Nino stepped back again to watch him with a worried frown.

“Thank you it’s gone,” he said, feeling a bit sad at the thought since the pain had been a proof that this had really happened. He sighed as he started to clean his body as Nino did the same before he sat close to the river bank for a moment to just relax and watch Nino in the middle of the stream as he submerged into the water entirely to clean his hair.

“Aren’t you ever tired of the long hair?” Ohno asked as he played with his own hair. He was already getting annoyed with the longer strands that he had now compared with when he had left home all these weeks ago.

“No. Magic helps though. I don’t need to worry about tangles most of the time,” Nino said with a cheeky grin. “Do you need a haircut?”

Ohno shook his head with a sigh. “No, I think this is better right now.”

Nino observed him as he stepped closer again and knelt in front of Ohno in the water. He moved forwards to put his hands on his shoulders and nuzzled close to him. “I like this look on you, my lord,” he whispered into his ear as he rubbed the slight coarse cheeks of the older from where he had shaved just a few days before. Ohno looked rougher than he had done when they had first met, but he liked him that way a lot more, Nino thought with a small smile on his face.

“We should head back to our packs,” he said then with a sigh. Ohno nodded as he got up and offered Nino his hand, which the other took without hesitation. Nino dried his hair on a cloth - Ohno was sure that there was magic involved since the silken locks looked way drier than should possible after just squeezing them in a cloth before he dressed in his robe again. This time he closed the belt as well so that his body was once again hidden behind the clothes. Ohno covered as well, before retaking Nino’s hand and leading him back to their space. He unpacked their food while Nino prepared a fire and some tea for them to enjoy with their food. Afterwards, Ohno had tugged Nino close to his body, his chin on his shoulder as they stared into the fire, the stars and moon shining softly down onto them.

“What is on your mind, Kazunari?”

“I…” Nino sighed as he hesitated for a moment longer, his body going stiff in his embrace but there was no way to hide his thoughts right now especially since it all felt so wrong and wonderful at the same time. “Satoshi, I don’t know what you expect now to happen between us, but I need you to know that I probably can’t provide you with that in a way you desire. In future, if I survive and this is all with the world still being intact, I will need a child born with my blood in their veins. There is no other way to keep the line intact.”

Chapter Text

The words seemed to repeat themselves again and again between them, and Ohno was stiff beside Nino as he tried to get his mind around the words Nino had just uttered.

Nino had moved away just a bit. Ohno didn’t know if the other wanted to flee or give him space, but a small glance to the other man showed him that the other was fidgeting beside him and clearly felt distressed about his sudden words.

Nino bit his lips until it was bloody and with a sigh, Ohno moved closer to stroke his lips. Nino blinked in confusion as he felt Ohno so close suddenly.

“I understand,” Ohno mumbled after a moment with a sigh. “You shouldn’t hurt yourself.”

“I’m sorry. I should have told you before any of this happened but…”

“…but neither of us had thought this would happen.”

Nino smiled shyly as he nodded. That was true. He still couldn’t believe that this all had happened just a few hours ago. Yes, they had gotten closer over these last few weeks, but that had been surprising for him. To be honest, Nino had never thought of being close to any person like that. His feelings were making him nervous and confused, and it was something that he didn’t like.

He felt sick to his stomach as well, and guilt was in the back of his mind, which was why he hadn’t been able to stop blurting out his reasons he needed to be careful especially since Ohno had been so lovely to him.

Ohno sighed, could not, as Nino looked at him with wide eyes, still looking very confused about what had happened. Ohno chuckled and cupped his cheek to stroke the soft part under his eye with his thumb.

“What I desire of you? Maybe we should talk about that first before you force me out just right away. How does that sound?”

Nino’s lips opened and closed for a moment in utter surprise. Ohno chuckled as he couldn’t help himself. Nino looked so young right now, and even if he had been so confident earlier, it seemed to have blown away right now again. Ohno couldn’t help but wonder how much experience Nino had until now.

He sighed as he realised that Nino wouldn’t take the lead in their conversation now. Honestly, the other man still looked as if he expected him to shove him down and run off. If Ohno was honest to himself he was hurt, he wanted to turn around and leave to be alone with his thought, but there was still a small hope inside of his chest that he would be able to be with Nino in a way that his heart wished for. He had an inkling that if he ran now, that would not be possible again.

“I know about the need of an heir,” Ohno said slowly. It was the same for him, after all. His father expected him to father a child to strengthen their line. Or at least he had mentioned a few things about that. Ohno wasn’t too sure now that the other tried to kill him. “And I can understand somehow. That doesn’t mean that my heart is happy with that knowledge.”

“Your heart?” Nino asked, his voice not much above a whisper right now.

“Yes, my heart. Kazunari, what I would like from you would be for us to stay close. I feel comfortable around you, and I imagine that you do as well. We both still don’t know what we want to be in future. Your mind is full of what you have to do, which I understand. It’s what you have raised to do,” Ohno said with the realisation that this was true.

Yes, Nino had had a happier childhood with his parents at least as far as Nino had told him earlier but, and this was important, his parents had died young. His parents had done things to him to teach him all about his fate and the things he needed to be able to do to survive when they died. Then he had lived for so long with the dragons who had trained him and told him again what he needed to do to safe the world at such a young age and Ohno could not even start to imagine what that would do to such a young mind.

“That’s why I will accept all the decisions you need to make, even if it will be hard on me.” Ohno smiled as he stroke the soft skin again, moving his fingers to catch the slight tears clinging to his eyelashes.

“I can’t hurt you like that,” Nino whispered. The thought of hurting Ohno was awful for him. “And I can’t… I can’t be with you and then look for someone else.”

“You will hurt me either way, to be honest,” Ohno said, smiling sadly when Nino flinched, and his body curled up into himself as if he was hit. “But you can, because when this is all over, we can talk again and then look for a solution then okay? For now, let me be there for you. The path you walk on is hard enough.”

“It shouldn’t have been like that,” Nino mumbled but nodded. The thought of being without him hurt too much. But it wasn’t supposed to be like that, he thought. It was unfair. He should be all alone, maybe with Niji without bringing danger to the rest, but now he didn’t want to change a thing. He was happy to spend time with the rest, even with Jun who still glared at him most of the time, but it was fun to tease him.

“I’m glad that it ended up like that,” Ohno said as he pressed him to the bedroll that was out. He pressed his lips to his forehead as he made sure that he was comfortable. “But you are working yourself into a panic. You should sleep. Aiba-san and Jun-kun will arrive tomorrow, and Aiba-san will worry about you if you look tired.”

“Masaki is a worrier,” Nino mumbled but didn’t fight as Ohno pulled the blanket even higher so that it was around his chin, pulling it tightly around him. It was snug and warm and helped Nino to calm down. His mind was swirling with thoughts, but he felt exhaustion settle in his bones as Ohno sat down beside him and played with his hair while singing a song from far away worlds.

Nino knew that this was not a good result of their talk, he knew that Ohno was not happy since he couldn’t promise anything to the other man, but it seemed as if Ohno was determined not to talk about it today anymore and Nino had to accept that. A small sigh left his lips as he closed his eyes to fall to sleep.

Ohno looked down at the other as Nino’s breath finally evened out. He groaned as he rubbed his face and hit his face softly against the tree trunk behind him as he stared at the sparkling stars. It hurt more than he wanted to admit. At the same time, Ohno felt deep inside of him that Nino was worth the fight. His fingers ran down the length of his nose and his cheek before pulling the second blanket over himself as his eyes wandered to the fire.

Nino didn’t renew the circle around them, so he wasn’t sure the old one was still up. Without Niji circling them, he wanted to stay awake to make sure they were safe. His mind wandered to the unknown future, and he closed his eyes tightly against the tears that wanted to be let free.

He had time to win Nino over, and he was sure as hell to do that. He didn’t want to miss the sweet gifts he had been given by the boy until now again. Ohno couldn’t help the smile when Nino whined in his sleep and robbed closer to him. He settled down back as his fingers found the cloth of his tunic, and he fell again into a peaceful sleep.

“We will manage,” he whispered as he pressed his fingertips to his temple with a small smile as Nino smiled in his sleep at his gesture.

Ohno had fallen to sleep very early in the morning, the sun had just been creeping up on the horizon, and now he could feel movement beside him. Nino was kneeling beside him, smelling slightly of flowers as he moved over him to shake his shoulders softly.

“Satoshi, breakfast is ready,” he said as he moved closer to him. He hesitated for a moment, but then there were warm lips against Ohno’s temple. Ohno could feel them shiver against his skin before Nino moved away as Ohno opened his eyes.

He looked down with red cheeks which were adorable and then shuffled closer to the fire he had started from anew. “You are cheating when you start fires, right?”

Nino smirked softly as he shook his head. “I use whatever lies in my abilities. It’s not my fault that mine are better than others.”

Ohno chuckled as he stood up and ruffled his hair softly with just his fingertips. “Cheeky. I will get ready.”

“Uh,” Nino said as he poked at the fire with a stick. There were fishes on sticks around it, and Ohno felt his stomach rumble. Freshly caught fishes seemed to be a feast after the last few days.

He hurried through his morning routine and then came back to see that Nino had already put together their bedrolls and their stuff. Ohno lifted an eyebrow in amusement as he watched Nino play with his hair lost in thought.

“You are fully prepared, huh?”

Nino nodded with a small sigh. “Yes, I thought it was the best. I let you sleep. I hope that was okay?”

“Of course, Kazunari can you try to behave normally around me again. I know yesterday was a lot. But this is making me nervous.”

Nino licked his lips as he nodded. “I can try at least,” he said. “But I might be still awkward. I don’t know how people normally behave if such a thing happens between them.”

“Awkwardly,” Ohno said with a grin as he poked his cheek. “Food looks good, can we eat?”

“Of course,” Nino nodded offering Ohno the plate and a few of the fruits before carefully taking a fish to bite into the soft flesh. Ohno hummed in enjoyment at the taste, and they finished their food in silence.

Nino cleaned away the rests and said a small prayer of thanks for the food they had been provided with while he let Ohno handle his hair and put him up in an elaborate hairdo that Nino would never bother himself with.

But Ohno had looked so hopeful at the question that he couldn’t say no and now he felt his heart skip a few beats and then when the slender fingers touched his skin at the back of his neck as he hummed happily in the back of his throat.

He perked up when he could feel the others come closer, peeking over at Ohno, who had his tongue stuck out and a concentrated frown on his face as he made a few more loops. “The others are approaching.”

“Oh,” Ohno said with a sad frown on his face. He let go of his hair, allowing Nino to sort it out as he stood.

A/N: I’m sorry this probably is not what you expected.

Chapter Text

“You hid quite well,” Jun grumbled when they stepped into the circle that Nino had made, which made the other man smirk slightly as he tilted his head.

“I promised you I would protect your lord,” he said in a teasing voice, that brought a chuckle out of Ohno who shook his head.

“Don’t tease Jun,” he ordered the other man who pouted slightly but stood still as Aiba observed him carefully. He sighed softly as he played with a loose strand of hair.

“The town is full of people,” Aiba said with a frown. “Much more guards than I’ve expected.”

Jun nodded with a small frown on his face. “It’s more than there used to be,” he agreed.

“Why?”

Jun shrugged a bit uncomfortably as he spiked up his hair with just the fingertips. “I can’t say for sure. We didn’t go to the castle because we thought it might be safer that way. From what I gathered though they fear an attack.”

“Are they expecting us?”

“I’m not sure,” Jun said. “They are looking for a group of men, though. So it might be. We should split up to be on the safe side. I will go back to my post as a guard,” Jun started, holding up his hand when Ohno wanted to protest.

“It’ll be fine. They expect me to come back, pleading for your father to take me back and for forgiveness as I couldn’t find you, my lord. The king had sent out a group in search. I just decided to split from them when they found scraps of your clothes.”

“Ah the attack of the wolves,” Nino whispered in remembrance. Was that really already so long ago?

“Yes, we met with the group accompanying the lord, and we didn’t find you but the scraps of clothes and the blood it seemed the logical thing that you were dead. I meant to see footsteps, so I thought there might be another chance.”

“You went rogue?”

Jun nodded. “But the king will take me back,” Jun said softly. “If only so that he can poison me to make sure I won’t be in his way.”

Ohno sighed as he nodded. That was probably true. “Okay, but be careful.”

“Of course,” Jun said with a small grin. “I’m always careful.”

Ohno snorted slightly as his eyes fell on Aiba and Nino who seemed to be conserving in silence. Nino’s ears were somewhat red while there was a small grin on Aiba’s face.

“I will be a monk and ask for guidance in the temples. Nobody will think of anything. I have a letter from the old father’s at my temple,” he explained at the lifted eyebrow of Ohno. “It really won’t be a problem.”

“If you say so,” Ohno agreed with a sigh. It seemed as if the other two had already thought about everything. Aiba smiled as in inclined his head at him before his eyes fell on Nino again.

“What?” Nino asked with a frown.

“And so that it won’t be a group of men and the lord won’t be recognised easily. You two need to disguise yourself,” he explained almost happily.

“The lord has changed a lot,” Jun said. The other had longer hair, darker skin and looked rougher on the edges.

“I can put an illusion over us,” Nino agreed softly. “But that will only enhance or blur the lines we already occupy,” he mumbled.

“That is why, my dear Kazunari…” Aiba began and ignored the glare that Nino sent into his direction. “Jun and I have decided that you will enter the city gates at the side of the lord as his mistress.”

“I will what?” he hissed, his eyes going smaller as he walked up to Aiba, his hands halfway lifted as to throttle him.

“You will dress up as a woman. That way, you won’t have to hide the way you hold yourself or walk or even talk. I’m sorry, Kazu, but an old dragon raised you, your speech pattern is that of a high breed and slightly feminine, which is fine, but it will draw attention on you. The lord is said to be interested more in his own sex than that of the fairer side, Jun told me so. So people would not directly assume that he would have a mistress now, which will make them less suspicious either way as if you are both men.”

Nino frowned at the explanation and crossed the arms in front of his chest. He didn’t like the idea, not much at least, but in the end, he nodded. He did not care much if people thought him a woman or a man, but it made him a bit uncomfortable to be that close to Ohno all the time.

“Okay, I see your point,” he sighed. “But won’t it be strange if we just travel to the town?”

“No,” Jun said with a shrug. “There will be the moon festival in a couple of days. So it won’t be a surprise for you to travel to town to visit it.”

“But it might be hard to find lodging that way,” Ohno said with a frown. The town was always so full when the festival was close.

“I asked around and managed to secure you a room,” Jun said with a sigh. “Someone was still indebted to me.”

“One room?” Nino clarified at that and glanced at Ohno who nodded, looking serious.

“You are his mistress. It would be strange if you have two rooms,” Jun said with a frown. “It’s not different from sharing a space outside.”

“True,” Nino agreed, feeling nervousness creep up into his throat. Ohno smiled as his fingers went to his neck to massage it slowly as he realised how tense the other man was.

“Good, now that this is clear, Nino, you will need to change into this garment. It’s more suited for a woman,” he explained as he held up the cloth in a brighter colour than he had worn now.

“I have my yellow one,” he mumbled. He hadn’t worn it since it was too flashy in the woods and too expensive-looking, but it was his.

“I know, but that’s for a king. You are no king. Let me help you. The cut will suit a woman better as well.”

Nino sighed defeated as he followed Aiba in between the trees to change into the other robe and let Aiba help him to wrap the bigger belt around his waist.

“Sit down for me,” Aiba said after he was finished donning the robe. Nino frowned as he did as he was told. Aiba smiled down at him and then lifted his head slightly with a finger under his chin.

“You think me a fool,” Nino hummed as he closed his eyes when Aiba brought out face colours to colour his eyes and lips.

“I would never do that, Kazu,” Aiba said with a soft hum, a concentrated frown on his face as he put just a bit of colour on the eyelids and let it feather out at the side. “Don’t bite your lips,” he advised, and Nino sighed as he felt the brush putting on colour on these as well.

“But?”

“I’m happy for you and the thing that is blossoming between you and the lord.”

“There can’t be anything between us,” Nino said as he opened his eyes again with a frown.

Aiba clicked his tongue as he put pale powder on his face and walked around him to take care of his hair. “And dare to tell me why?”

“Because I either die or need to produce an heir,” he said. “It’s not fair on either.”

“Life is seldom fair, Kazu, and you know that. What does your heart wish for?”

“To be happy,” Nino whispered after a long silence between them as Aiba brushed his hair and put it in braids so that he could handle it more comfortable to pull it all up and top it with a brush.

“Then, you should follow your heart’s desires.”

“What if they are wrong? Masaki, I never thought this all would happen.”

“Liar,” Aiba said softly as he finished with his hair and sat down in front of him to take his hands in his own.

“You hoped for this to never happen. I’m certain you hoped never to have heart’s wishes or feelings so deeply as you feel now.”

“I’m scared,” Nino mumbled after a while. “I had always been so certain just to follow what is written in the stars, but…”

“That, my dear friend, is also part of growing up. A part that had been denied for you for so long, and I’m happy you feel it now because I feared that after you fulfilled your role, it would have ended your life.”

“I would have never killed myself,” he grumbled. “That would go against everything the Gods teach us.”

Aiba smiled as he brushed a strand of hair behind Nino’s ear. “One can die without killing the body. Your soul is important to me, a treasure to protect, but there had never been anything for your soul to want to achieve other than bringing the balance back.”

Nino blinked a bit, his lips falling open at the thought and the realisation that it was probably right.

“But an heir,” he started.

“That will be a matter for another time. I will help you think of a solution. One that will hopefully satisfy both of you. What did you tell him?”

“That I can’t be with him as he wishes to because I need to consider more than just me or him.”

“That’s very cruel of you.”

“But it’s the truth. I can’t just lie. That would be wrong,” Nino protested.

Aiba laughed as he nodded. “Yes, but you should try to learn to soften your words and be not so harsh.”

“Not everybody was raised by monks.”

“No you were raised by something else,” Aiba agreed. “I think we hid here long enough. Let’s go to your lord.”

“He’s not mine, to begin with,” Nino murmured but let Aiba pull him to his feet.

“Not yet,” Aiba teased.

“I believe humans only belong to themselves.”

“And maybe to their bound dragons? Why do you think it might be different for human partners?”

“Because…” Nino stopped speaking as he shook his head. He didn’t know why he even tried to argue with the other.

Chapter Text

Ohno and Jun were talking in hushed voices as Nino, and Aiba finally made it back to them. They looked up, and Jun’s eyes widened in surprise as he saw Nino stepping out behind Aiba. “You can fool about anybody,” he mumbled, which got Ohno’s attention finally.

Ohno frowned a little as the other man stepped out from behind Aiba with an annoyed frown on his face as his arms were crossed in front of his chest.

Ohno chuckled since the expression didn’t fit the figure at all, as Nino rolled his eyes.

“I thought that was the suppose of this all,” Nino mumbled as he sighed and brushed a strand of hair out of the way. “It’s bothersome,” he muttered. Aiba had draped his hair in a way that loose strands surrounded his face to make it appear a bit more feminine.

He usually preferred to have most of his hair at least out of his face and now it somehow got on his nerves.

“Stop fiddling. You will get used to it soon enough,” Aiba scolded with a small laugh in his voice as he handed a little pouch to Ohno. Ohno smiled shortly as he put it away and then offered his hand to Nino.

“My lady?”

Nino glared at him for a moment, but then just sighed softly as he took the offered hand. “It can’t be helped,” he mumbled as Ohno looked at him with a bright smile on his face and they followed the other two in slower steps.

“You look beautiful,” Ohno said, still awed at that fact somehow.

“You know how to flatter people,” Nino said with a low chuckle. Ohno shrugged helplessly in answer.

“Not really. But it’s the truth. You look really nice. I always thought those face paints make women look strange or even ugly, the opposite of what they wish to achieve. But somehow. It looks not as weird on you.”

Nino’s eyes danced in amusement as he bowed his head softly.

“My lord, you still need to practice your words of flattering. You are not very good at it. But I take that as a compliment for your sake.”

“I mean it as one,” Ohno answered with a small pout on his face, which made Nino smile despite himself. Ohno was looking very cute and helpless right now.

“But I prefer you without the charade,” he whispered then, looking at him a bit shyly as if he was telling him a big secret.

Nino smiled softly at the words and squeezed his arm softly. “Thank you. But you probably should look like you were in love with me or something,” he mumbled.

Ohno smiled as he nodded at the words. That was not going to be hard at all, he thought. “When will Niji come?”

“Soon. Soon this all will be over,” he whispered as he closed his eyes for a moment. “For better or for worse, the waiting will end at least.”

“That’s good,” Ohno agreed, and Nino smiled shyly at him. Ohno sounded very sincere, and that made it all okay for him as if Ohno was telling him a truth that nobody else knew about just yet. It was a very comforting thought somehow.

—

“We will have to separate now, or the disguise will be not worth it,” Jun said suddenly making them stop and look up. Aiba smiled down at Nino as he saw how close they were to each other.

Nino felt his heart speed up and he really hoped that Aiba could think of a solution to his problem, just as he had promised him to do so.

“That’s fine. We are almost there, right?” Nino asked, looking at Ohno, who nodded with a small hum.

“Yes, we are close to the lines of the city. We should go first,” he mumbled with a frown. “Yes, let me hide your packs I will send it to your stay in an hour or two. You shouldn’t travel with that on your back.

“You are right. Just a small back with the necessities of the mistress,” Ohno said, grinning when he felt Nino pinch him hard under his ribs. “It’s the truth. If you need to re-apply your beauty.”

Nino lifted his eyebrow but didn’t disagree as Ohno tugged him along. He took a few steps before he stopped though and went to Aiba. Aiba smiled as he hugged him close for just a moment.

“You will be okay,” Aiba promised into his ear, making him sigh a little be.

“Promise?”

“Promise. You always know what to do. Don’t be scared and don’t hesitate but step forward to do what is needed, okay?”

“I will,” Nino promised with a small smile. “Stay safe. You will know when I need you.”

“I will. And until then I will check if I find a way to help you.”

A genuine smile appeared on Nino’s face before he kissed his cheek. He giggled when he saw the red print of his lips against the skin and rubbed it away before he walked over to Ohno who awaited him with a curious look on his eyes, but with warm eyes as well, which helped a lot to relax him.

He took another deep breath as he stepped into the city that should have bin his birthplace but wasn’t because of different circumstances, but probably held his future now.

“Nervous?” Ohno asked.

“Yes,” he whispered as he rubbed his fingers together. There was no reason to lie about that, after all. “But I know that it will be alright. Because you and Masaki believe so and I trust you.”

Ohno felt his heartwarming up at those words, and he vowed to himself that he definitely would hold up to that trust set into him.

He led him to the city, greeting the guards while Nino held back, making sure that their disguise was safe.

“We wanted to visit the Tsuki matsuri,” he explained with a smile as Nino peered at the guards from behind Ohno. He thought Jun looked more dangerous than these men, but he kept silence and just looked down as the man stared at him.

He breathed in as they made their way to the inn that Jun had secured them and groaned when they were finally in their room, away from curious eyes. “I have a question,” Nino said as he laid down on the bed and stared at the ceiling. He smiled when Ohno’s head appeared in front of him, and he sat down beside him.

“What is it?”

“You might think of me as stupid if I ask,” Nino said as he sat up again. He moved his shoulders a little before relaxing and looking at his fingers that just peeked out from under the folds of his sleeves.

“I would never,” Ohno promised as he watched the innocent face. He smiled and stroke his cheek carefully as to not make the powder disappear.

“Why did you decide to make me your mistress?”

“And not a wife?”

“Yes,” Nino said with a frown and a blush on his face that even the powder couldn’t hide completely. “It’s not as if I have a preference, a disguise is a disguise but… Isn’t it strange for a man to travel with his mistress?”

“Not really. Especially not if it’s for such festivals. And as a mistress, it makes sense that you paint your face that way. As a wife, you would try to be more hidden, which can be a good disguise in some instances. But if you want to walk around more freely, this is safer. And it hides your face better.”

“I see,” Nino sighed as he put his head on his shoulder. “And you are okay with it? Being so close to me, after all, what I told you?”

“I told you, I won’t give you up so easily. I need to make sure you see all my good points to reconsider being with me.”

Nino smiled softly. “Masaki told me to forget all about my duty for now. Or what I think my duty is.”

“I think you should do what you want.”

“Mhm… He said so, to listen to my heart and find out what it wants. That there is a solution to all problems as long as I’m sure of what I want.”

“He is a smart man, after all,” Ohno agreed as his fingers massaged his scalp softly.

“He is the best,” Nino agreed. At least the best friend he could ask for.

“Do you want to take a rest? It has to be hard to walk in these clothes.”

“Mhm… A bit they are more constructive than my normal clothes. And a lot heavier.”

“Then do so. We should go for a walk tonight after our things have arrived and we have eaten, and people would expect us to stay in for at least a few hours before leaving this room again. I will ask for food and drinks.”

Nino nodded with a smile when Ohno’s fingers wandered over his spine for a moment before he left him to lie down again and rest his body for a bit. Later he would have to figure out a bit more about his thoughts and feelings and about what he wanted to be especially considering Ohno, he probably should find an answer before the fight.

Chapter Text

Ohno sat on the floor in front of the bed where Nino was resting. He was amused at how fast Nino had actually fallen asleep when he was on the bed, but he supposed that it was also due to the fact that he used his energy to support their disguises so that nobody would think that he was the king’s son.

He sighed as he carefully caressed his neck and then made sure that the covering was around his shoulders so that he didn’t feel cold. He leant against the wall as he closed his eyes, thinking about all that had happened. He had been surprised at how open Nino had been and how clingy he still was. Somehow Ohno had feared that Nino would stay away from him for now because he couldn’t get too attached. He wondered about what Aiba and the other boy had talked about.

Given the fact how nervous and awkward Nino had been just that morning, he was like a different person now, and Ohno felt hope blossom inside his heart that Nino would allow him to be with him. He wanted to be the only one with him like that though, and that was what held him back. Not as much as he had thought, but a small hesitant voice was telling him that he was about to get his heartbroken. It was treacherous, and he just hoped that in the end, he would be able to let Nino do whatever he needed to do to make sure everything was safe.

He groaned as there was a knock at the door and got up. “Your luggage has been delivered, sir,” a young boy said, and Ohno grinned as he nodded his thanks.

“Thank you,” he said as he pressed a coin into his hand when the boy brought the bag to the doorway.

“When do you want food to be delivered. Or will you eat with the rest of the patrons downstairs?”

“We would like to take dinner in our room. Just bring it in when the evening crowd is settled. We will rest for a while longer, and tonight we wanted to take a walk.”

“I’ll tell the keeper,” the boy said with a grin and a bow before bolting down the stairs. Ohno chuckled as he shook his had and carried the bag inside. He stared out of the window and decided that he could still let the boy sleep for a little bit longer.

—

The sun made its way down as Ohno sat up again from the painting he had worked on to let his mind run free. He put his work utensils down as he made his way over to Nino and knelt in front of the bed once again. He grinned as he saw the peaceful face of the other that was still painted even if the lip paints were now a bit smudged and one side of his face was almost powder-free. He sighed as his fingers wandered over his hair that had gotten loose from his hairdo. Somehow he didn’t want to wake Nino since he knew that the peaceful look would be gone too soon. How much he wished to see it for longer.

But he knew that the food would arrive shortly and Ohno wished for Nino to be able to eat a real meal after so long again. So he carefully cupped his cheek and moved down to kiss him on the soft lips. He couldn’t help himself. He just hoped that they were close enough now for him to be allowed such gestures without a dagger through his throat.

A small smile appeared on Nino’s lips as he moved back, and his thumb caressed the soft skin behind Nino’s ear as he shook him softly.

“It’s time to wake,” he said as Nino blinked his eyes open. It didn’t take long for him to be alert and ha carefully sat up, but instead of shaking his hands away, Nino allowed it to linger and put his hand on top of his, moving it so that he could kiss the palm.

“Are you feeling rested?”

“Very, thank you, Sammy.”

Ohno’s lips quirked into a smile since that silly nickname sounded like a caress to him right now, and he kissed his lips again. “Good. Food will arrive shortly, and I fear that you should reapply your face paints before it does.”

Nino sighed as he kissed Ohno’s thumb, his hand still holding to Ohno’s before he reached out to wipe away the red paint clinging to Ohno’s lips.

“Annoying,” he grumbled. It was nicer to kiss the other without having to clean him afterwards. Ohno laughed as he nodded and then helped Nino to his feet who staggered slightly as his foot caught in the robe, not yet that alert that he remembered the clothes he was wearing right now. “Sorry.”

Ohno shook his head and helped him to the small part of their room where a washbasin was installed for them allowed with a mirror on the side so that Nino could wash away the residues of the smudged paint and then very carefully reapply it.

“How come you know how to do it?”

“Masaki told me, and it’s not that hard to redo things that have been done to me once.”

“You are a peculiar man.”

Nino shrugged as he chuckled. “Not really. But I learnt a lot from copying others. Morga used to put pictures in my head since she couldn’t really teach me otherwise.”

“Sounds complicated.”

“You get used to it. At least nobody laughed at me when I failed first,” he said with a grin that vanished when there was a knock at the door. He looked at Ohno with his head on one side. “Do I look okay?”

“You have a natural beauty that you always look happy,” Ohno chuckled as he helped him to put his hair in order or something that resembled a hairstyle and not like the disaster he had woken up with. Then he got up to open the door.

He thanked the woman who brought their food in calmly as she put the bowls and plates on the low table in the room. Nino knelt beside the window, his head down as he thanked her in a low voice when she was finished and left with another bow.

Ohno sat down and started to serve the food as Nino finally made it to the table, checking out the meal.

“Shouldn’t I do that, my lord?” he teased as he sighed at the smell of the miso soup. It smelled very heavenly right now.

“I think you are of higher breed, your highness,” Ohno replied as he lifted an eyebrow.

Nino snorted but thanked for the food, before taking the first sip of the soup. “Very nice.”

“Mh, yes. It’s a good inn. I’m surprised that it still had a room for us on such short notice,” Ohno said with a frown. He supposed that it had more to do with the favour for Jun than any free rooms, but he wouldn’t argue about it. It was a beautiful room. It wasn’t big, but the bed was big enough to fit them both, and they wouldn’t spend too much time inside anyway.

“I missed this taste,” Nino hummed softly. It reminded him of his parents and home. He drank more of the soup, staring at the bowl when Ohno reached over to catch the sudden tears with his fingertips.

“What is wrong?”

“I… Nothing, sorry. It just reminds me of my family,” he whispered. Ohno hummed as he tugged him closer so that they were side by side, their knees touching as he held his hand.

“That’s not a bad thing. Enjoy the meal, yes?”

“Uhn,” Nino whispered with a shaky smile as he continued his food, leaning slightly against Ohno as he was full, trying not to disturb him as he ate.

It was shortly after they had finished that there was another knock on the door and the woman entered their room again. “Was everything to your taste, sir, madam?”

“Yes, thank you. The soup was especially good,” Ohno said with a smile as he looked at Nino who smiled thankfully at him as he hadn’t known how to say that.

“Thank you. It’s an old family recipe,” she grinned happily.

Ohno nodded as he thanked her again when she had collected all dishes and left them alone.

“Do you want to head out? A short walk might make that frown disappear on your face, my dear,” he said with a small smile, sure that the woman would still hear them.

“Yes, please,” Nino agreed, still a small frown on his face, but he allowed Ohno to help him to his feet and lead him outside. Ohno slowly led him through the city, telling him stories from his childhood as they went. Nino looked around carefully, trying to map out the town in his mind. He had never been here, and he doubted that he really would need to know where to run and where to hide if the fight came upon him, but it was always better to be careful just in case.

Chapter Text

“Let me help you,” Ohno said as Nino stretched out his back after lunch the next day. They had used the morning to check the packs that Aiba had sent them. It had nothing of Nino’s normal clothes inside but only a few outfits for Ohno and a few robes fitting a woman.

There had been a full kimono inside and Nino had grimaced the second he had seen it. It was nice, he supposed. The main colour was dark blue, darker than they usually were for women, and the pattern looked similar to the milky way, which fitted the festival theme perfectly.

There were too many layers as undergarments for him to be comfortable but he knew that they would have no other choice than to put them on.

“Do you have any ideas how women’s clothes work?” he asked with a surprised look on his face.

Ohno shrugged as he came closer and sat down behind him. He took his hair in his hands and a brush to brush it down. He separated the thick hair into strands and started to bring them up in an up-do.

“I always thought it looks much like art, how women make their hair and their faces up for festivals, and I was a very bored boy who ran alone a lot. So I slipped into teaching halls and was allowed to learn… Many probably were too scared to say no at first. But people seem to like me better than my father because I was often in the city among the people.”

“I see,” Nino mumbled as he closed his eyes. A small shiver broke out on his arms when Ohno’s fingers touched his neck faintly. He sighed softly as he felt sparks running over his body and stared at his hands. He had realised they happened once in a while when Ohno was close and touched him almost from the moment they met, but still, he hadn’t gotten fully used to them now.

They made him want to lean closer to the other, to feel his lips on his own and the fingers wander over his body. His breath hitched slightly as an almost full-body shudder broke out of him.

“Cute. Your ears are all red,” Ohno chuckled, close to the said ear, sending more sparks flying over his body.

“You are unfair.”

“No, I just love to see your body’s reaction to mine. It makes this all more real.”

“Still unfair. It is hard to make sense of this all and do what I really should do,” Nino whispered.

Ohno smiled as his fingers caressed his neck. He moved forwards and placed a small kiss to his neck.

“Nino?”

“Mhm?”

“Didn’t your friend say you should consider what you wanted if nothing was hindering you? As if you were a completely normal person, no duties at all.”

“Yes,” Nino said blushing harder.

“Then why won’t you do it?”

“Because…” Nino started as he bit his lips. “I’m scared that if I do, I will not do the things I need to do.”

He shrieked when Ohno bit his earlobe at those words, rubbing his ears and glaring at him.

“You would never lose the goal from your sight in the end. And I can promise you I won’t let you run away from what you need to do.”

“Huh?”

“Kazunari. It hurts me to see you in pain or hurt or in danger. But I get that this is big and that you need to do things that I won’t be able to understand. I won’t stand in your way, but behind you, pushing you if needed, in front of you if you need to be protected from others while you work on fighting the biggest obstacle and on your side at all the other times.”

Nino blinked with wide eyes as he stared at the other. Ohno smiled as he kissed away the tears that had appeared in his eyes and his nose.

“Understand?”

“Yes,” he breathed shakily. He stared down at his fingers again and allowed himself to lean against Ohno’s shoulder for support for a moment. “Will you take me to my first festival then?”

“With pleasure,” Ohno said with a smile, squeezing his hand.

“For tonight we can be two ordinary people?”

“If that’s what you want.”

“Yes,” Nino agreed with a small almost hopeful smile. “I would like that very much.” He felt nervous excitement rising inside as he thought that he would give this a try and just enjoy the moment.

“Then let me finish your hair?”

“Uhn,” Nino agreed as he turned around again. He smiled as Ohno kissed his cheek again and then put the last strands in place. He put a small comb in his hair.

“What do you think?” he asked as he allowed him to check the hair in his looking glass.

“It’s not very practical,” Nino mumbled.

Ohno rolled his eyes, flipping his nose softy. “It’s not supposed to be.”

Nino giggled as he nodded. “It looks very nice,” he agreed then.

“Good, now we need to put you into your robes, this is going to be tricky,” Ohno groaned. He had never been good at that part. Normally at least one woman had helped. But he didn’t think that it was smart to ask the wife of the inn owner to help Nino to wear the kimono.

Nino grumbled slightly as he got to his feet under Ohno’s insistent hands and slipped out off the robe he had worn all day already. Ohno’s eyes wandered over his body, still protected by the thinnest undergarment and averted his eyes before his mind could wander. He had promised Nino to take him for his first festival and he would. He would make it the best experience for Nino and was just very lucky that Jun had made sure he had enough means to pay for anything they would desire.

“Let’s get started then,” he mumbled as he wrapped the other in the different clothes meant to protect Nino from onlooking eyes or the coldness of the night. “Lift your sleeves,” Ohno asked him and Nino huffed as he pulled up the too-long sleeves and let the other wrap the belt around his hips tightly, making sure that it wouldn’t fall open.

Nino grimaced since everything was way too tight.

“The pattern is beautiful,” Ohno hummed as he looked him over. He moved forward and kissed him again. “And now I should paint your face. Even if I really don’t like the feel of paint under my lips,” he grumbled.

Nino chuckled softly at his words and shook his head as he knelt again so that Ohno could do his face. This would all be so much faster and easier if he would be able to go as a man but this had to do for now.

Ohno had a concentrated frown on his face as he made his face up and then stepped back a little.

“Beautiful,” he grinned. “You look gorgeous.”

“More than normal?” Nino asked cheekily.

“A piece of art.”

Nino giggled as he took the looking glass to check his makeup and he had to agree that Ohno made him look very beautiful indeed. He sighed as he tried to get comfortable.

“Can we leave?”

“Let me get changed,” Ohno said with a small roll of his shoulders as he got up and changed his robes into more festival looking ones. He offered his hand to the other who took it with a shy smile on his face.

Ohno laughed softly as he put a small wallet in his belt and then led Nino outside. They greeted the inn owners, Nino blushing as the little girl praised his looks. They waved goodbye and Nino stumbled for a bit on his shoes as he followed Ohno outside.

They breathed in the fresh air and Nino got close to Ohno as they walked in between the other guests of the festival. It was beautiful and he was very happy that Ohno took him out.

Ohno led him through the small food stalls, buying samples whenever something caught their eyes or Nino wanted to try something out.

“Can we try those games?” Nino asked as he saw some younger children catch fishes or shot wooden figures.

“Sure,” he said as he led him forward and paid the fare for two tries. He stood close to Nino as he explained to him how to do those things, smiling when he saw the completely enthralled look on his face.

He was beautiful like that. Much more beautiful than anything could make him, he thought with a small sigh. He just wished he would be able to show him all kind of things that he had never been allowed to see before. And maybe he would be allowed to do that after the war was won.

“I got one,” Nino suddenly said holding up the bowl where the won fish was on. He grinned happily and Ohno chuckled.

“What do you want to do with it? It won’t survive the travel back,” he said softly.

Nino nodded as he carefully stood and gave the bowl to a girl standing close to him. “For you, if you want?”

“Thank you!” the girl gasped happily as she took the bowl with a small bow and then ran off to join her brothers who were calling her.

“We can buy some firecrackers and send them off, before choosing a spot on the hill for the fireworks.”

Nino blinked curiously as he nodded. He held his hand again and they went to a small stall buying the crackers before choosing a clear spot to fire them.

Nino chuckled at the colourful sparks escaping from the firecrackers as he waved them around carefully. “What are fireworks?” he asked after a while.

“Colourful lights high in the sky. You will love them,” he promised. He went close to him and put his arms around his hips as he hugged him close.

“Thank you for this night out,” Nino said as he leant against him, his head on Ohno’s shoulder as he looked at the sky. It was a full moon tonight, fitting for the festival and it was not too warm or too cold.

Ohno chuckled softly and swayed them slightly to a melody only he could hear. Nino flinched when the fireworks went off at first and stared at the sky with wide eyes.

He had never seen anything like that. His hands held Ohno’s around his waist with a small smile.

“Hey?”

“What is it?”

“I think…” Nino stopped for a bit, breathing in deeply. He closed his eyes as he shuddered a bit under the slight breeze. Ohno’s arms tightened around him as he looked at him calmly.

“I think, I would like to be just with you like this for always. There are sparks all over my body when you touch me. The thought of hurting you or missing you is very painful.”

Nino looked at him, his eyes were wide and open and there was fear hiding in those orbs.

“I think my heart has given itself up for you a long time ago already. And I’m tired of running away from that and my fear.”

Ohno’s breath hitched as he turned him around and cupped his cheeks. He caressed the tender part under his eye before moving forwards.

“And I think, Kazunari, that you are very unfair right now. Because here I can’t even do a fraction of what I want to do with you.”

Nino took a shuddering breath as he looked into the dark eyes, he felt goosebumps on his arms as he put his arms around his waist to stay on his feet. “And that would be?”

Ohno smirked as he got close to kiss him. He took his time to enjoy the sweet taste he got used to already, before moving back and leaning his forehead against Nino’s. “Let’s head back and I show you?”

“Yes, please,” Nino said breathlessly. Ohno smiled as he made sure that the face paint was still in place as he tugged at his hand carefully to lead him back to the inn.

Chapter Text

Ohno was careful as he let the other into their room at the inn. Most people were out and Nino was more than happy that nobody was watching them because he had less grace than normal right now and was stumbling behind Ohno until the other had scooped him up.

Nino hid his face at his shoulder, sighing softly when he felt warm lips against his temple. Ohno balanced him safely on his arms as he pushed the door to their room open and put Nino down on the bed.

Nino put his arms around his neck, drawing him close as he wanted to kiss the sweet lips, but Ohno chuckled softly as he traced his cheek with one finger.

“Let’s get rid of your face paint first. I want to look into your face, not the one hiding your true features.

Nino felt his cheeks getting hot at those words since right now the face paint was like a mask, hiding his true feelings, but he didn’t argue as Ohno got to his feet to get a wet cloth.

Ohno’s eyes were serious as he came back, sitting across of him on the bed as he lifted his hand. “May I?”

“Of course,” Nino agreed, closing his eyes as he felt the cloth move over his face, taking away the mask there.

“Look at me,” Ohno said. His voice was slightly husky at the words, his thumb gently tracing his nose.

Nino opened his eyes, startled at being so close to the other right away.

“You look the most beautiful like this,” Ohno whispered as he closed the last of the distance and soon enough the warm full lips were on his own. His eyes fluttered close as he sighed into the kiss. His hand wandering up to grip the tunic the other was wearing.

Ohno chuckled against his lips as he pressed him down carefully. His hand slipped in between the folds of his robe. It was warm on his skin and he felt goosebumps rising on his arms at the direct contact so suddenly.

Ohno trailed some kisses along his chin to his neck and then nibbed softly at his ear, as he looked up again.

Nino’s breath hitched because Ohno’s eyes were so dark right now. He could see the desire in him and it sent shivers down his back at the thought that he brought these feelings to the other man.

“I want to worship your body,” Ohno whispered against his ear. His voice was somehow dark and Nino moaned softly at the feeling of the hot breath against his neck. He had never felt that sensitive as now.

“I want to touch every part of you, kiss it and taste it. I want to make you forget about everything else and only think about me.”

“Sammy,” Nino whispered groaning when Ohno bit the sensitive skin of his neck, his lips trailing further down and his tongue dipping slightly under the collar of his kimono.

“Satoshi. Tonight I want you to call me that. My name shall be the only one in your mind,” he said, looking up again a dangerous smirk on his lips.

“And I promise you, you will enjoy and love each minute of it.”

Nino shuddered at that promise and brought his hands up to draw Ohno close again. His lips searched Ohno’s for a searing kiss as his fingers clenched in his hair.

“Please, mark me yours,” he whispered hoarsely groaning when Ohno smirked again.

“My pleasure.”

—

Ohno moved backwards, sitting back on his knees after he had opened his belt. The thick close gave away easily under his nimble fingers and Nino was not really surprised. Ohno had helped him fasten it after all.

Ohno’s hands were very warm as they pushed away the outer cloth from his body, caressing. Nino shivered as he tried to catch his breath. He wasn’t sure how it would feel when all of his clothes were finally gone.

Ohno was smiling down at him, pushing the outer kimono off of him entirely, before his fingers made work on the second belt around Nino’s slim waist.

“Gorgeous,” Ohno whispered as the last part of his garment had fallen away, leaving Nino naked under him. Ohno’s eyes traced his slightly muscled, pale body. It was just a wondrous thing for Ohno that Nino was still so pale even if they had been in the sun for such long hours now.

Ohno smiled at the strangled gasp of Nino when his hands were on his hips, slowly stroking up until they found their destination on the slim chest. His thumbs graced the cute little dark brown nipples. He chuckled at the gasp when they touched them and he moved downward again. Ohno just wanted to taste the skin now and since Nino was so pliant under him he didn’t see any reason why not.

His lips left searing hot trails on Nino’s body and he closed his eyes against the emotions running through his body.

Ohno smiled at the little sounds that escaped Nino’s lips and even if he really wanted to kiss his lips, taste his tongue against his own he held back. He didn’t want to silence Nino right now, he enjoyed them too much. He licked the hollow of his neck with a soft hum in the back of his throat as he tasted the sweat collecting there. His lips wandering upwards again to kiss his Adam’s apple, nipping at it with his teeth.

“So beautiful,” he whispered against his skin as he traced the hard lines of his body with his tongue. He teased the dark nipples with his lips, teeth and tongue. His body got hotter and he could feel his dick swell against his loincloth at the sweet moans falling from Nino’s lips at his doings.

His hand cupped his waist, holding it to steady the man under him. He trailed more and more kisses down his body, enjoying the sounds and reactions he got. He nibbled at his hipbone, closing his eyes as he tried to burn all the places in Nino’s body that reacted to his touches into his memory.

Ohno’s tongue wandered over the skin, feeling the difference in his skin when his tongue wandered over a mole, his unscarred skin or the scars decorating some parts on Nino’s body, each part felt like silk under his tongue even if the softness was different.

As his name fell from Nino’s lips he looked up for a second, before pressing his lips against the hardened cock of the other. He smiled at the reaction as Nino’s body went rigid for a second before he did a full-body shudder and a loud moan escaped his lips. Ohno chuckled as he licked his lips, wandering upwards again.

“You are delicious,” He whispered against his lips, before indulging himself to a hot kiss. Nino whined against his lips, as their teeth clicked and their tongues battled for dominance. But all too soon, Nino surrendered to Ohno’s touches, much to Ohno’s delight. He knew that Nino was fighting with himself and he was touched by all the trust Nino had given him when he allowed him to tower over him and take whatever he wanted.

His fingers splayed out over the small of his back, wandering down and tracing the mark that he knew was there. They slipped a bit deeper, his finger pushing slightly against his opening.

Nino tensed a bit under him and Ohno pecked his lips a few times, tracing his lips with his tongue. “Is this alright?” He nudged Nino with his nose until the other opened his eyes.

It took a moment for Nino to process his question and then another until he worked it through. He pulled him closer, his body moulding against Ohno’s as his hardness slightly rubbed against Ohno’s leg from where his robe had spilt open.

“Yes, a little bit overwhelming.”

“Nervous?”

Nino bit his lips as he thought this through and shrugged a bit helpless. A bit maybe.

“Fearful?”

“No,” Nino said with a small smile. He kissed him again, cupping his cheek with his hand as he deepened the kiss. Ohno moaned into their kiss as Nino’s second hand went to his belt, prying it open with little difficulty and his fingers then traced the outline of his cock just slightly with the tips of his fingers.

“You wouldn’t hurt me.”

“Never,” Ohno promised, kissing him again, before moving away again. He peppered kisses along Nino’s body, his fingers closing around his length, pumping it and teasing the tip with his thumb. Nino’s moans were music in his ears as he carefully lifted his hips slightly to be able to touch the mark on his hip with his lips and tongue. He was fascinated by it and would probably never get bored by it. It just showed who Nino truly was and he was proud to be one of the few that were allowed to see this secret. And not only see but touch and study it as well.

He stayed close to the other as he carefully took a small vial from the side. It had been in the pack that Aiba had sent them and even if he had been embarrassed at first (and hadn’t even shown Nino that small thing) he was thankful for it now.

Nino made a small sound as Ohno slid more comfortable between his legs. His fingers, now wettened by the fragrant smelling oil, wandered to his opening, coating it slightly as his eyes wandered up again, to watch Nino’s reactions.

He carefully slipped one of them inside, breaching the entrance. Nino gasped at the intruder, stiffening up slightly under his ministrations.

Ohno kissed his stomach, making low sounds at the back of his throat to calm him down as he moved his finger to loosen his muscles up. When he was sure that Nino was fine, he slipped in another one, then two to loosen him up and prepare him for what was to come. His fingers dig deeper until Nino cried out in shock.

He looked up for a moment to make sure Nino was not feeling uncomfortable or in pain. He licked the weeping cock again, enjoying the bitter taste. He moved back and his fingers slipped out as he went.

“I will make you mine now. Last chance to run away,” he teased him but being half-serious. Nino pressed himself against Ohno with a loud moan.

“As if I could run right now,” he answered back. “I want this.”

Ohno smiled brightly at his words, watching him fondly from above. Their lips met in a chaste, loving kiss. One hand cupped his cheek, feeling and enjoying the warmth under his skin. One arm supported his weight as he positioned himself and slipped into Nino.

He swallowed the swear and moans falling from Nino’s lips as he gripped him hard around his shoulders. Ohno waited just for a fraction of a second before he started moving inside of Nino. Nino moved against him in shallow thrusts as they moved in sync.

Ohno’s fingers closed around his hardness again, pumping it in time with their moves. They exchanged kisses, breathing each other in until they reached their climaxes almost together. Ohno collapsed on top of Nino who groaned at the sudden weight. Ohno chuckled into his skin as he moved down to curl protectively around Nino on his side.

He wanted to tell Nino that he loved him, but at the same time, the thought of breaking the comfortable silence around them seemed wrong, so he pressed kisses against Nino’s collarbone and shoulder and hoped that this was enough to show him his feelings. The way Nino squeezed his hips warmly told him that Nino understood.

A/N: Another crappy chapter. But really where lies the surprise?

Chapter Text

Nino felt sore as he woke up the next morning. He turned around in the small bed and curled up next to Ohno, who woke up because of his movement. Ohno blinked, smiling down at him.

He played with his hair, moving down to kiss his temple. This Nino who had all walls down as he was deep asleep was the most beautiful, he decided as he kissed him on the forehead and then slipped out of bed with a sigh.

He put on a robe and put a thin cloth around his body so that he would not freeze in the cool air around them. He opened the door, hiding Nino from the woman who had knocked with his body. “Yes?”

“Sir, I hope you enjoyed the festival?”

“Yes, it was beautiful, thank you.”

She smiled happily and a bit proudly. Something that he could understand. The whole town came together to make the moon festival as beautiful as it was and he thought they could be very proud of it.

“I wanted to tell you that breakfast is almost ready. Do you have any special wishes?”

“No, everything was fine yesterday so I trust your decisions. But extra tea would be nice.”

“Of course, sir.”

“Thank you,” Ohno said as he closed the door and turned around. He smiled when he saw Nino stretched out on the bed. The blanket pulled around his body, smiling sleepily up at him.

“You’re beautiful.”

“You say this all the time.”

“Because it is true. I can’t believe that I deserved to be someone like you. You’re perfect. No, more than that,” he whispered as he came closer again. He knelt on the bed and moved down to kiss his lips.

Nino blushed when Ohno chuckled as he nuzzled his cheek. “I really love you. Thank you for giving me this chance,” Ohno whispered.

“It wasn’t as if I had a choice. You are very easy to fall for,” he whispered against his lips as he dragged Ohno down again. Ohno smiled as he landed on Nino’s body, sharing small kisses with the other, until Nino sighed and pushed him at the shoulder, just slightly.

“Breakfast is ready soon, right?”

“Yes, that’s what she said.”

“Then I should clean myself. This is something I don’t want to have to explain.”

Ohno grimaced but nodded. He didn’t think that Nino would have to explain but someone seeing him spent and sated on the bed would somehow make the love they shared the night before seem like something dirty.

“Do you need help?”

“I don’t need help, but if you want to help me you’re welcome of course.”

Ohno’s face brightened up as he rolled off Nino and helped him up from the bed.

—

“Niji,” Nino gasped suddenly during their breakfast and jumped to his feet.

“What?” Ohno asked in confusion, looking up, his mouth half-open, and Nino bit back the laughter that threatened to break through at the cute confused expression. It probably should be disgusting since Ohno had still food in his mouth but it was funnier.

“He’s back,” Nino explained as he opened the window wider for his dragon. He had been a bit worried because it was later than he had hoped for him to come back. But now he was here and Nino was relieved, scared and happy all at once. Niji’s appearance meant that there was no reason to hold back much further, but then again, it also meant that his dragon was safe.

After he had pried the window open he held out his arm and soon enough Ohno watched as a see-through dragon appeared in the sky and got smaller as it got closer to Nino until it had the form of the small lizard that Ohno knew.

Nino giggled as he hugged him close and sat down again beside him. “Say hello to Satoshi,” he said strictly to the dragon and held it out to Satoshi who lifted his eyebrow.

“Hello?” Ohno said still holding in his amusement at the giddiness that had engulfed Nino now.

He could at least hear a grumble coming from Niji and his fingertips danced through Nino’s hair. “Does he want food? Otherwise, I will bring this out and give you two time to reconcile?”

“He hunted before coming, thank you Satoshi,” he said with a smile. Ohno nodded, making to stand up, but Nino tugged him back again to kiss his lips.

Niji whined low in his throat at the kiss but Nino just bopped him on the head looking a bit angry at him. “Stop it,” he said. Ohno chuckled as he collected their dishes and got up to bring them down to the kitchens. Nino knew that Ohno probably would make something up about his mistress needing to groom herself and have a drink downstairs.

Nino sighed before he got serious again and looked at Niji. He leant against the bed, pulling his legs close to hug them with his arms and Niji sat on his knee. “Tell me what you gathered.”

—

Ohno came into the room almost an hour later with another pot of fresh tea.

Nino was watching Niji who had curled up on the middle of the bed and was smiling soundly. “Hey, sorry were you bored?”

“No, how was it downstairs?”

“Full. People talked a lot about yesterday’s festival.”

“It was great.”

“Yes,” Ohno said looking a bit troubled.

“What else?”

“The soldiers are patrolling more often apparently and are a lot stricter.”

Nino hummed as he put his chin on his knees and watched Ohno’s troubled face. “It wasn’t like that before?”

“No,” Ohno said, staring down. His eyes fell on the little toes peeking out from under his robe. He smirked slightly as he poked them with his fingertips.

Nino giggled and wriggled his toes. “Come here,” he said as he uncurled and opened his arms. Ohno sighed as he folded against him as he closed his eyes.

“I worry about Jun. He can’t get in contact with me at the moment.”

“He got into contact with Masaki, though. You read the message. He is fine.”

“Yes, and he wants to check on who would rather follow me than my father. That’s not keeping a low profile.”

“He does what he thinks is right. Same with Masaki.”

“I know. But I don’t like it.”

Nino chuckled as he hummed and played with his hair. That was something even he understood. It was similar for him after all.

“It won’t be long though. Niji says they are ready to follow me and your father is summoning a lot of spirits. I have to act fast or it might be impossible for me to win.”

“Okay.”

Nino smiled and cupped his cheek. “Yes. Let Niji sleep and we can go for a walk now though. Let’s not think about it for now.”

“If you say so,” Ohno agreed as he stood and helped Nino to his feet. Nino lifted an eyebrow when the other was halfway across the room, pulling him along.

“I know you enjoy me like that the most. But I should paint my face before we leave.”

“Not as much as yesterday, promise?”

Nino rolled his eyes but nodded. Less would be more than enough. He went to his case to prepare his face for the outside world. He was looking forward to not having to do that anymore.

Nino observed himself in the looking glass before allowing Ohno to take him out.

“Hey, Satoshi, what have you planned for the fight? Will you stay back?”

“No, I will come with you and help you the best I can,” he answered back as he put his hand around his waist as they left the room. Nino hummed in understanding.

“Okay.”

“No more of that for now, though,” Ohno reminded him.

Nino smiled for a second before he nodded. Ohno was right. If there were more guards around it would be dangerous if anybody heard them. But they would need to make a plan tonight and Nino would have to send Niji out tonight to Masaki and Jun to get a message across. He just hoped the dragon would listen to him and do as he was told.

Ohno squeezed his waist and Nino blinked as he looked up to him. Ohno chuckled at the confused gaze for a moment.

“Focus on me.”

“Yes, Sammy,” he decided and moved forward to kiss his cheek, before letting Ohno lead him throughout the city to the places he had visited or liked when he had been young.

Chapter Text

Ohno led Nino through the streets, showing him small shops that Nino hadn’t even realised were there and sometimes ushered him inside to look at the goods that they were selling. Nino giggled slightly at that because he wasn’t really interested in any trinkets but in the end, he let Ohno buy him a small box made out of jade and a brush for his hair.

He needed neither but Ohno had insisted and it was somehow very cute how Ohno wanted to give him something. And well both things would at least be useful for something in future.

“Let’s watch a play.”

“A play?”

Ohno nodded as he ushered him inside a theatre. He paid the small fee before choosing two seats in the middle of the theatre from where they could see both stages.

“What is it about?”

Ohno shrugged as he pulled out the small parchment paper he had gotten when he had paid. He hadn’t been interested in the play but he wanted to share this with Nino at least once before the fight. He wanted to show Nino everything this city and the humans had to offer to give him something to continue living for.

“It’s a feudal play,” he said after reading the characters and Nino hummed in understanding as he settled in his seat, smiling when Ohno put his arm around his waist to hold him up.

Soon enough Nino was enthralled by the play, following the story closely and seemingly forgetting about anything else. Ohno smiled as he held him safe so that he wouldn’t be disturbed by anybody leaving or coming to watch the play and his eyes were set on Nino’s face.

The emotions playing on Nino’s face were for him far more fascinating than the play itself. Nino’s eyes were very clear, Ohno found, showing clearly his emotions right now. The amusement, the worry for the protagonists on the stage and also the pain when in the end the hero died. It was seldom that Nino was so open and there was no way that Ohno would change this for anything else.

Nino looked back to him when applause rose around them, his eyes sparkling as he moved forwards and shyly placed a tiny kiss against his cheek. “Thank you,” he whispered in his ear and Ohno squeezed his waist for a moment, before slowly getting up with him.

“Let’s get some food and then the park?”

“Sounds good,” Nino agreed with a smile.

—

It was late afternoon when Nino and Ohno arrived back at the inn. They were greeted by the girl who mostly served them now with a bright smile.

“Welcome back, sir, madam. I hope you had a nice outing?”

“Yes it was very nice,” Ohno agreed while Nino nodded mutely but with a gentle smile. It had been nice and cleared his head a lot.

“Do you want to be served a few refreshments before dinner? Or take a bath? I can have the water heat up for the lady.”

Ohno looked at Nino in question and Nino nodded slowly. A bath sounded nice and even if he was not hungry he knew that Niji would need food and he couldn’t hunt so close to the city.

“We would like to have both, but then dinner served a little bit later than normal if that is okay?”

“Of course, no problem,” she promised and bowed as they left to go to their room. Nino smiled at the small lizard on the bad and patted his head. “Get under the blanket,” he whispered and grinned when the dragon did just that just as the woman entered their room after another knock to prepare the tub on the side of the room.

Ohno talked to the woman as he helped her with the water while Nino played with the blanket. Tonight, after dinner, he would send Niji to Masaki to talk to him and then tomorrow, yes he thought, tomorrow would be the day they advanced to the castle. He stared at Ohno for a moment, thinking about how to break it to him, but he wanted this to be over. If he was going to be with Ohno, he wanted it to be without dread hanging over them.

The woman left them after she had put down the refreshments and Nino poked Niji awake with a grin. He took the tea for them and drank it when the dragon poked his head out from under the blanket. “We got you food,” he explained, giggling at the happy thrill from the dragon who slipped down of the bed to much at the very meaty looking rice balls. After the tea, Nino got up to take off his robes and tugged Ohno behind him to follow him to the tub.

“Tomorrow it will start,” Nino said as he leant back in the hot water with a deep sigh.

“I see,” Ohno agreed, playing with his hair. “Will you fight to stay alive?” Ohno asked almost silently.

Nino looked at him and put his chin on the rim of the tub to watch Ohno’s face more closely. He was silent for a long time, watching as Ohno’s face fell and his shoulders slumped. He breathed in calmly and caught Ohno’s hand to press his lips against them.

“I promise to do my best to come back to you,” he whispered after a few more moments. “But I don’t know what awaits me.”

Ohno’s lips twitched slightly at his words. “That has to be enough for me. Nobody knows what awaits ourselves right? But Masaki…”

“Masaki knows more than he lets on, I will talk to him after dinner.”

Ohno frowned at those words and caressed Nino’s soft lips. He would never get enough from that. “How? It will be suspicious if you leave.”

“Niji will help. But I need you to not be too spooked at what I’m going to do and you need to be on the lookout. My body will stay here, my mind will wander and then I’m vulnerable.”

Ohno nodded, still looking confused at his words. “I will protect you always.”

Nino nodded and sighed. “That’s another thing, I need you to promise me now.”

“What?” Ohno asked suspiciously and Nino took his hand in his own to kiss his palm.

“If I tell you to stand back, you need to do so. The last fight, I need to do myself. Your father… he is not who you think he is,” he said, a pained look, crossing his face. “I have my suspicions but I need to talk to Masaki about how true they are. This town reeks of something that is not human.”

“I don’t understand.”

“You don’t have to, not just yet. I will explain, tonight or tomorrow, I promise. But promise me to listen to my demands when the fight starts.”

Ohno sighed, he didn’t want to. He wanted to protect Nino to stand by his side and in front of him, but he nodded after a moment. “Okay,” he whispered. “I will stand back if you tell me.” He moved forward and pressed his lips against the side of his lips.

Nino smiled as he tugged him closer. “Take off your clothes, and join me. I thought you would from the start, but it seems like I need to spell it for you, right?” he teased him with a twinkle in his eyes.

Ohno blushed but soon enough he was chuckling and got up to his feet to do as Nino told him. It was a tight fit for them both but soon enough Ohno was leaning against Nino’s chest, his head on his shoulder.

“Would you be okay with showing your true face to the king’s men?” Nino asked after a while.

“What do you mean?”

“Even if the king wants to have you killed, if you appear at the gates they would have to let you in first. They can’t forbid you as the legitimate son.”

“True, but how does that help you?”

Nino smirked as he caressed his brow with his fingertips. “I accompany you of course. They might let me in if I look like a vulnerable woman, easy to get rid of, but a danger outside to make a scene.”

Ohno furrowed his brows but then he nodded in agreement. If they could get in without a fight it would be safer for Nino and the people of the town. “What about Masaki? Don’t you need him close?”

Nino grinned as he nodded. “Yes, but I can figure out a way to get him there. Don’t worry about that. Once I’m in and can hide away for a moment without fearing to get into an ambush right away I will be able to get him in. It will cost me, but Masaki will be able to help me.”

Ohno frowned but nodded. He pressed against the other, he was not so happy about it all and how soon it would be happening, but there was nothing he could do to change it. And he knew there was no way around it. Nino had a look on his face when he Ohno had come back earlier that day, that told Ohno that the end was nearing.

Chapter Text

“You know how to get to Masaki, right?” Nino asked Niji who let out an offended trill. Nino chuckled, while Ohno shook his head in amusement.

“Yeah of course you do. I need you to go there now. Then I need you to be careful not to be seen and make sure that he is alone. When you are Masaki knows how to let me know. I will take over your body. So be good.”

Niji rubbed his head against his cheek, making Nino smile as he kissed his head. “And be careful. Don’t get caught, Niji.”

Niji agreed and licked his cheek before turning around to look warningly at Ohno who lifted his hands with a smirk on his face. “I will protect your Nino,” he promised the dragon who seemed to accept his promise as he turned around and was gone soon after.

“Are you worried?”

Nino shrugged at his question but leant against him thankfully when Ohno’s arms wormed around his waist. “He will be fine. He can be careful,” he whispered.

“But?”

“But I feel already exhausted with everything that is going to happen. I still wish I can just walk away from this all.”

“But?”

“But that could mean the end of the world,” Nino said with a soft smile. “And there are things to be protected, so I can’t do that. Would you please make sure that the door is barricaded? It would not end well if anybody was to come inside.”

“Of course,” Ohno mumbled, even if not really happy that he had to let him go. Still, he did and checked the door and that they had some water to drink.

Then he came back to the other and tugged him on top of the bed. He buried his head in his neck, breathing in deeply. “Is this fine?”

“Yes, wherever you feel comfortable,” Nino said as he moved forwards to kiss his temple. “Thank you, Satoshi.”

“Everything for you,” Ohno grinned sheepishly as he pressed his lips against his again. It didn’t take long before Nino broke up their kiss.

“Masaki is ready. Hold me and don’t be worried.”

“Easy for you to say.”

Nino’s lips switched slightly as he nodded. “That’s why I am the one to say those words. Now hush I need my concentration.”

Ohno nodded in silence, tightening his grip around his waist for a moment, as he felt Nino stiffen in his embrace before his body loosened up, and he was careful to hold him upright against himself.

—

When Nino opened his eyes again he felt a bit strange. He tried hard not to move since this body did not belong to him and it would only end up in pain. “Masaki.”

“Hey Kazu, how are you?”

“Good.”

“Enjoying your time with Ohno?” Masaki teased wriggling his eyebrows and Nino was very glad not to be able to blush.

“We will go to the castle tomorrow. Ohno will take me there as his companion.”

“A very smart move,” Aiba agreed softly. “I will await you in the evening then?”

“Yes,” Nino agreed, shuddering softly at the thought of what was to happen.

“Are you scared?” Aiba asked carefully as he observed him a while. Nino thought about it for a moment, before he nodded.

“Yes,” he whispered, almost too fearful to say it out loud.

Aiba breathed deeply as he relaxed his form and nodded. “That is good then.”

“How so?”

“Because fear makes you careful,” he said as he leant back. “Everything else would have made you ruthless.”

“I don’t want any of you to get hurt.”

Masaki smiled softly and touched the scales of the dragon. Nino could feel the ghost touch through their bodies and closed his eyes softly as calmness washed over him.

“Is your mindset, Kazunari?”

Again there was silence in between them for a long while, as Nino thought about his words. In the end, he nodded once. “Yes.”

“Then it shall happen as it has been woven by fate. I have to warn you though. We will stand by your side and in the end, there will be the demand for a sacrifice, Kazunari.”

“I know, and I’m okay with giving it. That man won’t win.”

Masaki smiled sadly as he nodded. “It might not be what you expect. But I trust you to make the right choices, because, my dear Kazu, you are smart and in love, and those things will bring the future. Go back, okay? I will prepare for the fight, I will send Jun a message so don’t worry about that either.”

“Thank you,” Nino said.

—

Nino breathed deeply as he felt his mind move into his own body again. He kept his eyes closing, shivering slightly at the sudden onslaught of feelings all around him. Being in Niji’s mind had been too much and too little all at once.

Soon he could feel Ohno’s warm hands rubbing his arms and his breath at his neck. He kissed his neck, slowly but surely grounding him again.

“That was scary,” Ohno whispered as Nino blinked and his eyes focused back on Ohno’s face. He traced his fond smile as he buried himself more into his embrace.

“Did you talk to Masaki?”

“Yes, he said that he will join us tomorrow and that everything will be fine,” Nino mumbled, deciding easily not to mention anything about the sacrifice. He was worried that Ohno would stop him if he knew.

“That’s good isn’t it?”

“Yes. He sounded a bit like a proud parent.” Nino chuckled at the memory and shook his head.

“He seems like an old soul,” Ohno agreed and kissed his temple.

“An old soul?”

“Yes, don’t you know about that?”

Nino shook his head as he watched him curiously.

“We have the saying that sometimes children with old souls are born. They look young but their soul has already lived many lives and remembers them,” Ohno explained.

Nino blinked a bit as he thought about it and then nodded. For Masaki that made sense. Masaki always seemed to know more than he let on, and Nino was sure that it was not only down to his learnings at the monastery or from his own family.

“That’s an interesting concept,” He said with a small frown on his face.

Ohno smoothed it out with the tips of his fingers as he rolled his eyes. “And not for you to worry about now. It is just a silly belief.”

“The same with the old gods, and dragons?” Nino asked as he poked his cheek.

“You’re right,” he said with a sigh, before hugging him close. “What about Niji?”

“Niji will slip in later. He knows when it’s safe and when not.”

“Okay. Do you need anything?”

“I’m hungry,” he grumbled after a moment of thought.

“Okay, I will ask for dinner. You stay here,” Ohno said tweaking his nose, as he pushed him down to the bed and put the blanket over him so that he was warm.

“I’ll be back in a bit. Any wishes?”

“Meat or fish, especially for Niji.”

Ohno nodded and couldn’t help himself as he moved forward to touch Nino’s lips with his again. He just couldn’t help himself.

Nino chuckled at his antics before lying back more comfortable. He closed his eyes exhausted as Ohno left and rolled to his side as to not fall to sleep, hopefully. He looked at his fingers, thinking about what would happen the day after. He was scared, but he knew that they would be successful. There was no other option, after all.

“Please trust me,” he whispered into the emptiness of the room as he curled in on himself. He really hoped that Ohno did. He pressed his fingertips against his lips, praying for Morga to watch over him and give him all the strength that he needed.

“Food will arrive shortly,” Ohno said as he entered their room. He was balancing a tray with freshly brewed tea and Nino sat up as he was given a bowl filled with fragrant white tea. “The lady said it will be calming.”

Nino nodded as he took it with both hands and drank a bit of the tea. He sighed as he licked his lips. “Tastes nice.”

“Good, I’m glad. There is colour back in your face,” Ohno said happily as he caressed his cheek and put one strand of his hair out of his eyes.

“Was it that scary?”

“Your body slumped against mine? Very. If you hadn’t warned me I would’ve thought you dead.”

“I’m not that easily killed.”

“So you say,” Ohno snorted as he tugged at his ear. “But as Masaki likes to remind me: You are just as human as we are, even if there lies more power in you that I still am not sure I understand.”

Nino giggled as he nodded. He didn’t understand it as well if he was honest. He pulled the robes around himself more tightly when there was a knock at the door and the serving girl came inside.

Their dinner was taken in silence and Nino made sure to prepare a bowl for Niji to eat during the night before he went to sleep with Ohno’s arms around his frame. The next morning Niji slid on his place around his neck before Nino got dressed. They ate breakfast close to each other before Nino shaved Ohno and made sure his illusion was unbreakable as Ohno paid their fee and thanked the couple for their hospitality.

They left the city just to re-enter it at another place with Ohno striding up to the gate of the castle directly a serious look on his face.

A/N: Sorry this sucks. Lately all chapters I write sucks.

Chapter Text

Ohno tried very pointedly not to look back and check up on Nino. He knew that the other man was fine. Nobody would think that he was a man and Niji was slung around his neck so that nobody would be able to cut him down. He also knew that the illusion that Nino had put on himself would protect him, but still, he was very nervous that something would go wrong.

He would have preferred to get inside in silence, in hiding with nobody knowing about them getting in. But Nino had not even considered it, and somehow that made Ohno feel as if the other knew more than he did. Maybe Nino didn’t think it was possible for them to get inside unseen.

He breathed in relief when he realised that one of the guards on the entrance was Jun and he squeezed Nino’s hand when he heard him chuckle under his breath, realising that even if Nino looked that confident that he had been worried as well.

“Your highness,” the second guard cried out as they came to view. Jun shot him a dark look before his eyes fell on Ohno and he moved his head into a respectful bow.

“We thought you dead,” Jun said.

“I’m not,” Ohno answered in a gruff voice, making hard not to grimace. He wasn’t used to using that kind of voice anymore.

“How?” the second man asked, seemingly shocked. “They said you were mauled by strangers and they didn’t find you…” he trailed off when Jun clucked his tongue.

“You are not paid for babbling,” Jun mumbled, and Nino rolled his eyes. He was curious as to what those people were told, but he also thought foolish to ask Ohno such a thing.

“I shall not need to tell you,” Ohno said with a frown on his face. “Or do I know?”

“No, of course not, your highness. I apologise.”

“Jun!”

“What can I do for you, your highness?”

“Escort me to my chambers. I shall refresh myself and send word to my father.”

“I shall tell him myself,” Jun agreed as he called another soldier to take up his post on the gate. The man almost stumbled as he saw Ohno who ignored him and Jun looked back at Ohno before his eyes fell seemingly for the first time on Nino, who had a hard time to lower his gaze shyly instead of glaring back as everything in him demanded to do so.

But that wouldn’t fit his disguise, and he bit his inner cheek to keep from saying anything.

“What about your… companion?” He asked with an evident sneer into Nino’s direction, who rolled his eyes discreetly.

“I was indeed wounded, and she helped to tend to my wounds. I promised her to compensate her for her good deeds. So she is with me,” he said with a lifted eyebrow. “Now lead the way.”

“As you wish, your highness,” Jun answered primly as he lowered his head shortly before turning around sharply and striding inside. Nino bit his lips as he followed Ohno inside, for a moment feeling as if he wasn’t able to breathe with the tightness around his lungs.

Ohno squeezed his fingers, and Niji hummed into his ear, and he closed his eyes for a moment as he fought against the borders that were meant to keep him out. They bent to his wishes, and he was careful to do just the slightest changes so that nobody would realise just right away. Not yet, he thought. Not yet, but soon. He looked up, staring at the jade palace with the golden tops. He was home.

—

Ohno visibly relaxed when the door to his chambers closed behind them, and Nino chuckled as he came over to hug him from behind.

“You are still not sure about this, right?”

“Yes, I don’t like being here officially. My father will call me and then I have to leave you alone. Who knows what will happen inside then.”

Nino snorted as he shook his head. “Nothing will happen. Don’t forget that I know how to defeat myself. I don’t need you for that,” he reminded him gently, hugging him more tightly when Ohno stiffened slightly.

“I’m allowed to worry,” he grumbled.

“Yes, but you need to worry about yourself first,” he whispered as he turned him around. Ohno was frowning down at him, and Nino held his face in his hand.

“My father won’t kill me,” he mumbled.

“You don’t know that,” he sighed. “He already tried.”

“Yes, but he can’t do it here. Everybody would know it was him if he does it here.”

Nino nodded in agreement. “Not today, right. Still, promise me to take care of yourself and worry about me afterwards.”

“If you do the same,” Ohno demanded, and Nino grimaced but nodded. He stepped back when there was a knock at the door and Ohno called whoever there was inside. Nino knelt on the floor in front of the low table, when Ohno motioned for him to do so and soon enough a few servants came inside with refreshments and buckets of warm water to fill the tub nearby.

Neither Nino nor Ohno really wanted to take a bath, but still, Ohno thanked them, and Nino stared at his fingers without a word as he waited for them to be alone again. Ohno groaned as he sat beside him.

Nino chuckled as he moved forward to kiss his cheek. “You should take a bath, my lord,” he teased him. I suppose the king expects you to do so before he would allow you to see him.”

“Seems like it but maybe that’s a reason why I shouldn’t,” he grumbled.

Ohno reached out to serve them tea, but Nino put his hand on top of his to stop him.

“Let me. I’m supposed to do so,” he said with a sigh.

“Not when we are alone,” Ohno said with a frown.

“Maybe, but if the king is in any way how I expect him to be, he will demand us to eat dinner together. And it would be bad if something went wrong because we behave as we usually would.”

“You are the guest, and not meant to serve us,” Ohno murmured but didn’t fight him as Nino poured the tea for them and then took a sip, frowning at the bitter taste.

They stayed in silence for a moment, before Nino sighed and got up to usher Ohno to the second room with the washbasin and the filled tub. “I’ll even wash your back,” Nino offered as he tugged Ohno’s robe off of his body.

“There is a hot spring down. I would love to go there with you,” Ohno mourned but didn’t fight the talented fingers, that unclothed him.

“When this all is over, we will.”

“That sounds nice. When this all is over,” Ohno hummed. Nino giggled as he took a washcloth from the side.

“Right? It’s something to look forward to,” he agreed readily as he washed the other man. A small smile on his face as Ohno slowly relaxed under his fingers.

When they were out there was a sharp knock on the door, and with a sigh, Ohno asked the person to enter, while Nino helped him to get into a more representable robe that was fitting for his status.

Jun stepped inside just moments after and closed the door behind him. “I see you are getting ready,” He said, relief clear in his voice.

“Yeah, Nino forces me to,” Ohno answered with a pout. Nino’s lips twitched into a smile as he closed the belt around his waist.

“Your father awaits you,” Jun said, and Ohno nodded, looking at Nino again.

Nino smiled as he kissed him on his lips, lovingly. “Don’t look so worried. I’ll be fine. I will have some more tea and one of those rice cakes.”

“Okay,” Ohno said with a pout. Jun cleared his throat.

“He’s right, you know? Besides, I’m supposed to guard your chambers. Now that you are back, your father told me so. He doesn’t want anything to happen to you again, just now that he has you back.”

Nino snorted slightly and lifted his hands as Jun shot him a dark look.

“I didn’t mean to belittle you,” he said with a sigh, then looked at Ohno with a small frown. “Go!”

“Yes, my highness and master,” Ohno teased, and Nino growled as he pushed him out, but he was smiling gently at Ohno’s giggling, which vanished as soon as the door was opened, his face serious once more.

“I like the lord more when he jokes with you,” Jun said with a sigh as Ohno was gone and the door close.

Nino shrugged as he pulled at his hair. “Who wouldn’t?” he asked with a sigh, before shaking his head. “No, please don’t. I know the king prefers it this way.”

“Nino?”

“Mh?”

“Why do you always call him, the king?”

“Because he is,” Nino said with a frown. “You know I don’t mean that.”

Nino sighed as he looked out of the window. “The king is not who he appears to be, and he is not Satoshi’s father.”

Chapter Text

“What?!” Jun hissed and turned around to come closer to the other. He put his hand at his throat, his other at his sword and Nino rolled his eyes as he stared him down.

Niji growled warningly, and Nino moved a step back. “Niji down. Check up on Ohno, if you want to be all growly,” he said. “Try not to get seen though.” Then he looked at Jun.

“And stop it. Do you really think you are scaring me? I’m stating truths, and you are not helping,” Nino hissed.

“I will not stand you offending my lord.”

“I’m not. It doesn’t belittle his worth. At least not for me. If it does for you, it’s not my problem. And it’s not as if I’m out there declaring it for all to hear, am I?”

“I don’t understand,” Jun said, but his stance relaxed finally.

“You don’t have to. I will explain later, maybe. But it’s honestly his decision if he wants to tell you or if he doesn’t.”

“Does he know?”

“No, not yet. I will explain to him, but not when he needs to be inauspicious in front of the king. And I don’t want to stand here for too long with that man alive. So how about you go out and do your job while I make sure to summon Masaki.”

“Masaki is no demon you can summon,” Jun scoffed. “Wouldn’t it be easier for me to bring him in?”

“If I was sure that you are not watched most of the time, yes. And I know that he is no demon, but I can make a portal and Masaki trusts me, and I trust him so he will be safe. Just go and make sure that nobody enters but Satoshi. I want to get this over so that I can refill my powers overnight. I don’t want Satoshi to be in danger too long.”

Jun huffed but turned around to leave the room. Nino sighed as he rubbed his face tiredly. He sat down and grinned at Niji who had, of course, stayed with him.

“You know I was serious when I told you to check on Satoshi? I worry about him.”

Niji shrugged, and Nino rolled his eyes. He knew that Niji thought Ohno, not of that much importance. “But well enough, I need you to lend me your power, can you do that?”

Niji thrilled, looking at him with contempt which made Nino giggle. Of course, Niji could. He hugged him around the neck for a second to thank him for his help and then Niji rolled up around him. Nino closed his eyes, feeling Niji’s power running through his veins as the dragon also made sure that there was a circle around Nino that limited it as well.

Nino concentrated not to use too much power as he contacted Masaki, glad that they had talked the evening before and that Masaki had kept his mind open for him. His reach was weak enough as it was with him and Niji limiting it so much. Without Niji’s help, he was sure he wouldn’t even be able to be heard.

“Masaki, are you ready?”

“Of course, I was waiting for you.”

Nino smiled as he whispered the incarnation to make the portal appear. He almost fell against Niji who held him up and managed to close the entrance so that nothing terrible would happen.

“You shouldn’t have shielded yourself so much,” Aiba scolded as soon as he appeared.

“I’m happy to see you as well,” Nino said a bit ironically.

Aiba rolled his eyes, but he didn’t argue as he thanked Niji for his help and helped Nino lie down. “It stole too much of your energy. You will need to be more careful.”

“I know, I’m sorry. Can you stop nagging? I have a headache,” Nino said with a pout as he closed his eyes and snuggled to Niji who was slightly growling at Aiba whenever the other scolded Nino.

“Niji, bite him,” Nino said with a giggle.

“Stop it, you both,” Aiba said, but he was smiling warmly at them. “I brought potions for you. And the monks knew what will happen.”

“How so?”

“They are still following the Old Gods. In secret of course,” he said with a sigh. “They can read the clouds and saw the dragons.”

“Mhm… Are we in danger?”

“No, we are safe. Kazu?”

“Yes?”

“Are you going to sleep?”

“Maybe,” Nino agreed with a small chuckle. He sat up obediently when Aiba pushed at his side to pour the potion down his throat.

“Masaki, can you leave later? I want to be alone with Satoshi,” he mumbled with a frown.

Aiba chuckled as he nodded. “Yes, I will find a way to hide somewhere. Jun will help as well, I’m sure.”

“You can’t leave, though. Jun is watched outside of the compounds.”

Aiba nodded as he sat beside him to let him curl up on his lap. “Sleep now. There is more to talk later for the fight.”

“I will go alone.”

Aiba chuckled. “No, you won’t. And you know that. You are just a bit childish and stubborn right now.”

“Am not.”

“Are too, go to sleep.”

“Yes, mother,” Nino said with a snort, but his eyes fell close, and he fell asleep shortly after.

—

Ohno nodded at Jun as the other entered the door to his room and was just a tad surprised to find Nino asleep with Masaki close.

“He succeeded?”

“Yup, but he tired himself out, my lord. How are you feeling?”

“Confused,” Ohno sighed. “Father seemed to be happy to have me back.”

Jun made a funny noise at the back of his throat, which made Ohno frown and Nino wake up. He groaned as he rubbed his face.

“How is your headache?” Aiba asked and helped Nino to sit up, who was for a second confused as the mix of people in the room.

“Still there,” he sighed. “But it’s fine. How was your talk?”

“Good, father was surprised to hear that I brought a woman and he demands us to be there for dinner. You were right.”

“I know,” Nino said, and Ohno chuckled a bit. He probably should be annoyed, but it was most amusing to him, how undeterred Nino was.

He sat down beside Nino and pulled him into his arms. He sighed softly as he inhaled the soft scent of his lover. Lover, how sweet that sounded in his mind, he thought with a smile.

Nino curled up on his side and intertwined their fingers. “Are you feeling unsure about me killing him?”

“No, I trust you,” Ohno mumbled with a sigh. He knew that his father could easily feign to be a good man, but he had learnt the hard way that he wasn’t really.

“Good,” Nino said with a smile and pressed a kiss on his chin. “Thank you,” he whispered earnestly. Ohno didn’t need to trust him, and he was delighted that the other still did.

“Will you share your plan?” Jun asked, and Nino looked up with a frown. He thought for a while before he sighed.

“There is not much you need to know, honestly. I need you to keep my back clear, Masaki will be close and making sure I’m not overwhelmed, right?”

Aiba nodded with a severe gaze. “Yes, you will be vulnerable with the dark forces,” he mumbled.

“How so?” Ohno asked in surprise. Nino chuckled as kissed him.

“Where there is light, there is darkness. The powers that the king and Kazu use are very similar. It depends on how they want to use it.”

“Nino wants to protect, right?”

Nino shrugged as he put his head on his chest he was still feeling slightly dizzy. Ohno chuckled as he moved him in his arms so that he was sideways on his lap and Ohno could hold him close, rocking him slightly from side to side, until he fell to sleep again.

“He wants now, that’s why I’m sure it will be fine.”

“That’s why you wanted him to be with me?”

“No,” Aiba chuckled. “At least not only. It’s a good side effect. But I want him to be happy. To have something worth living for. He always did things for others, seldom for himself, and he loved you from the start even if he didn’t know it and was too scared even to try and allow himself.”

“But you still want him to fulfil his duties?”

“Yes,” Aiba said with a frown. “Of course.”

“Even if that means his death?”

Aiba stayed silent for a while, his eyes on the smaller man before he nodded slowly. “Yes.”

Ohno frowned as he hugged Nino closer to himself. He thought that was very cruel from the other man. He didn’t answer and closed his eyes for a moment. Ohno swore to do his best to protect Nino even if he was very weak in comparison.

“We’ll leave you for now then, my lord,” Jun said. The guards would change places now, and that was probably the safest time for them to go somewhere unseen.”

“Thank you. We’ll meet tomorrow.”

“My lord, don’t think I want him to suffer. I love him like a baby brother.”

“Still, you would lead him to his death.”

“I trust into the Gods, fate and him. And so should you. Don’t burden him with your fear.”

“I won’t. But I won’t lead him to slaughter either.”

“I respect that, my lord. But if you intervene and I see that he will fail because of that, I will hold you down.”

Ohno nodded in understanding. That was to be expected.

Chapter Text

Ohno hugged Nino close to himself, pressing his lips against his forehead with a little sigh. He moved Nino in his arms, rubbing his arms slightly to wake him up.

It was time for them to get ready for dinner, as there had been already a knock at the door from a maid asking him if they needed help. Ohno had denied since they could very well do it all themselves. They didn’t need anyone else. Especially not Nino.

Nino moaned softly hiding his face at the chest of the other man.

“Sorry to wake you up. But it has gotten late, and my father doesn’t like to wait,” Ohno explained.

Nino nodded and kissed Ohno’s chest, where the robe had fallen open. “It’s okay. I shouldn’t sleep too much, anyway. Or I can’t sleep tonight.”

Ohno nodded and lifted his chin to kiss him deeply. He sighed happily at Nino’s lips moving against his, tasting his saliva before pressing his forehead against Nino’s forehead for a second. “I love you.”

Nino smiled at him as he nodded. “As do I,” he whispered against his lips, kissing him again, before moving back finally.

“Right. Let’s get ready and get over with this,” Nino groaned as he stood and stretched out his back.

“How are you, Nino?”

Nino turned around to look at the other with a small, thoughtful frown on his face. “I don’t know, honestly. A little bit strange. The energy here is poisonous. I’m not surprised so many people follow the king,” he sighed.

“I feel down,” Ohno agreed with a frown. “I never realised before. You say it’s because of this place?”

“Yes. You now realise that because you’ve been away for so long. It’s pushing down on my shoulders, or at least it feels exactly like that. I won’t be able to stand this for very long. Especially since it’s not that easy to hide.”

Ohno nodded in understanding. He frowned but then got up when Nino motioned for him to do so as well.

“Father sent this for you to wear.”

“Then I probably should,” Nino mumbled as he picked up the fine cloth of the robe that was put over a low chair at the entry. He was sure a maid had brought it in when he was asleep. “You will need to help me to wear it, though. I can’t close the belts all alone.”

“Of course,” Ohno agreed as Nino shrugged off his robe he was wearing, and wiping off the sweat that had built up on his body when he had called Masaki here with fragrant water.

Ohno helped him then to wear the under robes, rubbing his nose against the hollow of his neck. “You smell nice.”

“Mh… It’s the flowers in the water. I thought I should use that when your maids prepared it, especially for me.”

“I might get used to this,” Ohno warned him slightly playfully.

“I’m okay with that,” Nino decided after a moment of thought. “And now stop stalling. We need to hurry, and I still need two more layers. No wonder women can’t fight stupid men well,” he huffed as Ohno helped him again. Nino moved his arms slightly to be able to move better, before nodding.

“Okay, we can go. I’ll be fine for today,” he decided, dropping a kiss on his cheek. “And you too.”

“If you say so.”

“I’m sure of it. Please trust me.”

“I do. God knows I do.”

Nino smiled brilliantly at the words and pulled him close to kiss him more deeply, before quickly painting his face - he had gotten rather good at that if he dared say so himself.

Ohno smiled as he carefully traced his lips before sighing and taking his hand to lead him outside.

Nino leant slightly against Ohno and started to look around to get a feeling of the building. He has never been here after all. There were drawings in his grandfather’s documents, but it was not the same as being inside.

“We are there,” Ohno whispered into his ear, and Nino blinked. He smiled thankfully and straightened slightly to follow the other into the dining room. He bowed deeply in front of the king and greeted him in a soft voice, before looking again when he was told to do so. His eyes tightened slightly as he was face to face with the murderer of his family for the very first time, but he forced himself to relax enough as to be polite and friendly to the man. This was going to be a long dinner, he thought at the saccharine smile of the other and sat down beside Ohno.

—

“He was flirting with you,” Ohno said with a frown as they were back in his room. He furrowed his brows and pursed his lip unhappily.

Nino’s lips twitched slightly at his words before he nodded in agreement. “He did,” he whispered and tugged him down beside him. “But you don’t think that I enjoyed it, did you?”

Ohno stared at him for a moment, before very slowly shaking his head. Nino’s brow lifted upwards at the slight hesitation.

“Satoshi,” he said in a warning voice.

“I’m sorry. But you didn’t really warn him or tell him to stop.”

“Of course not. He is still the king, and there were guards all around. I’m supposed to be a weak, easy woman. Of course, I need to appear agreeing to his advances. He needs to underestimate me. Do you really think I would be happy about it?”

“No… I apologise,” Ohno said, sinking even lower and putting his head on his shoulder. He breathed in shakily. “I don’t know why I reacted like that. Of course, you would not. I know that.”

“I know why. You still fear me leaving you, and I know that it’s my fault. And I’m sorry about this. And I promise you if this is all over I’ll do my best to make sure you won’t think so ever again. Even if it takes a lot of time.”

“Time that we’ll have them?”

“Hopefully,” Nino promised as he stood and walked over to the washbasin to take off his make up. He somehow felt awful wearing his mask when he and Ohno were all alone.

“I need to tell you something,” he said when he came back. “Something regarding your family.”

Ohno frowned at his words and traced his face with his fingertip before he shook his head. “Not tonight.”

“Tomorrow the fight will start. Don’t you want to know everything before?”

“I do. But I want to spend the last night without such sad thoughts and just with you by my side. Holding you in my arms and being close to you.”

Nino smiled fondly at him and then nodded. “I would like that as well,” he decided after a while.

“Are you tired yet?” Ohno asked with an innocent smile on his face. Nino looked at him for a moment before starting to laugh loudly and shaking his head.

“Perfect. Then let’s make sure you get a proper rest tonight. Can’t have you being tired tomorrow.”

Nino stared at him as he chuckled as he put his arms around his neck and pulled him on top of him. “That’s right,” he agreed with a grin as Ohno hovered on top of him and pressed kisses against his lips down to his neck as talented fingers started to open the knots of his belts.

—

Nino was curled up beside Ohno. He had fallen asleep soon after they had calmed down once again, still wiped out from all the things around him.

Ohno didn’t seem to find any sleep so soon, though. His eyes traced the smaller form of his lover, and he let his fingers wander over the pale skin with a soft smile. He just hoped that everything went as well as Nino was sure it would.

He didn’t know how much of that was down to Nino, wanting to calm him down and how certain he was about that inside. He kissed his temple and played with his long hair. He would try to protect him the best he could, Ohno thought as Nino mumbled something in his sleep. His lips were moving against his chest.

A small smile appeared on Ohno’s lips as he put his lips against Nino’s hair and closed his head. But for him to be able to do so, he should also try to find some rest.

“Niji look after us?” he asked the dragon, who huffed a little but rolled up in front of the door. Ohno’s lips buried in Nino’s hair to hide his grin before closing his eyes to sleep as well.

Ohno woke up alone, and for a second he was scared that Nino had already gone and he was too late. But then he could hear Nino talk to Niji in whispering voices and when he looked up, he was met with a soft smile from Nino.

“Good morning, Satoshi,” he whispered, patting Niji one last time before moving over to him to sit beside him. He traced his face with his fingertips before moving down and putting his lips against Ohno’s for a warm kiss. “How did you sleep?”

“Not too well,” Ohno said with a small sigh. Nino nodded as he kissed his forehead.

“I thought so. Me neither even if being in your arms made it all easier in the end.”

“You say the most wonderful things sometimes,” Ohno whispered with a laugh in his voice when Nino grinned slightly. “Thank you.”

Nino giggled when there was a knock at the door, and he grimaced softly. “What is it now?”

“Breakfast I believe,” Ohno said with a chuckle as he rolled around to sit up and pull the robe around himself. He pushed Nino down on the futon again and put the blanket on top of him so that he was hidden from curious eyes as he allowed the maids to enter and prepare their breakfast dishes on the table.

When they were alone again, Nino sat up and pulled his hair up into a ponytail so that it was not in his face. “Eat, and then we’ll talk, before this all starts. I need to tell you a few things before.”

“Okay,” Ohno said, sighing softly as he sat across from him. “Sounds like a plan.”

Nino smiled a bit. “Sorry, but I think waiting too long will just make us either reckless or too heavy with what will happen.”

“You’re right. I realise that I try to make this into some kind of perfect dream.”

“That’s fine and normal. I want to do that as well, but it’s a little bit hard with all this darkness pressing down on me.”

Ohno nodded as he lifted the lid from their dishes so that they could start to eat. That made sense and he knew that Nino was right.

Chapter Text

“Eat something,” Ohno reminded Nino as the other picked at the food instead of eating it. He poked him into the side when Niji thrilled unhappily. “You need the energy.”

“Yes, I’m sorry,” Nino said with a sigh. He ate a few more bites and looked at the other again.

“Come on, tell me and then maybe you can manage a few more bites of food.”

“Yes, sorry,” Nino whispered and rubbed his face. “I don’t know if I should even tell you, or If this is just cruel and in vain. But it burdens my mind.”

“And whatever burdens your mind, burdens mine. So I want to know.”

Nino smiled and took his hand to tug him closer to himself. Ohno put down the chopsticks as he followed his tug without complaint. He kissed his cheek and stared at Niji in thought.

“The king is not your father. He is your great grandfather. He is the person that has killed the first dragons and then tried to kill my family and chased them away to regain their powers.”

“But…” Ohno said with a frown. “I know he is not the youngest man, but he is in no way as old as that. And he is, always has been the same, from when I was a little boy.”

Nino’s lips twitched sadly. “Satoshi, he is what you would call a witch, the thing he told you to fear. He had made pacts with the devil. It’s all very complicated, and I’m not even sure about everything if I’m honest. There are other worlds besides ours, the dragons, the old gods, and they sealed the passage between them closed, so that we are safe from monsters like we’ve seen in the forest. The king, he wanted power he didn’t have, he ventured too deep in forbidden texts and then… Yeah, he helps them to come over and to rule them. It was slow doing, my family, even without their guardians, were the other side. I don’t understand that. My grandparents haven’t taught me, and it was not in their writings to me.”

“Morga only told me who I am, what my duty was and taught me how to achieve that. It’s not for me to question fate. That is for other scholars.”

“But my father… The king? What?”

“The king… He wants not to give up his power to ensure it… It’s too cruel for me to say, but it has lots to do with forbidden magic. With witchcraft, so you will. There are meanings to prolong a life if you want to. I’m surprised he agreed to kill you so far from here. But then again, he gets stronger each day.”

“Stronger than you?”

Nino pursed his lips and nodded slowly. “If it was only me, then yes. What he doesn’t believe in is love, help, others. I have you, and Masaki, and Niji.”

“But the pact.”

“The barrier is weak, but it’s not gone yet. The devil can’t just appear here. He can lend him strength. But that’s all.”

“That’s a relief at least. I still don’t understand fully; I have to admit.”

Nino sighed and hid his face against his shoulder. “Satoshi, your great-grandfather, the man you call father, the king. He killed your grandfather when he got a son, he killed your father, as he got you and he wanted to kill you. He has means to keep young or at least seem like it, and he has means to hide from his suspects that he is not who he seems to be. Did you never question why there is no other family member?”

“My mother died when she gave birth. It’s not uncommon,” Ohno mumbled.

“Yes,” Nino nodded, looking up. He smiled sadly as he caught the tear slipping down his cheek. “I’m sorry.”

“It’s not your fault.”

“No, it’s not. And I will make sure it won’t happen again.”

“That’s all I can ask then, honestly. You think he has…”

Nino sighed and shrugged slightly, wishing he could just say no, but he didn’t know.

“Don’t burden your mind with it. It’s not year sin to bear, I won’t let you,” Nino said as he sat up and took his head in between his hands. He closed his lips over Ohno’s, before putting his forehead against his. “And I wouldn’t be with someone living in sin, I couldn’t agree with clear conscious, and Niji would never have let me come close to you if you were at any fault, regardless of my wishes.”

Ohno breathed in deeply, but then he nodded, hugging Nino close and hiding his face. “Thank you for telling me.”

“I fear, if I kill him I might’ve hurt you in vain.”

“To know the truth is never in vain. SO I thank you for that.”

Nino moved back to look into his eyes, searching to be sure it was the truth before he smiled. “Okay.”

“Okay.” Ohno breathed in deeply. “Still you need to eat something even if my stomach has turned, I shall do the same.”

Nino nodded, looking back at the food. He sighed. They were the most exquisite meals he had ever tasted, and still, if he would be able to choose freely, he would love to be back at the inn. The food had been so much more homely than these fine dishes.

—

“Niji I will need you to be with me all times,” Nino hissed to the dragon who head-butted his side in answer. “Thank you.”

Nino looked at Ohno and squeezed his fingers. “You need to stay clear from my fight with the man. If he gets his fingers on you, he can use you against me. But…” He said when Ohno opened his mouth to argue. “I will need you to keep my back free.”

Ohno nodded with a huff. “I can do that.”

“Good. Maybe there will be people deciding to follow you, so please let them. I don’t want to count too many deaths.

“I will. Jun will be with me and bring Aiba to the tower so that he can go with you.”

“Very well,” Nino breathed as he closed his eyes again. “Then there is nothing else to talk about. Come Niji. I need to collect my thoughts and try to connect with the others.”

Niji chirped and rubbed his face against Nino’s stomach who chuckled softly.

“Down boy,” he whispered as he stroke his head. He looked up at Ohno with a little smile. “You’ll be fine. I promise you.”

“And you?”

“We’ll see,” Nino said instead of answering, before looking at Niji. It would be easier if he were able to pray frequently, but this had to do; he decided as he freed his mind and opened it as far as possible.

It took a while before Nino looked up again with a small smile. “They’re there, and that means we should start,” he decided, kissing Niji’s forehead as he sent Ohno out to get to Jun. He wouldn’t need him close to get where he was required. He put on just the outer robe of the garments he had been given by the king as not to alert everybody just now. Then Nino let Niji sling himself around his neck for protection, before leaving the chamber to stride through the hallways to where he could tell the centre of the darkness surrounding this castle lied.

A/N: I’m sorry. I’ll try to do better next time.

Chapter Text

“Are you sure about this?”

“Yes, Niji. I can’t stand this pressure around my shoulders, and it’s not as if I will get stronger the longer we wait.”

“More the opposite,” Niji agreed. “We will put our lives in your hand, little prince.”

“Don’t say that.”

“You are that, though. Stop denying it.”

Nino’s lips twitched. “It reminds me so much of Morga.”

“I know. She is proud of you.”

“You sure?”

“Yep, now silence.”

Nino rolled his eyes since they had been talking through their minds, but Niji was right. He should be concentrating on other things, even if it was really hard.

He sighed, closing his eyes to count the auras down the hall. There was the king that overpowered everything but still four more in front of the door, none in the tower itself, which was not that surprising, considering that there was no way the man could hide what was really going on up there.

“Niji can you knock them out?”

A small thrill was heard, and Nino shuddered when the dragon vanished again to slither over to them. The men fell before they could shout and alert the others, and Nino smiled when he knelt to catch Niji in his hands again.

“Thank you. I know I should probably wait for the others,” Nino moaned. “But they could not help, would they?”

Nino smiled at the unhappy look on Niji’s face. “Yes, I know they will keep my back free, but I can’t help it. If I’m swift they won’t even get into danger,” he whispered.

Niji bit his finger and Nino pursed his lips unhappily. He understood that it was risky, but still. He stood and moved Niji back to his shoulder as he walked over to the door. His hand moved over the lock, nibbling at his lower lip until he could hear it opening. He opened the door and knelt to the floor to draw a few characters on the floor to make sure that nothing evil could get out.

Nino then walked up the stairs carefully. He listened very carefully as to not miss anything from above, but all seemed to be right. He could hear movement from above and shuddered slightly when he could hear someone cry.

Nino closed his eyes and breathed in deeply as he flinched when a hand tapped his shoulder.

“Gods, Masaki,” he hissed when he saw the monk who was smiled and rubbed a spot under Nino’s eyes.

“Sorry, I didn’t want to spook you.”

“Of course,” Nino said with an eye roll. “Where are Satoshi and Jun-kun?”

“Downstairs, making sure nobody comes upstairs when we are there. Ohno-san was not that happy.”

“Figures,” Nino said with a small smile. “You are with me?”

“Yes, You can’t get me off your back. And I need you to drink this now.”

Nino eyed the small bottle warily but drank it with a slight flinch. “Happy?”

“No,” Aiba said with a frown. “But it can’t be helped, and you are not alone. I’m glad for that.”

Nino flinched again as there were sounds from above and sighed. “Let’s go up. Whatever is going on, I won’t like but still want to stop it.”

“Agreed,” Masaki mumbled and squeezed his hand.

“You are too calm,” Nino murmured.

“Meditation and I could pray.”

Nino stuck out his tongue and then took another deep breath. At least he wasn’t so nervous anymore.

—

The second door on top of the staircase opened without resistance. Nino’s eyes wandered around the big platform. It was nothing like the descriptions of his grandfather, anymore.

It was dark, the light coming from the fireplace on the far side of the wall, which also made it hard to breathe inside. Nino’s fingers closed around Masaki’s hand for a moment before he stepped inside further.

There was a big table in the middle of the room, filled with different kinds of parchment and from what Nino could decipher from where he was standing after his eyes had gotten used to the dimly lit room it spoke about how to conjure demons and open the crack further to let them wander the world.

His eyes wandered above where usually two big openings would bring in light and make a landing place for the dragons. It was closed off now, and the glass darkened if by colour or magic Nino couldn’t tell for sure.

Masaki’s breath hitched beside him as he tugged his wrist and Nino looked into the direction, his eyes landing on the man, who had brought so much misery onto these lands so far.

Nino felt like throwing up when he finally understood the cries he had heard on the stairs. An old man - clearly the best years were already over for him - was bent over a naked girl, Nino was almost sure was younger than he was.

There was a slap resounding in the chamber, and the woman, girl, child(?) stopped crying, her breath hitching. “Stop it, you should be proud, carrying the next in line,” he hissed.

Nino looked at Masaki motioning for him that he needed to take the girl away. Masaki looked like he wanted to argue, but Nino shot him a warning glance. Masaki could come back when she was safe.

He closed his eyes for a second, to concentrate and put the papers into flames with a snap of his fingers while shoving Masaki down so that he wouldn’t be seen.

The man turned around in anger and confusion for a moment, until his eyes fell on Nino. There was confusion in his eyes for just a few seconds before realisation came over them.

“Why, why… My useless heir brought me someone precious.”

“I came on my own will.”

“I’m surprised you managed to fool me, princeling.”

Nino smirked walking slowly around so that the back of the king was to the door where Aiba slowly managed to lure the girl through. “Maybe you are just getting old.”

The king clicked his tongue. “Not when I finished with you lot.”

—

Nino swore as he was pushed against the wall and his shoulder hit the hard concrete painfully. He held his shoulder and pressed his eyes close to fighting through the pain.

Nino hissed slightly as his eyes wandered through the room. At least it was empty now, he thought, his fingers pressing into his skin. A shudder went over his back as he remembered the child in here as they had just entered. He didn’t know what she had seen and lived through so far, but it had to be awful. For once, Nino was happy that Aiba was with him as the other was able to lead them out as soon as Nino and Niji managed to get the attention of the king.

“Niji,” he hissed at the dragon who was pressed around his neck. “As much as I’m happy for you to strengthen my magic, I need you to destroy those glass barriers so that I’m stronger. My staff would help me a lot,” he groaned as he dodged another attack.

“This glass is unbreakable. So your little plan would never work,” the man said, and Nino glared at him.

“Nothing is unbreakable,” Nino replied and nudged the dragon again. Niji was not happy but did as he was told. Nino groaned as he squatted low not to get hit by a burst of heat.

“Weakling, just running away. Just like your great-grandfather. You all are nothing without your tiny dragons.”

Nino clicked his tongue as he tried to ignore the man. The man was right. He needed to get it together, or he would be of no help. But still, he was shaken by what he had seen, and it had made him lose his focus. He groaned when the sleeve of his robe tangled with the leg of a chair.

God, this was stupid!

“I should leave you here for my guards. You are not even worth my time and energy. But like with that stupid heir of mine, it’s better to do things myself. The men are too weak.”

“Or maybe you are,” Nino said with a shake of his head, standing up. His eyes found Niji at the darkened windows. “Shows with how you have closed off the room so that the Gods of old can’t enter anymore,” he grumbled as he took off the outer robe, stretching out as he finally was in just his standard robes again. He felt much more comfortable this way.

“Let’s say my allies like it dark,” the king said with a smile, and Nino shuddered at the look on his face.

Nino moved his hand, whispering an incantation. His eyes were set on the face of the king as he carefully dodged the attacks. He knew breaking those windows would cost him a great deal of energy, but the sun would also help him a lot, and considering at how much the king wanted him not to do it, it might weaken the other a great deal, or it was just all a stupid rouse for him.

“Such a weak little princeling, still too scared to attack. I will not only kill you and that useless heir of mine, but I will also be so kind and let you watch how I kill the bastard nestling inside you.”

Nino stopped in his track at those words, his eyes widening and mouth dropping open. “What?”

The king smirked at his reaction, circling him slowly. “Ah, the little prince doesn’t even know his own body.”

Nino wanted to say something, but he was at a loss of what this meant. He frowned, searching for Niji’s form as if the dragon had all the answers for him, but before he could even form the words, there was a hard body colliding with his.

“Kazu, watch out!” Aiba’s voice shouted in his ear, and Nino’s eyes blinked to focus at the smoke where he had stood just seconds before.

“Masaki, what?”

“Now is not exactly the right time for explanations, alright? We are in a bit of a pinch downstairs.”

“Oh, how I will enjoy to take in all of your powers as to be never defeated again. Your kind is so pitiful as is the belief in your silly Gods.”

Nino’s eyes hardened at the words. He closed his eyes for a second, breathing in deeply as he concentrated. He could hear the clanging of metal against metal. The knowledge of a fight going on there and knowing that Ohno and Jun were there, putting their lives in danger, worried him. What if his idea was the wrong one and would put them into danger even more? His fingers wandered to his stomach, still not believing what he had heard.

Trust in yourself, little prince.

Nino blinked as he was sure that he heard Morga’s voice and felt a new surge of energy inside of himself. Right, he had always learnt to believe in himself and not worry about the rest.

“Niji, now!” he shouted in their minds, lifting both hands, using one to shoot a weaker blast into the direction of the king, before moving fast and sending all of the energy he could manage for now to Nino to help him shatter the windows.

The light came in, and Nino let his head fall back to look out, he frowned when he saw monsters crawling over the roof, trying to get in. Not the best sight, but at least he knew what he was dealing with now. etHe ignored the laughter of the man, feeling his skin prickle under the warm sun as he called the other dragons to help him. He smiled the second when he heard the answering thrill and lifted his hand to allow Niji to come down and wind over his arm and shoulder. The warmth was pulsing through Nino as he opened his eyes again. Heat flared from his mark, and he took a deep breath.

“You were wrong, you know? I’m no prince. I’m the son of the dragons, and since I’m the only surviving heir, I’m now the rightful king,” he whispered, smiling when he stood directly under the sunbeam.

“And they have accepted me. The mother raised me, and she gifts me with the light and power I need to defeat you.” His fingers twitched, and a small smile appeared on his face when his beloved training naginata appeared in his hands, reflecting the sun. He knew his magic could only help him to distract but not to defeat. His magic was not meant to kill, but to protect and create.

He took another deep breath, freeing his mind from all the confusion and thoughts for now and giving his body into the training he had received from Morga.

Chapter Text

A shudder went through Nino’s whole body as he felt the blade of his naginata going through the neck his opponent. He fell to his knees, trying to catch his breath as he pressed his eyes to close. His hands were shaking as he pushed them flat against the cool wood under them.

It was finally over, he thought as Niji appeared beside him and he pressed his face against his neck, feeling tears in his eyes.

Niji nudged his shoulder carefully, and Nino groaned as he rolled to his side, his eyes opening again as he leant against his beloved friend and stared at the man that he had fought against just seconds before. There was really no life in the body anymore, and Nino was glad for it. He turned his head to the sky, seeing that the sun was setting and blinked. He hadn’t realised how much time had gone by. And he was honestly a bit confused as to why nobody was with him yet.

He tried to listen to any sounds of fighting from below, but there was nothing, and for a moment, he felt dread settling in his stomach. “Niji help me up.”

Niji whined in an answer, but Nino tried shakily to get to his feet, he needed to check that everything was okay and help his friends. God, how stupid had he been?

He grabbed the naginata as tightly and secured as he managed as he made his way to the door. Nino flinched back when a radiant barrier hindered him at opening the door, and he stumbled back with a small hiss, falling against Niji.

Niji caught him before tugging at his sleeve until Nino was seated on the floor. “What is wrong with you?” Nino asked with a little hiss as Niji disappeared shortly after from his side. Nino stared at Niji who sat across from him on the platform and opened his mouth as to demand another answer when he bit his lips as another great dragon settled on the platform.

Nino lost his breath for a second as he stared at Kuu. Where Morga was the great mother of all and gifted the world with life like the sun Kuu was the moon. He was there to witness the deaths and everything that came out when darkness fell.

Nino had heard stories, he had seen pictures but never met him even if the voice of Morga had always sounded fond whenever she talked about him. He knew others feared him. Nino forced himself to take a breath and got to his knees. He lowered his head to the floor and licked his suddenly parched lips.

“Kuu,” he whispered. “It’s an honour.” He frowned a bit as he had problems to come up with the right words and gave up after a few seconds. His mind wandering to his friends when he heard the warning thrill of Niji in his head. Right, this was not a time to let his mind wander.

“Lift your head, little king.”

Nino looked up and met the wise eyes of the dragon. “I’m no king, but your servant,” he whispered.

Kuu snorted a laugh and Nino felt himself relax just slightly. “Modest, I see. Morga taught you well, indeed. But it’s as I say. You were the little prince, fulfilled your duty and beaten the sorcerer. Now it’s your right to be the king, son of our kind.”

Nino ducked his head, embarrassed. His heart was aching for the old dragon that had meant so much to him. His eyes wandered again to the man, and he felt bile rising in him when empty eyes met his. He still hasn’t wrapped his mind entirely around the fact that he had killed a man. The only peace for his mind was, that all that had been left was a shell of a former man and that he had done it to free the being that was important to him.

He still was not sure if he could really be the person they wanted him to be. To be called king… He didn’t think he had done anything to earn that title.

“Oh but you are if we see you fit,” Kuu said into his thoughts, and he blinked as he stared at the dragon.

“See me fit?”

“Yes, little king. We must know you won’t use the power gifted to you for horrendous things.”

“My life is in your hands,” Nino whispered as he bowed his head low. “It has been right from the moment I was born.”

“What if we demand the lives of your loved ones?” Kuu asked.

Nino stared at him for a moment before he looked down at his hands, thinking about the question. “I can’t give you what doesn’t belong to me,” he said in the end. “They are their persons, but I would trust your judgements. I would trust that they were just and reasonable,” he said in the end—his hand twisting his robe at his stomach unconsciously.

“The unborn life?”

“I would raise them in your ways, as I have been,” he said a bit firmer. He knew that the chances were high that the life nestling inside him was the same as him and therefore in need to understand their heritage.

The dragon hummed and it was a loud rumbling sound that shook Nino to the depth of his soul, but he didn’t say anything more. Nino’s eyes wandered back to the door, and he bit his lower lip.

“May I ask something?”

“Yes, little king.”

“Is the battle really over? Is the gap closed?”

“The battle is over. The gap is not yet fully closed, and we will demand your help if the need arises.”

“I understand,” Nino whispered after a moment. “What is with the others?”

“Aren’t you tired, little king?”

Nino stared at the dragon and nodded after a moment. He was tired, but there was no way his mind could rest as long as he didn’t know what happened to the rest. “Were there many deaths?”

“Yes,” Kuu answered. Nino wanted to say something else when suddenly someone banged at the door. He flinched and stared wide-eyed at the great dragon who met his eyes with amusement.

“Little king, this will be your test: You are not to tell your lover about the life within yourself before the moon is full once again, and you are not allowed to intervene with your powers if you do so. I will take them from you and take the life inside of you.”

Nino flinched and pressed his hands against his stomach. Not telling Ohno was hard, but if that meant he would earn the trust of the dragons he could promise that. “What do you mean not intervene?”

“You’ll see,” Kuu said and bowed his head.

“Again, thank you, little king, for your help. One last duty before you can rest: You need to burn this sorcerer.”

Nino nodded and lifted his hand, and he whispered the enchantment to let flames appear on his palm and frowned when he realised how weak they were. He took a deep breath, trying to put in more power as he moved his fingers to engulf the man in the fire of the dragons. As soon as he managed Kuu vanished, and the door sprang open.

Aiba almost fell inside as the resistance was gone and blinked before his eyes fell on Nino. “Kazu. Are you okay?”

“Weak,” Nino murmured, opening his arms for his friend to hug him. “But he is dead.”

“You did great, Kazu. I’m proud of you,” Masaki whispered and caressed his hair for a moment.

“Where are the others?”

Aiba bit his lip and lifted Nino’s chin with loving fingers. “You need to stay calm.”

“I am calm,” Nino said through clenched teeth. “But I would rather prefer you to tell me now. Niji won’t say a thing, Kuu won’t say a thing and now you. Is he dead?” Nino asked, fear clinging to his heart, making him sick to the stomach. If so, why would Kuu tell him not to tell Ohno about the pregnancy? That wouldn’t make sense.

“No… But,” Aiba closed his eyes and sighed. “I don’t know for how long he will still cling to life. He was badly wounded.”

Nino’s eyes widened, and a hiss escaped his lips. “No,” he stuttered, clinging to the other. “You can help him, right?”

“I don’t know if my knowledge is enough, Nino. That’s why you need to come with me and help.”

“I can’t.”

“What do you mean? I have a potion to strengthen you. You will need to take it anyway to make sure this one is taken care of,” Aiba said, pressing the palm of his hand to Nino’s stomach. “You understand the gift they gave you, right?”

Nino nodded, tears clinging to his eyelashes as he stared at Aiba. “You need to help him, you hear? I can’t. I’m not allowed to intervene, or I need to sacrifice this innocent life. I can’t take an innocent life, or I will be chastised, even more, Masaki. I…” A sob escaped Nino as he pressed his face against Aiba’s shoulder who hugged him tightly.

Masaki bit his lips and hugged him close. “He’ll be fine,” he promised and steadied himself to carry Nino. “But you need to leave. Niji can you help?”

Niji thrilled and rubbed his nose against Nino’s limp hand. Nino looked down at him with tired eyes. “Will he live Niji?”

“The elders will decide the sacrifice. I’m not in the right to know their decisions.”

Nino frowned and pressed against Masaki as the other put him on Niji so that he could be carried by his dragon, down the stairs through the halls to a little chamber where Ohno lied with Jun by his side. Nino bit his lips as he saw the bad deep wounds that soaked the bandages even now and closed his eyes tiredly as he was too much reminded of the scars Ohno had from when they first met. The ones he had healed because even then Nino had been sure that Ohno wouldn’t have survived them.

“Please protect him,” Nino whispered in a prayer as he allowed himself to succumb to his pain and exhaustion.

Chapter Text

Nino woke to a cloth to his forehead and groaned slightly against the light in the room. He sighed as he closed his eyes again for a second to get his bearings. Everything came back to him very slowly, and when he opened his eyes again, he was met by a worried-looking Aiba.

Aiba helped him up and put a cup of a warm liquid in his hands. “Drink this, and then I’ll answer any questions you have.”

Nino wrinkled his nose since he thought there were more important things than a drink, but Aiba was persistent, and his eyes wandered to his stomach. Nino remembered he was with a child and supposed that the drink was mostly because of that. He sighed and then took a small sip to see how much of it he could stomach and that it was not too hot, before finishing it soon after.

Aiba smiled and patted his head in praise as he retook the cup and put it away. Nino’s eyes wandered around the room but realised soon that a curtain blocked his sight on one side and Aiba on the other side.

“How long have I been out?” Nino asked as he felt able to do so. He cleared his throat frowning as he tried to evaluate how wounded his body was, but it was as if he lost any contact to it, so he gave up pretty soon. That would probably work later again.

“For two days,” Aiba said with a sigh. “I was worried you didn’t get enough nutrients, but Niji was all calm, so I thought it was still fine.”

“Where is Niji?”

“With Ohno. You asked the dragons to protect them, and he does.”

Nino blinked in surprise. Usually, Niji wouldn’t listen to his demands that easily. Especially if that meant he needed to leave Nino alone. “Why?”

“Because the dragons accepted you fully now. You do remember that you killed the sorcerer, right?”

“Uhn,” Nino nodded with a sigh. “And I remember Kuu telling me that I can’t intervene in the healing process of Satoshi, nor tell him about the child. I was not yet crowned, though.”

“Exactly and you won’t until we know what happened to Ohno,” Aiba explained with a sigh, as he met Nino’s fearful eyes. “He is not yet dead.”

“But?”

“He hasn’t woken up yet as well,” Aiba said with a sigh. “We are forcing liquids down his throat and have treated his wounds. They are not inflamed and stopped bleeding. We were a bit more concerned because the wounds always opened when we changed his bandages. That stopped this morning. We are still waiting for him to wake up, though.”

Nino frowned and sighed as he pulled the legs closer to his body to hug them. “I want to help.”

“You need to focus on yourself right now,” Aiba reminded him.

Nino sighed and nodded. “I feel as if this body does not belong to me.”

“You are sharing it right now with another being, Nino. That is completely normal. You buried all strange feelings inside your body with your worry about this fight. Now that is over, and you were deep asleep, so it’s normal that the shift in hormones inside of you surprises you.”

“But it’s alright?”

“Yes, you are alright. I will ask for them to prepare you some food and ginger water if you upset your stomach. Are you feeling ill or anything?”

“No, just as if I’m not really here. I’m tired.”

“Then you should sleep a little bit more. I will go and tell the others you are alright,” Aiba promised and cupped his cheek for a moment, before sighing and helping him to lie down and put the blanket back over him. “Rest well, my dear friend.”

“Thank you, Masaki.”

—

The next time Nino awoke, he felt a bit more present. He still felt a little bit off, but it was way better than the first time he woke up.

He sat up carefully, smiling when Niji rolled down from his legs and thrilled as he looked up at him.

“Hey Niji, are you looking after me now? I thought you were with Satoshi?”

Niji purred a bit insulted, and he moved to tug Niji close and hug him. “Are you hurt, Niji? I know that I didn’t take good care of you while we were fighting.”

Niji rubbed his face against his hands, making Nino giggle when Niji blew hot air against his stomach, before explaining that he was okay and that he wasn’t hurt too badly.

He talked silently with Niji for a while longer until the curtain opened again and Aiba stepped into his part of the room. Nino supposed that Ohno was on the other side of the curtain, but he was not sure if he wanted to know just yet.

“How are you feeling now, Nino?” Aiba asked as he petted Niji, who pressed his head against the hand of his friend. “We chased Niji out as he was getting fussy and we needed to check on Ohno.”

“How is he?”

Aiba’s face clouded over a bit and then sighed. “No change just yet. I will call for your food. I think Niji would feel more comfortable to stay here for a bit.”

“Of course,” Nino whispered when Niji thrilled slightly sadly at the prospect of maybe being sent away again. “We will eat something together, right, Niji?”

Aiba chuckled and nodded as he vanished again, after pointing at the small table close to Nino, telling him to finish the drink. Nino wrinkled his nose, but then he did as he was told. “Masaki is a meanie, right Niji?”

Niji growled slightly at his words, making Nino laugh slightly. “Yeah I know, he only wants the best. I’m glad he is here. He’s the best for Satoshi right now.”

Nino grimaced and hugged Niji close again, and he hoped that Ohno would wake soon, he was so worried about him. “I’m allowed to see him at least, right, Niji?” he asked as he buried his head against the skin of his dragon.

They ate together, and then Niji vanished again to go to Ohno while Aiba told him that for tonight Nino should stay where he was right now, so he agreed with a heavy heart.

—

“Little prince,” Morga greeted him in his dreams, and he looked around curiously. He was back in the forest at the grand tree. He stepped closer to it and put his hand again the bark of the old tree. He missed the ancient dragon.

“Morga,” he whispered. “Did I fail you?”

“Never, my little prince. You’ve grown so much, and I feel so sorry for all the things you had to be put through to bring peace to this world.”

“I did what my duty was, and I found love on the way…” Nino’s voice broke, and he bowed his head.

“What is it, little prince?”

“Kuu told me to have faith. I always thought I have faith, but it is hard to sit back and do nothing when I know I could do something. You gave me the gift to help people.”

“Oh, little prince, it is normal to question your beliefs. Please don’t fear that this will make you a bad person.”

“I do believe that you will always decide the best for the people around me and me. It’s just…”

“That you are scared. It’s something you have no say in, for the first time in a long while.”

Nino smiled sadly. “I’m not good at waiting; it seems.”

“No, you are not, little prince. You never were.”

Nino sighed and put a hand on his stomach. “But I thank you for the gift you bestowed upon me. This miracle is growing inside of me.”

He knew Morga was smiling down at him, and he couldn’t help but feel happy for her. He knew she was not in this world anymore, and he didn’t know exactly how it worked that she could communicate through his dreams, but he was glad for it.

“Morga, why am I here?”

“I wanted to congratulate you, little prince. You did so well, you grew so much, and I’m a very proud dragon to see that.”

“I was too late for you, though.”

“I was already old, ancient one might say. It was time for me to go, and please don’t grieve because of it. I’m not fully gone for as long as people still believe in me.”

“I will never forget you.”

“I know, little prince. But I want you to stop dwelling on the past, promise me.”

“I will when I know that Satoshi is fine. I believe that you won’t let him die, because you are not cruel. You love all of your creations, and Satoshi is not at fault for the doings of his father.”

“That is true. He is an innocent child, thrown into a cruel world, and he didn’t want to take part in until he met you.”

“But then it was to protect Niji and me.”

“So it was. Little prince, be strong, have faith, and everything will go as it must be.”

Nino nodded and stroked his stomach. “Will the child in me be fine?”

“The child will grow as strong as his father, little prince.”

A smile blossomed on his face as he nodded and closed his eyes. He put his forehead against the tree and sighed. “Thank you, Morga. I want to make this world a better place and follow your teachings.”

“I know, little prince. There is no way you’ll be able to disappoint me. Now rest. You need your strength.”

The world around them fell away, and Nino found himself in the nest he had spent his youth to lie down and rest. He was sure the world would be a better place when he woke up the next morning. It had to be.

Chapter Text

Nino sat on the side of Ohno’s bed, holding his hand and rubbing the back of it with his thumb as he stared down at the other.

He sighed and pressed his lips against the palm before putting it down again. He still didn’t know what to do to help Ohno. He was praying almost every night now up in the tower, staring at the moon, and hoping for the best. His fingertips ran over his stomach, and he frowned slightly.

There was no movement, of course not. Nino wasn’t fully knowledgeable about pregnancy, but he knew that it took ten moons for them to grow fully and be ready to be born. Something Nino wasn’t sure how that would happen to him.

“You need to be strong,” he whispered to Ohno and caressed his cheek, smoothing down the small frown on his forehead before standing and taking the wet cloth from the side to run it over his sweaty face. “I know that you are fighting this, my lord, and I know you can win over it,” he added.

He looked up when the door opened before his eyes fell to the side when he saw Jun stepping inside. The guard greeted him in a gruff voice as he looked at Ohno to make sure he was still alive. When he had been awake, he could hear Jun hissing and swearing at Aiba why he wouldn’t heal Ohno and deep in his heart Nino wished he could.

Aiba had explained that he wasn’t allowed to intervene, but Jun had been stubborn and not understanding. He didn’t care for Gods and faith if that meant that Ohno was dying. And Nino couldn’t explain that the probability was high that the dragons would kill Satoshi if he healed him mostly because he didn’t know if that was true.

He knew that Kuu told him that he would take away what was gifted to him, but he wasn’t sure if that meant, killing Ohno as well, but there was no way he wanted to risk it. Nino stepped back to give Jun the space to check on Ohno himself, and after a while, Jun left with a sigh and without another word.

Nino flinched and just hoped that they would somehow rebound when Ohno woke up again. “You are keeping us waiting, my lo… love,” he whispered, feeling his cheeks heat up at the endearment. He had played with the word around in his head, and it had slipped out already a few times. Nino always was embarrassed about it, and he didn’t know if he wanted Ohno to hear that or not.

He sighed and rubbed his stomach again, feeling slightly ill all of a sudden and groaned as he stood to throw up. Just a few weeks old and it was already taking its toll on his body, Nino thought grimly. He wasn’t looking forward to all the other things that might happen. And he probably really should read the books that Aiba had brought him with a smirk one evening.

—

Nino stepped down the stairs from the tower that night, feeling slightly dizzy from the long time he had spent crouched on the floor under the full moon. His heart felt heavy as he held to the railing to not stumble down the stairs, and he looked at his feet, taking one step after the other. His free hand laid on his stomach that was finally slightly rounded, and he sighed as the hand fell away again.

One month and Ohno was still asleep. The wounds had closed for the most part and thanks to Aiba’s excellent care, there had been no further infections that would have threatened Ohno’s life more than the wounds themselves. Now all that was left would be for him to wake up, but it didn’t seem as if Ohno wanted to.

That scared him, honestly. He wasn’t sure how long people could stay asleep as Ohno did, but he was convinced that it wasn’t a good sign. At least Aiba’s positive demeanour seemed to shrink each day there was no chance. Niji was still calm though, so Nino believed that the dragons were always looking after his lover. He almost stumbled into Aiba’s arms as he opened the doors and found his friend standing there with a worried look on his face.

“Is everything okay with Satoshi?” he asked almost breathless as he allowed Aiba to put his arm around his hips as he led him back to their chamber.

“He is like the last few days. You, on the other hand…”

“I’m fine,” Nino mumbled as he waved his hand with a sigh.

“You were up there for long.”

“It’s the full moon. Prayers take longer for these days,” Nino said with a small sigh. “And a few days from today, when the sun is the highest the dragons will crown me all officially.”

“Nervous?”

“A bit. Until now, nothing much was there to do. Jun had guards checked, changed the people working in the castle to make sure they are loyal to Satoshi. The people have seen the dragons, the darkness has lifted it seems… I don’t know.”

“People are still insecure about the changes. But the temples were ready for this day and prepared them,” Aiba explained and Nino hummed in understanding. “There are always ways to keep old knowledge alive without getting the attention of the ones who want to suppress them.”

“Ah,” Nino said in understanding and stopped in front of the door. He bit his lips and pressed his hand against his stomach. “Today…”

“What is it, Kazu?”

“I would be allowed to tell Satoshi about the child finally, but he is still asleep. I want to… I…” Nino stopped and hid his face behind a hand for a moment to calm down. “I want to share it all with Satoshi, see the happiness in his eyes when he hears about it. Do you think he would be happy, Masaki? Or would he think I’m an abomination?”

“He would be delighted,” Aiba said, hugging him for a second one-handed. “But you shouldn’t worry about that right now. You should find some rest for the night. And you still can tell him even if he is asleep. I’m sure he listens to your voice.”

Nino smiled slightly at the words and then took a deep breath before closing his eyes to steel himself before stepping inside and saying goodnight to Aiba.

Nino stared long and hard at the bed that he had already moved closer to Ohno’s bed and that he was supposed to rest upon but when he shrugged out of his robe and put on a much lighter one his eyes fell on Ohno and without a second thought he slipped under the covers beside Ohno, pressing his body against Ohno’s.

He kissed his lips and put his head on his shoulder, listening silently to the even breaths and calm heartbeats he could feel under his hand.

“You really need to wake up. I fear the nights because I fear to wake up and realise your breath has gone and your body has gone cold,” he whispered.

“I miss your strong warm arms around my body, holding me close and making me feel safe. It hurts to think the few months we spent together until now were the only ones we had. And I fear to be alone when the miracle inside of me wants to see the world for the first time.”

He sighed and caressed his side with just his fingertips before kissing him again. “Wake up soon, my love. I need you to be with me to feel whole.”

—

Nino woke the next morning to the feeling of something or someone caressing the skin of his bare shoulder from where his robe had slipped down to reveal the skin underneath. He grumbled slightly, still half asleep and tried to form words to scold Aiba for doing such silly things, when suddenly his eyes flew open.

Aiba was kind, Aiba was warm, but he would never touch him like that without permission. He knew it was too intimate for Nino to feel comfortable, and only Ohno was allowed to do so.

He sat up with wide eyes staring at the other man beside him. Ohno’s eyes were twinkling in the early morning sun; his lips were slightly opened as he watched him for a moment.

Nino’s eyes wandered over the face of the other in silent wonder. He still couldn’t believe that this was true and that Ohno was awake and staring at him.

He felt tears pooling at the side of his eyes, too scared to move or say anything as not to wake up and realising that this was just a cruel dream. His breath hitched when Ohno moved his hand to cup his cheek, his thumb touching the corner of his eye and catching the tear clinging there before it could fall.

“Shh… It’s okay,” Ohno whispered, and Nino knew this had to be true. Ohno’s hand against his cheek, their skin touching had to be true. The warmth was real, and their touch had to be real as well.

“You’re awake,” he whispered, falling on him, ignoring the small sound of discomfort as he winded Ohno and pressing his face against his neck, crying silently. “You’re finally awake.”

Ohno chuckled softly as his arms closed around his shaking body. “Yes, I’m sorry to have kept you waiting, my love,” he whispered and caressed his back in gentle, long strokes until he finally calmed down on top of him again.

Nino just stayed where he was when he had calmed down, following the fingers against his chin as Ohno lifted them to close their lips to a soft loving kiss. He knew he had to tell Ohno so much and call the others, but for now, he just wanted to enjoy this.

Chapter Text

Nino sat by the side of the bed on top of his hands as to not hiss at the people surrounding Ohno right now and checking on him, making sure he was okay and that he was really alive. He wanted to throw them all out, and be alone with Ohno again, but he knew that the others had been just as worried, if not more.

It felt like hours until Aiba and Jun were content with all the hovering they did and then a bit longer until the food that Aiba had ordered for them arrived. He sighed softly as the door closed behind the maid with a soft click and felt himself blushing when Ohno’s fond eyes landed on his form.

“You look exhausted. Are you okay, Kazu?”

“Yes, I just didn’t sleep well when you are unconscious. I was worried, you know?”

“I know, and I’m sorry for that, but it was not my fault.”

Nino smiled and nodded with a hum. “No, I suppose it was not,” he agreed in a soft voice.

Ohno chuckled and held out his hand for him, which he took and climbed on the bed beside him without any resistance. He kissed his fingers and then leant against Ohno. “What was it like? Do you have any idea how much time went by?”

“Around a month,” Ohno agreed. “It was bizarre. I have no idea what you did, but somehow the dragons allowed me peaks into the life around the castle, how the people were, and they told me a lot of history I didn’t know about.”

“Why me?”

“I don’t know,” Ohno said with a chuckle at the pout. “But I missed seeing you.”

“You could remember me then?” Nino asked curiously, and Ohno moved his head from side to side as he thought the question over.

“No, but something was missing that I knew of. And then I remembered you, and when I woke up, you were there, and everything fell into place.”

Nino smiled shyly and snuggled closer as he looked at Niji who was getting ready to leave as well. “Niji protected you. I told him to do so.”

“He’s a good dragon,” Ohno agreed, grinning when Niji thrilled a bit and growled at him. “Even if he doesn’t seem to like me that much.”

Nino giggled and nodded. Niji always behaved strangely around Ohno. He hugged the dragon and kissed his head. “But he won’t hurt you. Now go you, I know you want to hunt and just stayed here because of my demand. Join the others, alright?”

He giggled when Niji exclaimed in joy and stroke its snout again before letting him go. He sighed and leant back against Ohno fora moment.

“Do you need to rest?”

Ohno shook his head and played with his hair. “No, I feel fine. A bit famished, though. How about you?”

Nino wrinkled his nose for a moment at the thought of food, but then he nodded, knowing that food might help his slight nauseous feeling and he knew that Aiba would have made sure that there were things his stomach could hold.

“Satoshi?” he whispered as Ohno pulled the tray closer onto the bed. Ohno tilted his head and offered him the food to chose too. He smiled and took the water infused with ginger in his hands.

“What is wrong?” Ohno asked after a moment of silence.

Nino shook his head and smiled. “Nothing important. Eat first, and then we can talk a bit more.”

“Are you sure?”

Nino snuggled closer as he took some of the berries on the tray and nodded. He wanted to enjoy their time a bit more until he told Ohno what was wrong with him. If Ohno found him to be too strange to be with anymore, he could at least soak up his love for as long as their lunch would take.

—

“How about we go for a walk?” Ohno asked as he finished his meal and Nino frowned as he watched him. His eyes wandered over his body, the wounds had closed, and the only things reminding him about the bad injuries were scars scattered over Ohno’s body.

“Are you sure you’ll be able to?”

“Yes, I feel perfectly fine.”

Nino shook his head but then agreed after a while. Everything Ohno wanted, for now, he thought with a smile.

“Okay, but if you feel tired, you tell me, and we go back.”

“Same goes for you. You still look pale,” Ohno mumbled with a worried frown and Nino chuckled.

“I’m fine. As I said little sleep the last few nights.”

“Do you want to stay in and rest? A nap might do you some good.”

Nino watched him for a moment, but then he shook his head as he felt his stomach turn slightly. He was nervous, which was stupid, he knew, but he couldn’t help himself. “No, a walk will be better. I haven’t been out a lot,” he admitted with a blush as he looked at his hands.

Ohno clicked his tongue and then moved forwards to tilt his head upward to press a kiss against the soft lips. “Stupid,” he scolded lightly. “Haven’t you told me that you need nature to live?”

Nino blushed a bit more as he nodded. Ohno was right, he was behaving silly, but his head had been somewhere else that last month, and he somehow felt like a stranger in the palace without Ohno by his side, so he often either hid inside these chambers or on top of the tower. Ohno smiled as he kissed his forehead again and then stood to ask the servants outside to bring them warm water and new robes so that they could change.

Nino carefully rubbed his stomach to calm it down from slight nausea he felt because of the earlier meal and then grinned when Ohno turned around to him with a smile. “Do they still think you’re my mistress?” he asked with a clear tease in his voice and Nino couldn’t help the laugh breaking through.

“Some might,” he agreed. Most people knew of course, what had happened, and who he was, but those were only the people tending to them as Nino still hadn’t made an announcement, neither have Jun or Aiba clarified anything. Aiba to make sure he has as much rest as needed and Jun because he had wanted to make sure that it was safe and any traitors would be put away first.

Ohno chuckled as he took his hands in his own to tug him to his feet when the warm water was brought in his mind, suddenly wandering to another thing he wanted to do. Even more than go for a walk. He watched the still tired looking Nino on the bed and smiled softly. “Allow me to wash your hair? I think I would enjoy that even more than a meagre walk.”

“Your wish is my command, my lord,” Nino agreed, smiling as Ohno kissed him deeply again. He sighed into the kiss, not caring what people saw or thought about them, as he pressed his body against Ohno’s body. Ohno was the father of his child, and as long as Ohno would allow him, he would do anything for him to make him smile down at him.

Nino sighed as he allowed his body to sink into the tub with Ohno situated behind him on a small stool. Ohno’s fingers were warm on his shoulders as they wandered over his naked skin for a bit until they tangled into his hair. “I missed this,” Ohno hummed as he parted his hair with his fingers and combed them that way for a bit.

“It’s strange,” Nino hummed after a while, looking slightly over his shoulder to meet Ohno’s confused eyes. “You sound as if you used to do it all the time, even if you didn’t.”

“Oh, but I did,” Ohno said with a small chuckle. “In my mind, I was allowed to touch you this way since we met.”

“You are a strange person, my lord,” Nino decided with a small hum, closing his eyes as Ohno started to massage his head. He hid a smile behind his knees and decided that it felt as if Ohno had done this all the time, even if he knew that was not true.

Ohno chuckled as he moved closer to kiss the spot under his ear. “Just for you,” he whispered against the skin, enjoying the small shudder that ran over Nino’s body before he continued to wash him. It felt way too long since he had been allowed to touch Nino that way.

“Tell me how the month had been for you, and about the fight,” he asked as he started to massage oil that smelled of flowers into his hair to make it even more smooth.

Nino sighed and closed his eyes as he thought the question over. “I killed the king with the naginata gifted by Morga, my magic was not very helpful since he was stronger than mine,” he mumbled. “Or more like… He seemed to absorb it? I can’t explain it well. I might have used too much to break through the ceiling to make the dragons stronger. But Morga had always made sure I know how to fight in combat, that helped. I was exhausted when it was over, Niji was by my side, and then Masaki appeared to tell me I needed to help you. That you were badly injured, but…” He shivered slightly at the memory of all the blood on Ohno’s body. It still was an awful picture in his mind, even if he knew that Ohno was alright, alive and with him.

“But?”

“Kuu had forbidden me,” he whispered. “I wasn’t allowed to help, or he would take all away again. He told me to trust into the dragons, into you. It was hard.”

“But you did it,” Ohno whispered.

Nino nodded in silence, hugging his legs closer to himself as he felt tears in his eyes. He hid his face to hide those silly tears. He was so stupid. “I’m sorry,” he whispered, brokenly. “It could’ve meant your death, and I just didn’t intervene.”

“Hey, Kazu,” Ohno whispered, stopping what he was doing in surprise and shock as he realised that Nino was sobbing suddenly. “Hey, my love, listen to me. Don’t cry. You did so well. You have been so strong. There is no need to apologise.”

“Your death would have been my fault. I could’ve ignored his warning and helped you.”

“No, you couldn’t, Kazu. You know that the Gods gifted you with your powers. I’m sure if you have used them to heal me, they would’ve taken them from you, and everything would have been back to the start and even worse.”

“We don’t know that. Maybe they wouldn’t have done that,” Nino whispered, pressing his fist against his stomach. “Maybe they would’ve let you live and then it would’ve been my fault.”

“Maybe and ifs don’t matter anymore,” Ohno mumbled, taking him in his arms and rocking him from side to side in his arms, as Nino grabbed his arms tightly to hide his face. “You trusted into the goodness of your Gods, and that was the right thing to do. Don’t ponder over it anymore,” he whispered, kissing his temple.

“I was so scared I’ll lose you,” Nino admitted. “I was not as strong as I should’ve been… I questioned it all.”

“And I think that was part of your trial, my love.” Ohno held his chin softly to force his eyes to meet his. “I don’t know it all, Kazunari, but I’m sure that they wanted to test your patience, your beliefs and if in the end, you would intervene or still trust in them. You trusted in them, it might not have been easy, but things normally aren’t meant to be. So don’t fret, okay? It all went well, and that is all that matters now.”

Nino sniffed slightly and stared at him as he nodded. “You aren’t mad that…”

Ohno closed his lips on top of Nino’s mouth before he could even finish the hurtful words as he caressed his cheek and shook his head, pressing his forehead against Nino’s to smile at him. “No, I’m proud of you. You did so well, my love.”

Nino closed his eyes and let those words be the balm on his soul and heart that he needed so dearly. He sighed and kissed the side of his lips.

“I have something to tell you,” he whispered. “And I’m a bit nervous about it.”

“What is it?” Ohno asked with a smile. “There is nothing that you need to be nervous about when it comes to me.”

“It might make you think I’m strange, or not normal.”

“Whatever that norm is you are talking about. And haven’t we established that I am the strange one here? There is nothing that could be more shocking to me than what already happened since I met you, my little witch.”

Nino giggled slightly as Ohno’s fingers wandered down his naked back to touch the mark there, caressing it with mild strokes. He then looked up to meet his eyes, taking another calming breath.

“I carry your child under my heart, my lord,” he whispered then, blushing hard as Ohno’s eyes widened at the announcement. For a moment, Ohno stared at him unbelievingly, and a bit confused until he seemed to make sense of the statement.

Nino adverted his eyes, shrieking in shock when he was suddenly in a tight embrace, Ohno already lifting him out of the water to kiss his slack mouth as he tried to gather his thoughts and voice to ask all the questions running through him.

Nino’s arms tightened around his neck as Ohno chuckled into the kiss and fell to the bed with Nino still in his arms. He moved back to look at the young man under him, smiling fondly at the red cheeks and fresh tears in his eyes as he moved down slower to peck the closing eyes. “I love you so much,” he whispered against his lips as nipped them again.

“I love you too.”

A/N: Sorry if this sucks ><.

Chapter Text

Aiba chuckled as he observed his friend as Nino was staring down at the paper Ohno had given him that morning. Nino traced the words and then looked up at the chuckle.

“What is it?” he asked with a pout.

“You were worried over nothing, huh?”

Nino shrugged and then sighed as he put the paper down and nodded. “It seemed like that,” he whispered. “But I can’t change how I feel that easily. And I was scared after all.”

“I know. But it’s good that all went well, right?”

Nino caressed the small bump on his stomach and nodded with a smile. “Yes, I’m happy, Masaki. Sometimes I wonder if I am allowed to be that happy. I killed someone.”

“So, you did. But you did it to safe this world, Kazu. You did protect yourself and the people dear to you.”

Nino hummed in agreement and then put his head on Aiba’s shoulder, closing his eyes slightly.

“Are you tired?”

“A bit,” Nino mumbled as he blinked his eyes open again, looking at the worried face. “But I should go for my prayer. Afterwards, I can rest. Will you accompany me to the tower?”

Aiba watched him for a moment but then nodded. “Of course.”

Nino smiled and then stood with some difficulty. He knew he was mostly tired because he had been so worried all the time, that his rest hadn’t been the best. And of course, because the aftermaths of everything was still there. But he was sure that it would go away after a bit more time and he had the others to look after him and help him.

—

“Will you accompany me to the crowning ceremony?” Nino asked as he played with Ohno’s hair. Ohno had moved down to caress he bump on his belly with both hands, kissing the stretched skin sometimes. Nino was still surprised at how happily and easily Ohno had accepted him being pregnant, but he couldn’t deny his happiness at that.

“Of course,” Ohno said, looking up at him. Nino smiled and traced his face with his fingertips.

“I’m glad when this is over,” Nino whispered.

“You are stressed, right?”

“A bit, I’m nervous. I know that ceremony is just for the dragons, Masaki will be the spiritual witness, but I need to spiritually clean myself before. The many prayers and steps daily are exhausting. More right now than I had thought possible.”

“That’s probably because of your pregnancy. A not so exciting time might have been better for that.”

Nino shrugged but silently agreed. It was probably right. The nauseousness he still had made it hard for him to eat and throwing up, made him tired all the time. “We can’t change it now, and I wouldn’t want to change it anyway,” he said then.

Ohno smiled and nodded as he kissed his belly button one last time and then moved upwards to kiss his lips. “Me neither. Kazu?”

“Mhm?” Nino asked a bit sleepily as Ohno had started to massage the small of his back with one hand. It always relaxed him a lot, and it was late and comfy, and Ohno’s lips on his face were very lovely.

“I want to pledge to be with you in an eternal bond,” he whispered, still slowly caressing his back and side, watching him softly and kissing his lips again and again.

Nino chuckled slightly as the kisses stopped him from being able to answer. He cupped his cheek to stop him, his thumb stroking his lower lip, before sighing and moving forwards to kiss him more firmly.

“I would love that,” he whispered, against his lips.

“I will give you the finest ceremony to celebrate that day we close the bind,” Ohno mumbled. “You deserve only the best.”

“I don’t need a grand ceremony, though,” Nino whispered. “Just you promising me will be enough for me.”

Ohno smiled and kissed him again as he sighed and put his forehead against Nino’s to be close to him. “I believe that. But, my love, we should do it policy. I know it’s all new to you, but you will be a leader of this country, people want to see you, people want to hear you speak and people want to be part of your life.”

Nino wrinkled his nose and sighed before snuggling against him. “Masaki tells me the same. He says it’s bad for me to hide in here.”

“I understand him, but I also do understand you. Jun says the same, though.”

Nino sighed and nodded. “I see. But I don’t like it. You are the son of the king.”

“I’m not,” Ohno said with a snort.

Nino blushed but mumbled something against the skin, making Ohno laugh again.

“Just because you don’t like the reality at being the king soon, but denying those facts will make your fear worse.”

“I’m not good with people,” Nino mumbled. “And I’m sure they hoped for you to be their king. The talks were all positive when we were in the city.”

“You are good with them.”

Nino snorted slightly and moved back to look at Ohno with a lifted eyebrow.

“You made me fall in love with you quite easily.”

“Liar. You thought I were a witch most of the time. I don’t think you fell for me easily.”

“I was interested into you right from the beginning,” Ohno mumbled. “But yeah at the start I didn’t trust you, but you didn’t trust me either. I think that’s normal for people like us.”

Nino pouted but had to agree. “And Jun?”

“Jun doesn’t like anybody. And I think he trusts you in his way. You were great with the children in the villages. Not so much with the men, I give you that, but they were close-minded and thought you were a woman. They didn’t try to talk to you.”

“Minus the people who wanted me to warm their beds,” Nino snorted.

“Well you are irresistible,” Ohno said, kissing his lips. “But you are mine.”

“And you are mine,” Nino whispered and then sighed as he relaxed back against him.

“If I go there as a leader, then only with you. I can’t do this on my own. I have no idea about humans the way you do or the things that need to be considered. I know Morga… No Kuu and the others have high hopes in me, and I will take my role as mediator seriously, but I can’t do this all on my own.”

“And you don’t have to. We are in this together.”

“Promise?”

“Of course, my love. I already promised you that, right?”

“Right. I think it might be good if they all know that we are there to lead them together,” Nino whispered as he settled down again, feeling the fear of standing in front of all the people all alone subside.

“You should rest, my love. You are tired, and it’s late.”

“You’re right,” he agreed, kissing him again, before closing his eyes and getting more comfortable. Ohno dropped a kiss to his hair as he settled down beside him, his hand back on his back to caress it with long, calming strokes.

—

Nino huffed for the tenth time since they had left home and Ohno bit his lips as to no laugh. Nino had been annoyed since they left their chambers, as he was clearly unhappy with the clothes he had to wear for tonight’s ceremony. His hair was open, and Ohno had thoroughly enjoyed to brush them out, but of course, Nino didn’t like it that much. But he looked adorable with the slight frown on his face that masked his nervousness not that well.

“Stop fidgeting,” Ohno scolded as he helped him to untangle his hair again. He looked Nino over as they were at the base of the tower and smiled. Nino was wearing a simple white robe with a yellow belt around his middle. The dark hair was flowing freely over his back, and Nino had painted his eyes with a dark yellow line at his side of the eye, making them even more catlike than they usually were. He was beautiful right now. Ohno kissed his lips lovingly and caressed his cheek with his fingertips.

“Everything will go fine.”

“I know, but I can’t help it.”

“I know, still I will repeat it as often as needed to calm you down.”

Nino smiled weakly and nodded. “Thank you,” he whispered, pecking his cheeks, before taking a deep breath and finally started to climb the stairs to the tower.

Ohno kissed his forehead when they were at the top and smiled at him once more, before letting him go and stepped back, just as Nino had explained to him he should do. Nino looked up and smiled at Niji, who was by his side in an instant and patted his head. “I missed you,” he whispered, smiling at the answering thrill. He kissed the top of Niji’s head, before stepping into the middle of the stone floor with the open ceiling.

He looked up for a moment, his breath slowing down as he saw the full moon high in the sky, shining down on him. He knelt at the floor, closing his eyes at the start of the prayer for tonight.

Ohno watched them silently, his breath hitching as he saw Nino bathed in the moonlight, his skin seemed to shimmer under the light, and Nino looked almost translucent as the hour went by. Niji was alert close to him, and somehow Ohno knew that Niji would not hold back on anybody if they came close to Nino right now.

Ohno’s eyes wandered over the bowed body, lost in his chants and he was almost sure he could see the mark shining on the skin through the thin cloth he was wearing.

When Kuu materialised in front of them, he took a tiny step back. He had spent time with the old dragon during the month he had been unconscious, but it was completely different to see the big dragon in front of him. He had gotten used to Niji, but Niji was not as big as Kuu and not as scary looking.

There was a low humming in his ears as the dragon spoke, and he had to hold back not to put his hands on top of his ears to shut them out. He knew that it wouldn’t work like that. The voice he heard came from inside of him, and even if he didn’t understand the words spoken the power in them, made his bones shake.

Nino looked up at the dragon, and his face was finally relaxed as he answered, Ohno again, not understanding the actual words spoken. Nino and Niji both bowed their heads soon after again and Kuu moved his head closer to them. For a moment, Ohno feared that the dragon would hurt his lover, but then his snout tapped both slightly, and a bright light consumed them. Ohno closed his eyes against the blinding light before he was able to open them again. When he did, Nino was standing again, with Niji by his side.

Ohno watched him curiously, surprised to see that there was another mark on his skin. The colour was a strange mix of silver and light yellow and went from his neck down over his collarbone before the robe hid it. He was curious as to what the mark would look like thoroughly and felt his fingers twitch to get closer to Nino and take the robe off to discover it.

Nino was meeting his eyes, and there was an amused twinkle to his eyes as if he knew exactly what he was thinking. Ohno supposed that it was a straightforward guess if he was honest, so he held back a silly grimace. Kuu was still there, and there was always tension in the room, so he knew it was not over yet.

Nino held out his hand for him, and Ohno frowned before taking the few steps and taking Nino’s hand in his own.

“Kuu wants to know if you agree to bind yourself to me and follow my guidance.”

Ohno looked at him with a small frown on his face, before looking at the dragon, thinking about the question. He took a shuddering breath, and Nino squeezed his fingers.

Ohno looked at Kuu and intertwined his fingers with Nino, who chuckled almost inaudibly.

“I agree to bind myself to Kazu, and I also agree to follow his guidance with everything that has to do with the old religion or the dragons. I will discuss things with him, that has to do with this country, the wants and needs of the people there, and of course our private lives. We are equal in those things and need to compromise as not to come to loathe each other,” he answered firmly.

A warm breath went over his body as Kuu laughed at his answer, looking at Nino who smirked back at him after a moment.

“He likes you,” Nino said with a chuckle. Nino kissed his cheek and squeezed his fingers before stepping back. “Kneel, please Satoshi.”

Ohno watched Nino for a moment for further instructions, but Nino bit his lower lip. Ohno let out a breath as he nodded and knelt to the floor. He looked at Nino who looked back. “Close your eyes, and bow your head.”

Ohno frowned at the words, but Nino smiled fondly down at him and mouthed to trust him. And he did with his life any time, so he closed his eyes and did as he was told. He felt his arm and chest burn suddenly and bit his lips as not to cry out loud. Soon after there were warm hands on his shoulders, helping him up soon after.

“What happened?” Ohno asked, but Nino chuckled, and his hands wandered down his arms to take both of his hands in his own. Ohno looked down at their hands, surprised when a yellow bracelet appeared around his wrist with a matching silverish blue one on Nino’s wrist.

“The old Gods bound us, you are to be my life partner,” he said with sparkling eyes.

Ohno blinked surprised and looked back at Kuu, who was staring at them. He bowed his head with a smile. “Thank you for your blessing,” he whispered.

“That’s not all. As my partner under the eyes of the old Gods, you will be able to understand the dragons as well and bound with your own.”

Ohno’s mouth fell open, and he stared at him. “What?”

Nino tilted his head as he watched him. “Not tonight,” he whispered, kissing the side of his mouth. “For tonight all is good and over, and I will need your help to get back into our chamber, I’m exhausted.”

“Of course, my love,” Ohno said, deciding to ask the questions in his mind the next day after Nino had rested, even if it was a lot to take in right now. Nino and Ohno both thanked Kuu, and Masaki stepped out from the shadows. Ohno had almost forgotten him, but he just waved them off, turning to Kuu and doing whatever he was needed to do, Ohno supposed as he lifted Nino despite his protests and carried him to their room.

Chapter Text

Ohno watched Nino, who was still sleeping at his side. Nino was curled up; an arm slung protectively around his stomach as he slept slowly in and out through his slightly opened lips. There was a small frown on his face from time to time, and he chuckled as he pressed his fingertips against the wrinkled skin and smiled when it smoothed out under his touch. He moved a little bit - careful as to not wake the sleeping man - and kissed his temple warmly.

His fingers swept down the face to his shoulder, and he carefully opened the collar of his robe a little bit more to trace the marked skin with his fingertips. The lines circled his shoulder, coming from his chest and starting right on the skin above his heart. They winded down his arm and then there was the sleeve of his robe in the way of Ohno’s eyes so that he couldn’t say how he intricate pattern went there. Ohno moved his arm very careful, glad that it wasn’t the arm around Nino’s stomach and turned it so that he could push the sleeve a little bit higher. The lines were coming down from the elbow encircling his wrist, and somehow enunciating the bracelet there before they met on the back of his hand in a smaller version of his dragon mark he had on his back. Ohno smiled when Nino mumbled in his sleep, moving the hand to put a kiss on the palm and then intertwining their fingers as he got more comfortable.

“Sat…Shi?” Nino asked sleepily, and Ohno smiled as he pressed his lips against his brows, hushing him softly.

“Sleep some more, my love. You are tired.”

“Uhn,” Nino agreed in a mumble and moved slightly on the bed before his head found its place on Ohno’s chest with a sleepy sigh. Ohno chuckled as he kissed the top of his hair and moved the arm under Nino so that he could play with his soft hair until Nino was truly asleep again. He sighed softly, yawning himself as he peered down at their intertwined hands. He still hadn’t had the time to check his arm as there was no way that he would let go of Nino to check them out in a looking glass. But he could see that silver-blue lines met on the back of his hand in the same dragon mark his lover had, so he supposed that the lines on his body would resemble Nino’s in that as well.

The differences he had seen so far were that the colour of his mark resembled more of the blue in Nino’s bracelet instead of the yellow glow Nino’s mark had and that the dragon on his hand seemed to bow its head while Nino’s stared proudly ahead.

He sighed and closed his eyes, deciding that the questions had to wait for the night, while also thinking that it was probably not that important anyway. The most important thing, after all, was that Kuu had accepted him as Nino’s partner and the father of the child his lover carried. Ohno couldn’t help but kiss Nino again at the thought of their future child. A child that would be loved and protected by them. He couldn’t wait to bestow upon them what he and Nino missed in their youth.

—

“Are you ready?” Ohno asked Nino and grinned at the unhappy frown on his face. He hid a giggle behind his hand as he squeezed the hand in his own.

Nino huffed softly at the question. He pulled at his hair, before making sure it was in order once more before he frowned. “Do I have to do that? Kuu already accepted me,” he whined.

“Yes, but we decided to make it all official today. And yes, you owe it to the people,” he reminded him in a low voice, stepping closer as he realised that Nino felt honestly uncomfortable and he was not just huffy. He sighed and carefully tugged his hand away from his hair before cradling his head in his hands and placing a loving kiss on his lips.

“You’ll do great, my love,” he whispered. “And you look great. Don’t worry.”

“I look fat and silly.”

Ohno scoffed slightly as his fingers pulled at his hair to make sure all was back into place and the half up-do Nino wore today was beautiful. The only thing missing was the jewellery on top of his head showing his status, but Kuu would bestow that upon them when he made his entrance in front of the people and announce them as the king and consort.

“You look stunning,” he disagreed softly, ignoring the slight click of Jun’s tongue who had appeared to fetch them since they were late.

Nino stared at him with big eyes and a slightly wobbly lip as he nibbled on it and for a moment Ohno wished to pick the other man up and hide him somewhere where nobody but him was allowed to see him. Ohno knew Nino was nervous about meeting with so many people. He was confident when it came to the dragons or his friends, but even if he had to tell the servant things, he would blush and stumble over his words. But Ohno also knew that Nino needed to learn to face those men and women and show them that he knew what he was doing and that he was strong enough to protect and lead them. Ohno already knew that he was kind enough to make sure they were treated correctly.

“Do not,” Nino mumbled, his fingers wandering to the bulging belly and Ohno tutted softly as he took both hands in his own and stepped back. He looked Nino up and down slowly, ignoring the deep red colour on Nino’s cheeks as he ended up on his face once again. The other wore a festive kimono in golden and dark blue, the sleeve of the arm with his mark gone to accentuate that even more. The slight bulge of his belly was there, Ohno supposed, and it was hard to hide now that Nino was in his fourth month, but it was not yet that big that it hindered the other man or that people would see at one glance that he was pregnant and not just a bit chubby around his stomach. The dark hair was halfway in a tail, and the rest of it was flowing down his back like a beautiful waterfall. Ohno was sure it would look even more stunning out there when the light would fall on it.

“You, my love, are the most beautiful human being I ever laid my eyes upon. Nobody would think otherwise, I promise. They will love you and accept you. I promise.”

Nino opened his mouth to argue, but Jun cleared his throat.

“That depends if you would be so humble and finally step out before the crowd leaves or gets restless,” he said sarcastically. “The cooks would also appreciate it if not all food would be cold when the banquet after the official crowning starts.”

Nino paled at the reminder of that, but before he could say anything, there was Aiba’s arm around his shoulders.

“And no bowing out of that. You two have to stay for at least until the sun sets and the moon stands high in the sky.”

“Bully,” Nino mumbled because he rather would hideaway after it all again in their chamber and not sit with unknown people to eat and listen to them talking or even mingle with them.

Ohno chuckled as he squeezed his fingers again. He knew that Nino felt uncomfortable, but the feast after the crowning was meant for the people of the city or visiting today to get to know Nino and make them and him more comfortable around each other. If Nino always hid, it would only end up badly.

“I’ll be by your side all the time. As will be Niji, when the banquet starts,” he whispered and kissed his temple. “And if you feel too exhausted we can retire for the night, I promise.”

Nino sighed as he nodded slowly and closed his eyes. “Okay… Okay, I can do it.”

Aiba chuckled and squeezed his shoulder as he agreed silently and followed Jun to step out first to introduce Nino and Ohno.

The two of them exchanged a long look, with Ohno smiling encouragingly as he stepped forward, tugging him along, before making sure that Nino was always at least two steps in front of him.

—

“Shall I ask someone to teach you the shamisen?” Ohno asked with a smile as he offered Nino a drink.

“Huh?” Nino asked, blinking and looking away from the musicians he had looked at for most of the banquet. A few people were dancing traditional dances to the sound of music, but Nino’s eyes seldom travelled to the dancers but stayed on the musicians since he had eaten his fill.

“You are looking enthralled by them.”

“The sounds they make are beautiful,” Nino agreed, sipping at the water Ohno had brought him.

“Did you learn any instruments?”

Nino shook his head slowly. “No, I was not interested when my parents were still alive. Later at the dragons’ nest, there were no instruments to learn, and it’s not as if they would be able to play them,” he mumbled as he stroked the head of Niji who was resting around his neck.

“I see. So would you wish to learn? You have the time now to learn all about any art you would wish to.” Ohno explained as his fingers automatically went to the dragon around his shoulders. He still hadn’t gotten used to the dark dragon that had appeared in their room after the first night, accompanying Niji and sitting on the bed. It was still a small dragon, not a baby anymore but yet not fully an adult and it was an adorable dragon, calling itself Yoru. Ohno had painted him a few times, even if his favourite pastime was watching Yoru and Niji chasing each other and playing together.

Nino hummed, his hand fanning on top of his stomach as a small smile graced his lips at the reminder. Yes, he had all the time now to learn whatever he wanted. He nodded and closed his eyes. “I think I would like to learn,” he agreed.

“Then I will ask for someone to come and teach you,” Ohno agreed, dropping a kiss on his forehead. “Do you want to dance?”

“I only know the ceremonial steps,” Nino mumbled with a small frown.

“The dances here are similar. I’m sure we can muddle through, and it would make them happy to have you dance with them.”

Nino didn’t look entirely sure about that, but he agreed in the end as he finished his water. Ohno grinned and put a pearl of his headdress back to its place before taking his hand and leading him to the middle of the room to join the other dancers. He joked slightly that he hoped they would have mercy on them since they haven’t learnt the steps and smiled when the other chuckled but soon enough started to show him and Nino the steps needed to be able to join them.

Ohno’s eyes were on Nino as he listened to the girl from the inn following her guidance as to the happy smile on his face grew, and he seemed to enjoy himself immensely as he was able to dance along. Just as Ohno had thought, Nino fitted right in and looked more graceful as any as he danced.

—

Nino groaned slightly as he looked around, happy enough that he saw a stone bench in the shade. He walked over to there and sat down with a heavy sigh. He rubbed his forehead as he moved his shoulders to lose the tension in that. God, why did he agreed to Ohno to accompany him to the city?

Of course, it was because the weather had been pleasant and he had felt restless inside the castle. There was not much to do other than talking to servants and telling them what to do and having almost daily audiences with people from the kingdom, listening to problems and deciding things he had no idea if they were the right thing to do.

Of course, Ohno was always by his side, and he enjoyed talking to him, spending time to him and just be with him in general. He had twice a week lessons for the shamisen, and once a week he learnt all about flower arranging. It was funny pastimes, but it never was too long, and it got boring not to travel all day or practice all day anymore. He wanted to ask Ohno to go home, but they had not even done one of the things they had come for, and he feared that Ohno might be annoyed by him if he whined right away.

He looked up again, trying to summon Ohno to his side, but he was still lost in the smithy. Nino huffed and kicked a bit of sand away as he leant backwards. Ohno could have asked them to come to the castle, he thought unhappily.

He groaned again at the hateful thoughts and buried his head in his hands he felt awful for detesting being out right now. He had looked forward to it after all. He pressed his eyes to close, wiping away the tears clinging to the side of his eyes, hating his hormones for making him stupid like this.

When he looked up, he almost shrieked as he was face to face with a small boy very suddenly who looked at him curiously with wide eyes. He calmed down after seconds and forced a shaky smile on his face.

“Hello,” Nino greeted softly.

“Hello,” the boy answered, still staring at him with a slightly open mouth. Nino chuckled as the boy looked adorable right now.

“Are you lost?”

The boy shook his head and turned halfway to point at a woman, talking to a vendor.

“Oh so you ran away from her? She will worry if you are not with her, ne?”

He nodded but then shook his head and shrugged. “Mother knows I know where to go and where not,” he said proudly. “I’m already that old, after all. And my little brothers and sisters are much smaller. I’m the big boy.” He showed his hand and Nino giggled softly.

“Oh so you need to help your mother carry the groceries you buy?”

He nodded with a small huff, standing straighter and puffing his chest. “Because I’m big and strong. Look I’m sooo strong. Almost as much as father,” he said, moving his arms to show him the muscles in his arms.

“Wow,” Nino said with a smile. “Very strong.”

“Misha! You can’t go around disturb others,” the woman called, and the boy looked up.

“But mother, the pretty lady looked tired and sad,” he yelled. “Father said to look after others!” The boy turned back around, staring at Nino with big eyes. “Why are you sad?”

“I’m not sad, just a bit tired, you are right,” he sighed. “I’m waiting for my partner who is in the smithy. Then we’ll go and have lunch somewhere.”

The boy pouted and thought the words over. “He shouldn’t let you wait. Wait I go and get him!” he declared, and Nino quickly held him back.

“It’s fine,” he said.

“No, father says you don’t let ladies wait, especially not if they have babies in their tummies. Father always told me not to let mother alone when she had my siblings. He needs to be told,” he said and was about to turn around when Ohno stepped out of the smithy. The eyes of the boy widened. “Oh the second king! Mother, mother!”

The woman visibly sighed as she turned around to her son fully now, she stiffened slightly as she realised who the “woman” was the boy was talking with and paled somewhat.

Ohno lifted an eyebrow in confusion as he came over and offered Nino a hand to help him up. “My love, are you tired? And who did you befriend?”

Nino smiled as he knelt in front of the boy. “This is Misha. And he was keeping me company, making sure I was okay, right?”

The boy nodded silently, still staring at them, and gradually understanding with whom he had been talking. His mother appeared behind him, putting her hands on his shoulders and bowing. “I apologise if he disturbed you.”

“No, he was an absolute gentleman,” Nino said calmly ruffling Misha’s hair. He then looked at Ohno, who was watching them bemusedly. “And he wanted to tell you, my lord, that it’s not nice to keep people waiting, especially if pregnant,” he teased. He had already made an announcement a few days prior that he had been gifted with a child by the dragons since it was hard to hide as his belly grew and he needed breaks if his emotions went haywire. He wouldn’t be good at making decisions if otherwise, but it meant that people had to wait for a bit longer until the audience was granted.

“Right he is then,” Ohno said and smiled down at the boy. “I apologise for keeping him out of sight. It won’t happen again, I promise.”

Misha was still looking a bit surprised but also proud at being praised and was now nodding his head sternly. “Good,” he decided, grinning up to his mother.

“I told them what father said when you had Kain,” he explained.

The woman looked from one to the other but calmed down as she realised that both of them were neither disturbed nor angry at them or her son but rather the opposite. “I see,” she agreed. “But I think we should head home, okay? Say good-bye Misha.”

Misha nodded and waved at them, telling Ohno that Nino needed lots of food to be healthy with the baby who nodded with an earnest face as they waved back.

Ohno grinned as he put his arm around his shoulder. “Shall we head to the inn for lunch then?”

“Well you got told off, right?”

“Right.”

“Did you manage to get what you wanted?”

Ohno hummed in agreement and kissed his temple. “Yes, we can have lunch and then slowly make our way back, or shall I send someone to the castle to send a carriage for the ride home?”

“Didn’t you want to do more today?”

“Nothing of more importance than you,” Ohno mumbled. “Just some ink and papers.”

“Then we eat lunch, rest a bit then and go to the shop, where the carriage should await us.”

“Okay, my love,” Ohno agreed, kissing his lips before leading him to the nearby inn for their meal.

Chapter Text

Nino sighed relieved when the last person left the great hall. Ohno was at his side in an instant, his fingers wandering to the small of his back, rubbing the place and Nino relaxed against him for a second. He closed his eyes and was glad when the slight pain finally disappeared again. It was hard for him to sit long hours now. To be honest, any position brought pain to either his back, his feet or his stomach if he stayed in them for too long.

“Are you okay, my love?” Ohno asked softly, and he nodded as he gratefully accepted the offered hand and let Ohno help him stand.

“I’ll live,” he decided with a sigh, leaning against Ohno as he put his arm around his hips to lead him outside.

“I would be rather sad if not,” Ohno said with a frown.

Nino giggled and rubbed his rounded belly, hitting Ohno’s fingers slightly as he reached for the stomach as well. “Not while we walk. Your child is restless,” Nino mumbled. “And I’m sure they are lying on some nerve, right now.”

“Do you want to soak in a bath?” Ohno asked worriedly. “I can call for someone to prepare it and put in some oils for relaxation.”

Nino hummed in thought and leant against him. “I rather would like to lie down, I believe.”

“You can do both. I think a soak in hot water will help your muscles to relax, which will help with the back pain.”

Nino agreed after a moment, and Ohno looked around for a servant to wave the girl over and tell her he wished for warm water. She nodded in understanding and then bowed before running away to prepare the bath for Nino. Nino frowned at that and sighed.

“I still can’t get used to letting other’s do things for me,” he grumbled.

“You are pregnant, my love. And they take their job with pride. We are paying them for those things, and it makes them upset if we don’t let them do their jobs. I tried. I was hated because they thought, I thought, they did their jobs inefficiently, and I could do better,” Ohno explained.

Nino giggled and nodded. It was the same Ohno always told him when he complained about such things. He could understand. It would be stupid of him to try to prepare all himself while he was this heavily pregnant. Even if the dragons protected his body and the unborn child, he shouldn’t be reckless.

“Will you bath with me?”

“I will wash your back and massage your sore muscles there. But I won’t go into the water with you. I want you to be able to stretch out the most you can.”

“Okay,” Nino mumbled, pouting slightly. “Do you imply that I’ve gotten big and there is no space for the both of us anymore?”

“No, of course not,” Ohno said as he pinched the skin at his hips slightly. “I think you are the most beautiful man I have ever laid my eyes on. And you carrying my child under your heart makes you just more radiant in my eyes.”

Nino blushed shyly and ducked his head and looked down at the floor. Ohno chuckled and brought him in their chambers. He helped Nino sitting on the decliner there and checked if their bath was already ready, just to realise that as always their servants had already done their work to perfection. There was not only a scented bath waiting for Nino but also a small step right beside the tub so that he could climb in with his help, massage oils at the side, and a small fire was also lit with clothes and towels in front to warm them for later use.

Ohno helped Nino with his bath, kissing his body and caressing the lovely lines and stretch marks on his body before Nino almost fell to sleep in the tub. He helped him into a new robe, rubbing oils into the stretched skin so that it wouldn’t break and brought his lover to bed.

Nino tugged at his hands as he was safely under the covers, demanding wordlessly for Ohno to join him. Ohno lied down beside him, caressing his side and the belly until Nino was deep asleep.

“Niji, look after your master,” he asked the dragon who huffed and laid his head on Nino’s legs, staring at him as if he wanted to tell him off for thinking he would leave Nino alone.

Ohno chuckled and let his dragon find its place on his shoulder, before leaving the room to go and do his work, making sure to come back, before Nino would wake up.

—

“Where are we going?” Nino asked with a frown on his face.

Ohno smirked as he held both of his hands in his own and carefully walked backwards as he watched Nino with mischievous eyes. “It’s a surprise.”

“I hate surprises.”

“You so do not,” Ohno said, laughing at the slight sparkle in Nino’s eyes at the mention of a surprise. “You love surprises.”

“Do not.”

“Okay, scratch that. You love surprises if Niji is relaxed.”

Nino pouted, but in the end, he couldn’t help the smile that crept upon his face because he couldn’t hide his excitement any longer. He was just curious about what was going on for a while now.

He had realised that Ohno left him alone sometimes, going somewhere to do whatever, Nino was relatively sure it was not all because of the work needed to run a country, because most of that they did together, minus a few extra chores that didn’t need Nino’s input that much or where it was clear what to do so that Nino could rest as much as possible.

“Yoru what did Satoshi do? Tell me?” he asked Ohno’s dragon since Yoru had always been with Ohno. He was sure of that. The small dragon turned around on Ohno’s shoulders, its eyes wide and it almost fell.

Nino felt sorry for the small dragon who thrilled almost panicky.

Ohno let go of one hand of Nino to catch Yoru before it could fall. “Kazu is teasing you, you don’t need to tell him,” he said when he could feel the distress in Yoru.

Nino hummed and then patted the head of Yoru. “Satoshi is right. I’m sorry Yoru, you don’t have to tell me and break the secret Satoshi made you keep,” he whispered. He knew that the dragons would not be able to decline a direct order from him and that at the same time Yoru didn’t want to break his promise to Ohno.

“He will see in a bit either way. Careful now we need to go down these steps. Do you manage or shall I help you?”

“I can manage,” Nino said with a pout on his lips and wrinkled his nose. Ohno sighed and rolled his eyes as he stepped beside him and held him around the waist.

“Don’t whine.”

Nino stuck out his tongue but held to Ohno’s arm as he took the few steps until they were on the ground level again. Ohno took his place in front of Nino again, holding his hands and smiling at him. Nino was still watching him with furrowed brows, but Ohno just squeezed his fingers.

“Close your eyes?”

“No.”

“Pretty please? I won’t let you get hurt, I promise.”

“You are not carrying me, you hear?”

“I promise I won’t. I will lead you outside, and Yoru and Niji will help me. You need to trust us.”

Nino’s defiant stance relaxed as he sighed at those words and closed his eyes. He would always trust his lover and those two dragons that had sworn to protect them.

—

Nino shivered slightly as he stepped outside and the cold wind blew around them. He sighed when he felt Yoru’s slight weight on top of his shoulders, its warmth soaking into his body and warming him from the inside. He managed not to open his eyes as Ohno led him with measured steps outside and through the garden. Nino could feel the differences on the floor he walked on.

When Ohno stopped, Nino breathed in deeply, trying to find out where they were. He could smell flowers in the air, hear the wind whistling in leaves, and if his ears weren’t betraying him, he could hear water running. He almost opened his eyes if not for Yoru pressing its face against his cheek. Nino took off his fingers from Ohno’s grip to caress Yoru’s head in thanks and hummed.

“May I open my eyes now?”

“Just a second longer,” Ohno mumbles. “I will let you go, and I’ll need you to keep your eyes close, okay?”

“Okay,” Nino said, and his hand found its resting place on Niji’s head beside him.

Ohno smiled and stepped back. He was watching the beautiful sight of his lover, the round belly that Nino could not even try to hide anymore without magic and the two dragons that were close by to make sure to protect his lover and their king.

Nino always looked beautiful in his eyes but seeing him that he had his eyes closed, trusting him in this way now, always made his heart beat so much faster than he had thought possible. God, he loved his lover so much. Ohno couldn’t help himself as he took the two steps forward again to press his lips against Nino’s, before going back once more. He had made sure that Nino was in the middle of the small garden he had created, and now he hoped that he would like it. Aiba had helped to make sure that he planned it accordingly to Nino’s praying habits and other rituals that his religion entitled but he still was nervous that he did something wrong.

“Okay, you may open them now,” Ohno breathed, feeling the nervousness creep up again.

—

Nino opened his eyes when he felt Yoru jump from his shoulders to fly to Ohno. He watched the small black dragon for a second as he settled on Ohno’s shoulder and then looked around with wide eyes.

“What?” he asked as he turned around slowly. His mouth fell open as he saw the trees around this part of the garden, separating it clearly from the rest of the grounds around the castle. He stood in the middle of the garden, a path made from dirt and pebbles that didn’t hurt his feet. Nino was sure that it was even comfortable to walk on it without shoes on. He looked up, seeing the sun peeking over the crowns of the trees and he was sure that the sun around midday or the moon on full moons would shine directly inside here, similar to the place in the tower, but here it would feel so much better and more natural.

There was a small handmade stream that went through the garden. Nino didn’t know where the source was from, maybe it came from the forest, but he could see that someone, probably Ohno, had tweaked the natural path to make it fit with how the garden was created. There was a bench under the tree and a small wooden stand to protect them from wind or rain if it was necessary. Nino could already see their child play there while he prayed or it would make excellent space for practising the shamisen or calligraphy.

The flowers he had smelled before were mostly herbs he recognised from Aiba’s bag of healing herbs. The smell was strong but relaxing as it seemed that they had been planned in a way that they worked together more than against each other.

He turned again to look at Ohno with wide eyes. Ohno was watching him in turn, a worried look in his eyes and slight nervousness in his stance, but at the same time, there was a warm smile playing on his lips as he watched him discover the garden. “You did, all this?”

“Yes, the last few days with the help of Aiba-san, Yoru and some gardeners. Do you like it?”

“It is beautiful,” Nino agreed with a smile, holding out his hands for Ohno to come close and take them.

“I’m glad, and it’s supposed to be for you. A present and space just for you, nobody is allowed inside if you don’t want them,” Ohno whispered. “But Aiba-san mentioned he would be glad if he could get the herbs he needs sometimes, but even he wouldn’t step inside if you are here and want to be alone.”

“Thank you, it’s perfect,” Nino whispered, kissing him, before breaking the kiss with a giggle. “And your child approves as well,” he whispered, taking Ohno’s hand to put it on top of his stomach. He smiled as he pressed kisses to the side of Ohno’s lips when the eyes of the other got wide as he felt the child inside of him move clearly for the first time. Nino had felt it moving a lot already. It had started like fluttering wings of a butterfly, and grown in strength soon and fast. Still, it had been almost impossible to catch the stronger kicks until now.

“You are perfect,” Ohno whispered in awe, dropping to his knees in a graceful movement as he carefully opened the belt around Nino that held the robe close. He caressed the round belly, dropping kisses on the bellybutton. “As are you. I can’t wait to hold you in my arms finally,” he whispered to the belly, smiling when he got a kick in return.

Chapter Text

Nino sat on the stone bench in his little private garden, watching the stream and listening to the sounds of the water. He sighed happily and rubbed his rounded belly. He watched Niji who was flying above him, seemingly frolicking but Nino knew that he was keeping watch to make sure he was okay.

He had come here because he had been annoyed at Satoshi and Aiba and everybody honestly. Their child was kicking in his stomach, and it was hard to stay calm with all of those painful pulls. Also, it seemed as if the child used his bladder as a squishy toy and he had yelled at more people than he would have today and it was not even lunchtime.

He sighed and rubbed his belly again, grimacing at the slight pain he was feeling. He hissed softly at the sudden pull on the bottom half of his abdomen and bit his lips.

“Niji!” he called the dragon and before he could even blink Niji landed in front of him. He thrilled worriedly, and Nino groaned slightly, hugging his stomach at the next pull he felt. “I need to go back to the castle, and I need you to help me, you hear?”

Niji nodded, rubbing his snout against his stomach. “The baby wants to come,” he explained as calmly as he could as he grid his teeth as to not moan in pain. “So I need you to help me, and better yet, inform Yoru, will you? I tried, but I can’t form a link with him. It’s too hard right now.”

Niji agreed, and Nino waited for a moment until the wave was gone before getting to his feet. He sighed as Niji stayed close to his side, as he slowly made his way back, one arm around Niji. He would love to ride on the dragon, but there was no way he would be able to climb on his back and ride safely. He also didn’t know how good it was for his condition right now. But he knew that Ohno would come and help him if Yoru managed to tell Ohno.

Sometimes they still had a hard time communicating. Mostly if one of them were very nervous or excited. Nino was halfway to the castle when he had to stop. He pressed a fist against the back of Niji to keep himself upright as he breathed through the next wave of pain. God, he had been so stupid to go out and then so far as to his garden when he was so far into his pregnancy. But he would have never thought that today would be the day.

He just hoped that Masaki had been more foreseeing than he was and had already prepared everything he needed to help him bring the child into this world.

He flinched when he felt warm arms around him suddenly, and someone picked him up.

“It’s me, my love,” Ohno whispered into his ear, and Nino relaxed for a second.

“Sorry I didn’t realise someone was close,” Nino mumbled clinging to his robe. “The baby wants out. At least I think so. Masaki told me that the birth pains should be the same for me as for all women, and if it’s not that I don’t even want to imagine.”

Ohno nodded as he carried him swiftly through the rest of the garden. They were much faster that way as if he walked on his own right now. He looked at Nino’s face and the wrinkled forehead as he tried to hide in how much pain he was in. He understood how Nin didn’t realise he was close as occupied he was now with his own body.

“Masaki is preparing everything already,” Ohno promised him. “We knew that it was only a matter of days.”

“I was not ready for today though,” Nino cried as he pressed his face against his shoulder.

Ohno chuckled warmly as he dropped a kiss on top of his head. “Hold on tight, my love. We need to go up the stairs. And I think nobody is really ready for when it happens.”

“We don’t have a name,” Nino continued to whine, and Ohno rolled his eyes. “And Masaki has not yet told me fully what will happen.”

“Everything will go well,” he promised.

“I can’t do this, I think.”

“Of course you can because you can do everything. And there is nothing you can do to stop his now. The baby wants out, and there is no way to tell them not to come.”

Nino wanted to argue, but another wave stopped him.

Ohno flinched when Nino’s fingers pinched the skin of his shoulder and bit his lips as not to make a noise of pain. He dropped another kiss onto Nino’s head and sighed in relief when Aiba already awaited them in front of the healer’s room.

“Hey, Kazu, ready to become a father?”

“No,” Nino answered weakly. “Go away. I don’t want to see you or them.”

Aiba giggled and pointed at a bed. “My lord, please put him down there. We’ll need the space.”

Ohno hummed in answer, putting Nino down and kissing his forehead as he got him to let go of his shoulder when the pain subsided, and his body relaxed automatically. Ohno carefully took a step back, when Nino’s eyes flew open, and his fingers buried themselves into Ohno’s robe.

“You can’t leave me here alone,” he cried in panic.

“Of course not. I’m not leaving you alone with Masaki,” Ohno whispered, caressing his cheek. “But I need to step back a bit so that Misaki has all the space he needs to take care of you. Relax, my love,” he whispered, caressing his cheek for a second before he carefully pried Nino’s fingers from his robe and stood by his head. He took one hand in his own and cupped his cheek with the other. “See, I’m still here.”

“Uhn,” Nino breathed, concentrating on taking even deep breaths.

“You are lucky though,” Masaki mumbled as he opened Nino’s robe.

“Lucky? How so? I feel like I’m ripped apart already and you didn’t even do anything.”

“I know, but women sometimes are in labour for hours,” Masaki explained as he checked his stomach and listened for the heartbeat of the baby. He then stepped back, smiling softly. “You are already getting close,” he said, rubbing his fingers of his free hand. “Kazu you know what will happen now, right? What I am about to do?”

“You’ll cut me open and get the baby out,” Nino mumbled through gritted teeth. The thought was not making him happy, but he knew it was the only thing that they could actually do.

“Very good, you listened.”

“Can you stop talking and just do it?”

Masaki hummed as he rechecked his stomach, ignoring his question. “I will put up a curtain, Kazu. You shouldn’t see me opening your stomach, neither should Ohno-san. It will only scare you, and I need you to concentrate on the birthing process, alright?”

Nino nodded, his eyes showing the fear he felt about the prospect of being cut open. God he didn’t fear any fights with dark wizards bringing his death it seems but of this medical procedure was scaring him a lot.

“It’ll be all good, I promise. You won’t even feel any strong pain,” he promised. “And soon enough you have your little miracle in your arms.”

Nino nodded as he laid back, trying his best to relax, he trusted Masaki because he needed to do so. He looked at Ohno who was still looking calm, and that helped to calm down Nino a lot.

—

Nino couldn’t say how long it actually took until a sharp cry broke the silence. He hung to Ohno’s hand as if that was the only thing that kept him sane, and in a way, it did. It was so strange to feel Aiba work on him without fully feeling him.

“Kazu you need to push, okay?” Aiba had told him shortly before, and Nino had felt the tug together with following the rather useless order since it didn’t do anything in general, but at least it felt as if he had actively done something.

“Is everything okay?” Nino asked a bit scared when Aiba didn’t say anything for a second, and he couldn’t feel anything anymore. But just a second later Aiba appeared behind the curtain. He was smiling brightly as he carried a little, still dirty and bloodied infant in his arms. Nino felt a little bit squeamish, but at the same time, he didn’t really care about how the infant looked as he lifted his arm slightly.

“Everything is perfect, Kazu,” Aiba whispered as he placed the infant on his chest and Nino felt all nervousness vanish the second skin met skin. He put his free arm around the infant as to not let it slip down as Masaki disappeared out of view again and NIno grimaced slightly as he felt pulling at his skin again, but it was soon forgotten when the figure on top of him, calmed down and let out a big yawn.

He watched the figure in wonder, touching their head with his fingertips, not believing that the sight was real.

“Satoshi,” he whispered, realising that his lover was still close when another finger touched his and the head of their child. “We are parents.”

“You did so great,” Satoshi whispered as he knelt beside the bed to press a kiss against his temple. “I told you, you were strong,” he murmured.

“They are beautiful right?”

Ohno hummed in agreement, smiling when the little infant pursed their lips, before continuing to be asleep. “The birth was stressful for you both, it seems. Are you tired as well, my love?”

“Uhn,” Nino mumbled, blinking when the curtain was put away, and he found a blanket on top of him. His stomach was still slightly numb to the touch, but it was good to know that it all went over well.

“Kazu, I need to check on your baby, okay?”

Nino stared at him for a moment and then at the little baby in his arms. He didn’t want to give them out of his hands so soon, but he also wanted to know if they were well and if they were a girl or boy. He felt too weak to move them on his own to check and, honestly, he was getting sleepy.

“Niji and Yoru won’t let me or them out of their sight. You don’t have to worry. And I will go over there. You can watch me okay?”

“Uhn, but if something happens…”

“I know you will kill me slowly and painfully,” Aiba joked with a grin. Nino frowned but nodded and allowed Aiba to pick them up. “It’s a baby girl Kazu. Congratulations. Do you know how to call her already?”

Nino closed his eyes, feeling happy about the words but shook his head. “Not yet.”

“How about I clean, weigh and measure her and Ohno-san helps you to clean up. You are not allowed to move too much yet.”

Nino hummed in agreement, holding Ohno’s hand tighter in his. He hadn’t let go once until now, too scared that Ohno would leave him alone in this room or bed. “Stay?”

“Of course, my love. I won’t leave you,” Satoshi promised again. Of course, he wanted to follow Aiba to make sure he was careful, but he could imagine how hard this was for Nino, and he would never want to leave him all alone. “Let’s get you washed.”

Nino nodded as he stared at Aiba, who hummed throughout his work. Still, halfway through the procedure, he lost his fight against his tiredness and fell to sleep under Ohno’s careful touches, his mind knowing fully well that everything was safe and okay.

A/N: Oh god sorry for this chapter

Chapter Text

Nino woke a few hours later and looked still a bit exhausted but a lot better than he had when he fell to sleep. He turned his head to the side where he could sense Ohno and moved his fingers slightly to touch his arm.

“Kazu, you are awake?”

“Uhn,” he mumbled and carefully tried to shimmy up so that he could sit up. He groaned slightly at the slight pain he could feel at his abdomen.

“Carefully there. You were cut open just earlier,” Ohno reminded him but sighed when Nino was stubbornly still tried to sit up. He sighed and stood carefully to help Nino upright. Nino frowned and pulled off the blanket a little bit down and stroke the still inflamed skin on his stomach. It had healed a bit, but Nino realised that it would probably take a bit longer to recover fully than he was used to. At least his body seemed okay in general.

“Where is…?” he stopped talking, frowning when Ohno chuckled and put the small bundle of joy in Nino’s outstretched arms as he realised that Ohno was holding their daughter still in one arm.

“I couldn’t just put her in a crib,” Ohno explained with a small embarrassed smile. “Even if she is sleeping, but she is so cute. I think her face looks just like yours. A cute little button nose and a mole under her lip is already forming,” he gushed.

Nino chuckled as he very carefully folded the blankets away from the small infant to check on her. He knew that Masaki had already done that, but he wouldn’t be able to calm down until he had looked her over himself.

“She has your lips,” he whispered, stroking the warm rosy cheek with his fingertips. “She is perfect.”

“She is,” Ohno whispered as he watched Nino put the last folds to he side. Their little girl was making a small whining noise from the back of her throat, and Nino hushed her softly, stroking her side until she calmed down.

“And she is so small. I fear I would break her,” Ohno hummed, and Nino grinned amusedly as he turned her over to look over her back.

“We don’t break that easily. As long as you don’t throw her around or shake her, it’ll be fine.”

Ohno tutted slightly affronted at the thought of doing that to this little miracle in front of him, but then he smiled when he heard Nino’s chuckle and realised he was teasing. Ohno squealed almost as he saw the still tiny, but clearly there, mark of the dragon on her hip and put his little finger against it. “She has the same mark.”

“Of course she has. She’s my daughter,” Nino said, amusement clear in his eyes and voice. “You didn’t believe me when I told you we are born with it?”

“Well, you also said the dragons burnt the marks in your skin. You like to tease me about such things.”

Nino smirked but didn’t argue as he rubbed her back and sighed in relief as he finally was sure that she was healthy and perfect. She would have been perfect even if not healthy, but it was good to know.

The girl wriggled in his arms when a slight breeze invaded the room, and Nino turned her over once more to bundle her up in the blankets so that she was all bundled up once again. Still, he didn’t manage to rock her back to sleep as she opened her eyes, crying lowly in the back of her throat. “Are you hungry?” he asked her and rocked her a bit more to calm her maybe down.

“Seems like she is,” Ohno hummed, and Nino nodded as he stroke her cheek, smiling when teary eyes looked at him. He positioned her more comfortably before starting to feed her.

Ohno watched the two of them, enjoying the pretty sight of those two together and his fingers found Nino’s that was still holding the baby safely. “We’ll need a name for her.”

“True,” Nino hummed and stared down into the adorable face. He sighed and kissed the top of her head again when she settled down against him. He nibbled at his lips and stared at Ohno. “It’s just…”

“What is it?”

“It’s custom to name our children only after the seventh night,” Nino whispered and blushed slightly.

Ohno looked a bit surprised, but then he smiled and pressed his lips against Nino’s forehead. “I promised you to try to follow your customs. And if that means our little girl won’t get a real name until then, I’ll be fine with it.”

Nino smiled thankfully and kissed the side of his mouth. “Thank you. Do you have any customs?”

“Girl’s day and children’s day. I want to make a doll for her for that day.”

Nino nodded and smiled. “That sounds nice. Would you write her name in calligraphy when we do the naming ceremony?”

“Of course,” Ohno whispered and kissed his cheek again. “Can we decide on a name before, though?”

Nino nibbled on his lips and then nodded. “Okay… But we can’t call her that, promise?”

“Promise, she’ll be our little baby girl until then.”

Nino breathed in relief and relaxed a little as he nodded. “Thank you.”

“Of course.”

“Kuu will also grace her with his blessings when the next full moon appears high in the sky.”

“I expected something like that.”

Nino grinned happily at the easy acceptance and tugged Ohno closer so that the other couldn’t do anything else but sit down beside him on the bed so that Nino could snuggle up against him.

“After she is blessed by Kuu, we should introduce her to the people.”

Nino wrinkled his nose but agreed then with a sigh. “Can you ask Jun to plan something? I still can’t wrap my head around all those things that need to be considered. Jun can do that, right?”

“He will be delighted, especially since he can make sure of all the protective measures right from the start. What about visitors?”

“None until after the naming ceremony,” Nino said with a wrinkled forehead.

“Not even Masaki?”

“Not even Masaki. At least not if I don’t think something is wrong and I would need a healer. Niji and Yoru can be here, of course.”

“Will she have a dragon?”

“Yes, but not just yet,” Nino said with a grin. “She will have to wait until she is three, at least. But the dragons will decide on that. I got my dragon only after I was seven, and then only because I found Niji hurt in the forest after my parents were killed,” he reminded him. “I grew up with the knowledge they exist, but since my family lived in hiding… I think she will get a dragon earlier.”

“I see,” Ohno said with a nod, hugging Nino tightly for a second at the memory that his beloved parents were dead and would never meet their granddaughter.

“Don’t be sad. I’m happy,” Nino said with a small grin, kissing him again. He sighed as he leant back again; he felt sleepy again.

“So nobody is allowed inside, but can we move to our chambers? It would be easier to get food in the front room and everything else we need.”

“Not tonight. But tomorrow will be fine.”

“I will make sure nobody will get into our way then.”

Nino nodded, and Ohno chuckled as he put a kiss on top of his hair. “Sleep now, my love. You are still hurt and healing.”

“True,” Nino mumbled. He hated that his healing ability meant that he slept a lot throughout that time.

Ohno carefully picked the infant up again to hold her safely in one arm and helped Nino to lie down fully again to go back to sleep. He then sat back in his chair, happy that it was relatively comfortable and hoped that Nino was well enough to share the bed in the night.

—

Nino smiled softly as he watched Ohno share a bath with their little daughter. It was an adorable sight to see Ohno holding her carefully in his arms while pouring warm water over her body, listening to her babbling and answering as if they had a completely normal conversation.

It was the second time Ohno shared a bath with her, and Nino had quickly decided that he would let Ohno wash the girl. It was something that they could share and bond over while Nino took over the feeding times. At least now for a start. He knew Ohno could feed the girl as well, but it was still something that Nino wanted to do himself.

“You know that we will need to head out soon?” Nino said when both of them were silent for the moment.

“Is it safe for her to be out already?”

“Of course,” Nino said with a chuckle. “At least if we make sure she is warmly dressed.”

“The cloth I chose is warm,” Ohno murmured, and Nino hummed in agreement as his fingers touched the very soft white cloth that Ohno had chosen for tonight’s robe. Nino had been against white at the start since they had decided to combine their private naming ceremony with their first trip outside to Nino’s garden. Ohno had been insecure at first since he didn’t want to force himself into Nino’s sanctuary, but Nino thought that was silly. There would be a short prayer, but it was Ohno. Of course, he would always be welcome there. But at the same time, he also found it very cute.

“You see baby girl. Papa decided we should get out. But you like being in the water, right?” he teased the girl, tickling her so that she would giggle loudly. “Right, you do. So papa is a bully, but he is also right, we can’t stay too long because we should be in the garden before midnight,” he said with a groan.

Nino clicked his tongue and plucked the girl out of Ohno’s arm to dry her and dress her in the white kimono. “Why, white again?”

“Because it’s custom,” Ohno mumbled. “White clothing until she is three weeks old. You agreed.”

“Only because I don’t have to do the washing,” Nino mumbled as he pulled a grimace at the girl when she grabbed his long hair and tugged at it. “Missy that hurts,” he scolded, hissing when she yanked a bit harder to avoid his hands.

Ohno chuckled behind Nino, kissing his neck as he waved her finger in front of her face before helping Nino to free his hair from her grip. “Naughty girl,” he scolded, hiding a grin in Nino’s hair when she squealed in answer and then yawned wildly. “Naptime, it seems.”

“Seems like it,” Nino agreed as he picked her up to rock her until she was truly asleep and put her into her grip. Ohno smiled as he watched Nino making sure that a blanket was fully covering her as he put on some clothes and sat on the comfy chair close to the crib. When he was convinced that Nino had finished putting her to bed, he tugged the other closer to him, smiling when Nino landed on his lap with a small squeal.

“Hey there,” he whispered, kissing the soft lips of his lover. Nino chuckled as he put his arms around his neck and buried his face against his shoulder.

“Hey.”

“Did I tell you how much I love you already today?”

“Not today, no,” Nino whispered, looking up with a smile.

“Shame on me,” Ohno said with a chuckle as he lifted his chin to kiss him more deeply. “I love you very much.”

“I love you too, Satoshi,” Nino whispered against his lips. “I will miss this, after tonight,” he added, getting more comfortable on Ohno’s lap.

After tonight they would go to work again, holding conversations with people and meeting other people in general. It had been nice to not see or communicate with anybody else for the whole week.

“Me too, but I’m sure we can do this from time to time. Maybe not a whole week, but for a day or two.”

“Sounds nice,” Nino whispered, and Ohno hummed in agreement. He watched their sleeping girl and sighed.

“I’m strangely nervous.”

“Are you scared to do something wrong?”

“What will happen if I misspelt her name? I practised a lot, but I’m scared that I will do it wrong tonight.”

“You won’t. You’re perfect.”

Ohno chuckled and kissed his temple. “I won’t argue because I know that if I start, we will never end that argument.”

“Yes, because I’m right,” Nino said, laughing out loud when Ohno bit his shoulder in retaliation.

“It’ll be fine. You will do perfect tonight. And if not, we can cheat, and you rewrite the scroll.”

Ohno smiled and kissed the top of Nino’s nose. He knew how much it meant for Nino to have him write the name they’ve chosen on the wooden plate. It told a lot to him that Nino agreed so readily on a redo if something went wrong, because as far as he understood it was meant to be a one chance thing. It relaxed him a lot, somehow.

“Will you force her to join you in prayer tonight?”

“I will never force her,” Nino said with a handshake. “But I hope to teach her and show her so that she wants to copy me automatically.”

“Okay, sorry I didn’t want to offend you.”

“You didn’t. I know people do that. But I don’t want that. I know the Gods would understand if she doesn’t share the same beliefs as me.”

Ohno hummed in agreement, how could he not? He was accepted by the dragons even if he didn’t like belief in the old Gods a bit.

They sat in silence for a while longer, until their daughter woke and Nino went to feed her again, while Ohno collected the things they would need for the naming ceremony. It was dark when they left the castle, which was fine, there were lights alongside the paths, and it was not as if the girl had a regular sleeping pattern yet - the dark circles under both of their eyes were a testament for that.

Ohno put down the wooden plates and ink on the small patio he had built while Nino settled down beside them. He smiled at Ohno and kissed his lips once before moving the baby who was looking around curiously. She was grumbling slightly at being put down but then looked with big eyes as Niji and Yoru settled down around them to protect them from any wind that might be around them.

Nino hooked his chin on top of Ohno’s shoulder after he finished his prayers, asking for guidance and protection for their daughter and watched Ohno’s strokes on the plate.

He smiled when he realised that Ohno’s strokes were firm and unwavering as he wrote down the name they had chosen for their little girl.

He smiled when Ohno put down his brush and picked up their newly named daughter to put a kiss on her cheek. “Your father did great, Kiseki,” he whispered, giggling when Ohno poked his side.

“Kiseki, our little miracle,” Ohno agreed, helping Nino to put ink on her foot and press it against the second wooden plate and then cleaned it and did the same to her left hand. Nino wrinkled his nose as she flailed around before Ohno could clean her up entirely and they all three ended up with fingerprints over their robes.

“Naughty,” Ohno teased her again, tickling her and grinning when she squealed loudly in happiness. “Come here,” he whispered and held her against his body as he rocked her so that she would calm down while Nino looked over the plates and moved to the little stream to repeat his thanks. Kiseki watched her papa with curious eyes, wriggling to get to the water as well until she settled down in his arms and fell to sleep shortly after again. Her first trip out seemed to have tired her out after all.

“Let’s head back, Satoshi.”

“Of course, my love,” Ohno agreed, as Nino pulled him to his feet.

Nino carefully put the plates away to bring with them into their chambers where he put it on the wall above the crib before they settled for the night (or for as long as Kiseki would allow them to sleep.)

Chapter Text

The door to the great hall opened, and a small face peeked inside. The face of their little three-year-old girl lightened up when she recognised her second father. She pushed the door a bit wider open with a huff, that was accompanied by a giggle from Nino as the other man probably used some of his magic to help Kiseki opening the door wider. Ohno couldn’t see him, and since Kiseki didn’t wait for Nino, he supposed that the other man had left shortly after making sure Kiseki was with her father.

Ohno smiled as he watched Kiseki waddling over to him and held open his arms for the little girl. “Dada!” she cried as she collided against his knee. “Up!”

“As you wish, little princess,” he allowed and picked her up to put her on his lap. He hugged her tightly and then tickled her slightly when she started to wriggle in his arms.

“Dada stop!” she demanded, and he grinned as he tickled her a bit longer, catching her before she could slip down.

“Where is your papa, Kiseki?”

“Papa out.”

“Ooh, is papa praying?”

She nodded and pouted slightly. “Ki no.”

Ohno nodded in understanding. Usually, Nino allowed their daughter to accompany him all the time to stay at his side during his prayers or if he spent time out in his garden. It didn’t matter what time or what the weather was. Ohno had been worried first, but Ohno allowed him to come as often as he wanted as well. (As long as Nino didn’t explicitly tell him that he wanted to be alone for the day. But then he wouldn’t take Kiseki as well.) That had helped Ohno to realise that with Niji and Yoru, Nino had his ways to make sure that Kiseki was warm and wouldn’t wander off.

“Tonight is the full moon. Some kind of special moon or something like that…” Ohno mumbled. He couldn’t remember fully. But he knew that Nino would be back late and that that particular moon meant that he would be fully immersed and couldn’t look after Kiseki and making sure she was safe and warm. “Your Papa will be out late. Way after your bedtime, so you have to be content with me,” he teased her.

Kiseki giggled and babbled something that didn’t make any sense to Ohno, but he tickled her again, grinning when she squealed in happiness.

“Dada work?”

“I just finished working. So we can play something. Do you have any preferences?”

“Fish look?”

“Of course. And we can feed them, okay?”

Kiseki nodded and put her arms around Ohno’s neck so that he could pick her up. He carried her out of the room, singing a children’s rhyme with Kiseki as she started the song she learnt just a few days ago from Jun.

He brought her to the kitchen, deciding that if they went to feed the fishes, they could also have dinner outside. That way, he would not need to clean his chambers but just needed to put Kiseki into the tub later that night.

“Jay-jay,” Kiseki cheered when she saw the knight coming around the corner.

Jun grimaced slightly at the nickname that Nino had talked Kiseki into using. Ohno knew that the other didn’t really like that nickname, but couldn’t be angry at Kiseki (and Ohno was sure that he liked it secretly).

“My princess,” Jun said with a small chuckle after he had overcome his surprise at seeing them. He dropped to a bow, smiling when Kiseki clapped her hands and giggled at his antics since she didn’t understand the meaning. “Second king.”

“Stop it with that,” Ohno snorted. “Did you need me for something? Because I was about to take Kiseki out to the stream to watch and feed the fishes. And have a picnic, right?”

“Uhn, food,” she agreed. “Tum growl.”

“There, you see? I have a very important duty right now.”

“Where is the king?”

“There will be a night wake, I believe.”

“I see,” Jun mumbled and shrugged. “No, I suppose I can wait until tomorrow then.”

“Is it something important?”

Jun shook his head and motioned at Kiseki, who was tugging at Ohno’s robe because she wanted to go out finally.

“Do you want to accompany us? Kiseki it would be fun to go with Jun, right?”

“Like fishes?”

“If I like fishes, little princess?” Jun clarified, and she nodded with big eyes.

“The fishes the king chose for the second king are magnificent,” he agreed with a smile and Ohno was grinning happily at the praise.

Nino had taken a week to make the stream and the part around it for Ohno. He said it was because Ohno had taken so much time to create the little garden that he wanted to give something back. And the kois he had chosen were very beautiful. He liked sitting on the bridge over the stream with Kiseki on his lap, watching them and thinking of names for them. Or more likely, Kiseki would point at them randomly and babble words as to name them, which was utterly adorable.

“Jay-jay come,” she decided then, and Ohno chuckled as he nodded in agreement when Jun looked at him questioningly.

“I’m fine with it. And if you come you could carry the food while I carry the princess,” he said with a grin, because he knew that Jun would agree more easily if he thought he was helping Ohno in any way.

“Okay,” Jun agreed. “Why don’t you go there then and I go to the kitchens? Any wishes, princess?”

Kiseki’s face scrunched up, and she glanced at Ohno, before waving Jun closer so that she could whisper in his hear. “No, greens!”

Ohno snorted slightly and swung her somewhat from side to side. “You will eat your greens, Missy,” he scolded. “You know what papa says, right?”

Kiseki pouted slightly at the reminded and mumbled something that Ohno didn’t bother to decipher. Jun hid a smile and then winked at Kiseki.

“I will make sure the chef gives as little as possible.”

Kiseki’s face cleared slightly, and Ohno shook his head.

“Oh, if you see Masaki, tell him he could join us as well if he wants. Or does he has his rituals to follow tonight?”

Jun shook his head, and a small smile was on his face at the thought of their healer. “No, he follows the cycle of the new moon more than the full moon like the king. And even then he doesn’t do all as he also follows the new religion.”

“A complicated fellow. But then please call him. The more, the merrier, right Kiseki?”

“Unc too,” she agreed happily. “We play.” Then she looked at Ohno with a stern look. “Dada out. We go. Fishes wait.”

Ohno grinned at the scolding but nodded as he waved at Jun to carry Kiseki out finally and brought her to the stream. “Kiseki are you cold?” he asked with a grimace, as he realised he hadn’t brought an outer robe for the girl, while at the same time telling himself that it would be fine. It was not yet that chilly outside, and he was sure that Jun or Masaki would bring an outer robe if Nino hadn’t already made sure that she would be fine, to begin with.

“Nuhu,” Kiseki said wriggling in his arms to be let down. Ohno smiled and put her on her own two feet. She wobbled for a second, and he put a hand on her back so that she wouldn’t fall over until she steadied herself. She held to the sleeve of his robe as she led the way to her favourite spot.

“Papa spell.”

“So papa had already thought of all, then,” Ohno chuckled when she nodded with a sombre look on her face which just looked a bit comical on such a little girl.

“Papa warm. Papa kiss, here. Nighty-night,” she explained, pointing at her forehead and hair with a toothy grin and he hummed in understanding. If one of them had to be out when Kiseki would go to bed, they would make sure to tell her goodnight already and kiss her goodnight. She somehow always remembered even when she was still very little. But that made bedtime mostly hassle-free (besides the coming out of bed because of thirst or crankiness because she was too tired while at the same time saying she was not tired).

Kiseki plopped down on her knees as she reached the middle of the bridge, crawling closer to the edge. She held to the wooden rail to keep her from tumbling over and looked down.

Ohno smiled as he sat beside her and played with the loose strands of her hair. It had been in an elaborate up-do for most of the day, but Ohno could tell that Nino had pulled out all the pins already and just bound it with a thread. But that was never enough to hold her unruly hair in place for long.

“Dada Ru?” she asked and pointed at the sky. Ohno looked up and hummed slightly as he shook his head.

“No, it’s Kuu. He’s visiting your Papa and Niji. Yoru is either with your Papa or still hunting for tonight,” he explained as he recognised the giant dragon. “But Yoru is almost as big, ne?”

Kiseki nodded as she stared at the old God she knew from the stories of her Papa. She has not yet met him and was only used to Yoru and Niji.

“Ki meet?”

“Not tonight, my little princess.”

“Papa lone. No, Ki, Papa say. Ki young.”

“Yes, papa is alone with Niji and now Kuu,” Ohno repeated patiently. He knew that it was always hard to grasp for the girl when Nino would leave her behind. It was not as if Nino would be around Kiseki all the time, but it was very seldom that Nino outright told Kiseki she was not allowed to come and was always very curious about what he would do when she wasn’t there.

“And I’m sure Papa will take you when you are a bit older. If Papa said so ne?”

“Dada too?”

Ohno smiled and shook his head as he stroke a strand away from her eyes. “No only Kiseki and papa.”

She wrinkled her forehead since she didn’t quite get it, but he chuckled and looked up when they heard Jun and Masaki coming closer.

“Unc! Jay-jay.”

“Hey, little princess, have you been good to your papa?”

“Papa out,” she explained, and he nodded with a hum.

“And Kiseki is a good girl and won’t cry?” Aiba teased her, and she frowned before she nodded. She usually didn’t cry when one of her fathers weren’t with her after all.

“Then if you can eat your greens tonight for dinner, I have a surprise for you.”

“For Ki?”

“Yes, all for you,” he explained as he helped Jun to prepare a blanket and put the food out.

Ohno lifted an eyebrow at those words. He was not sure if he should allow that surprise or not. Aiba winked at him, and he decided to trust into the other man not to have brought something he or Nino would not be okay with.

“Dada food. Ki eat.”

“No, little princess. Before you can eat, we shall feed the fishes, right?”

Kiseki frowned at his words but then nodded in agreement, knowing fully well that both of her fathers always told her first to make sure the animals and others were fed as well. She got up on shaky legs again, grinning when Ohno helped her stand and then tugged at the small bag that Ohno had brought.

“Fish food,” she demanded.

He chuckled and opened the bag to allow her to take out the food for the fishes. He still held her carefully as she leant over the railing to empty her hands above the fishes, calling out some nonsense that Ohno thought was meant to be the prayer that Nino usually said over their meals. Ohno had started to use that saying as well as Nino wanted Kiseki to know that at least even if she decided not to follow his religion fully.

The three handfuls that Kiseki threw out would never be enough if it were the lone food of the fishes, but since they usually lived in the stream and would eat insects, it was more than sufficient this way.

“So now we can eat,” Ohno praised her and ruffled her hair, grinning when she held out her hands with a frown.

“Dada dirt.”

“Right, little princess. I’m sure we have a wet cloth over at the blanket.”

“I brought something to clean our hands before we eat,” Jun agreed when they arrived, and Kiseki walked over to show him her hands. She held still as he washed them thoroughly and then grinned as she kissed his cheek, saying thank you. She wandered over to her father, plopping down in front of him to lean against him as it was still a bit hard for her to sit straight for a more extended time.

Aiba chuckled and handed out the food that their cook had made for them. There was just a tiny frown on Kiseki’s face as she saw the vegetables on her plate, but she started eating them without too much of a complaint under the watchful eyes of the three adults who also ate in silence.

After they had finished their meal, Masaki made sure to say the prayers for after the meal and took care of the leftovers, before turning around and looking into a very hopeful and excited face of Kiseki.

“Eat greens,” she said a bit shyly.

“Yes, you were a very good girl,” he agreed, to which she grinned happily. Ohno chuckled and hugged her for a second before Aiba knelt in front of her. He opened the small bag he always carried around. He carefully pulled out a handmade kite, with beautifully pressed flowers and in the favourite colours of the girl. Kiseki’s eyes widened as she took it carefully.

“Your papa told me you wanted to have one to play with when you saw the children in the city play with it.”

“Uhn,” she whispered. “All Ki?”

“Yes, this is for you, little princess. I’m sure your fathers will help you to play with it, ne?”

“Dada fly?”

“Not tonight, Kiseki. But we can go out tomorrow all day, okay? It’s too late now, and we don’t want to lose it in the dark.”

Kiseki pouted for a second, but then she nodded in understanding. Ohno nudged her softly, and she looked up. “What should you say?”

“Oh. Unc Thank!” she cried out, putting the kite down beside her father, she jumped to her feet and hugged Aiba around the neck, kissing his cheek soundly. Aiba chuckled, and she went back to Ohno to snuggle against her father.

“Are you sleepy, little princess?”

“Ki no night,” she denied but yawned.

“Not even a tiny bit?” he asked and showed her a tiny space between thumb and his pointer finger. She frowned and then made an even smaller space.

“So much.”

“That’s really not much,” Ohno agreed. “But I think we still should go inside. We should put away your new kite.”

“Kite sleep?”

“I don’t know if kites sleep. But if it needs to fly tomorrow maybe it needs rest,” he agreed.

“Kite bed?”

“I don’t think they need to be in beds,” Ohno chuckled. “But maybe on your desk in our chambers.”

She frowned but then nodded as she carefully picked it up and hugged it to her chest.

“Dada carry. Please.”

“Okay, I can do that,” he agreed and looked at the other two.

“We’ll take care of the mess,” Jun promised, and Aiba nodded.

“After a bit more stargazing, I suppose?” Jun grinned and nodded in agreement.

“Okay. So tell your uncles goodnight, little princess.”

“Goodnight. Jay-jay, Unc,” she said, and Ohno hid a grin against her hair when Jun hit Aiba for giggling at the nickname.

Masaki was still grinning as he got up to his knees to kiss the top of her head and wished her a sincere goodnight. Jun followed suit, and as Ohno walked down the path to their chambers, the little girl had already fallen asleep before they even entered the castle. He sighed as this meant that there would be no bath tonight and grimaced at the thought of Nino scolding him the next morning, but he would take that when it came to that, he thought, as he carefully took off the robe from his daughter and put her into bed. He carefully took the Kite from her to put it down safely and settled down to write about that day.

Ohno had started a diary with short entries and drawings the day Kiseki had been born (honestly it had been two days later, but he had made sure to start at the first day Kiseki had come into their life). He wanted to share it with her when she was older and hoped that it would show her how much she meant to him and Nino. After all, she was their little miracle.

It was late when he opened the window to let Yoru in and frowned. “Aren’t you with Kazu?”

“He sent me,” Yoru replied with a grumble. “He told me to tell you to go to sleep.”

“He will stay out?”

Yoru nodded. “He wants to greet the morning light as well to complete the cycle.”

Ohno nodded with a hum. “Will you go back to him to look after him?”

“Niji does. I was told to guard the little princess and his lover.”

Ohno chuckled but nodded without a fight as he stretched. He left the window open so that Yoru could decide where he wanted to stay during the night as he got ready for the night. He climbed under the covers beside Kiseki who babbled in her sleep and kissed her forehead, humming low in his throat to make sure she stayed asleep as he settled down for the night.

He knew better than to argue with a dragon about an order from their king and even if Yoru listened rather to him than to Nino Nino would just send Niji and Niji tended to glare at him if he was not at Nino’s side and he could sleep better without that.

Ohno petted Yoru’s head as the dragon settled on top of his chest and fell to sleep.

A/N: Okay, I’m going to end this chapter here. It was supposed to be the last, but at this rate, it will just blow up. Sorry to everybody who hoped I would write the ceremony of them showing Kiseki to their people but I didn’t really feel comfortable writing that. And sorry for the lack of Nino

Chapter Text

Nino watched his little girl as she bent down to dodge the kick of Jun intensely. He was worried that she would get hurt by Jun, but at the same time, he knew that Jun would never hurt his princess and that Kiseki was good at this.

He sighed as he leant back, smiling when he felt the presence of Satoshi beside him. “There you are. Where have you gone to this morning?”

“There was a break in one of the bridges in the village. I went to observe the damage,” Ohno sighed as he shrugged.

“You could’ve woken me. I would have come with you.”

“Indeed, my love, I know that. But even if it was an urgent matter, it did not need us both to oversee the damage and decide on how to proceed. We need the bridge for goods. It was old, so just repairing would have been futile as I’m sure the old wood would have given away again. Yoru helped me strengthen it for the moment, I’m sure you can do so as well this afternoon, and they will build a new one beside it and then rip it down so that there are no injuries.”

“I see. I will have a look later then. What else did you tell them?”

“To have two men supervise the bridge all time, to make sure no children play on it, and only one horse cart after the next would be allowed to cross it and no more.”

Nino hummed, and his eyes wandered back to Kiseki, who was still concentrated on her training.

“Her footwork has gotten better,” Ohno observed, and he hummed in agreement.

“Still angry with me about this?” Nino asked, and Ohno shrugged.

“I was never angry with you, my love. I understand your wish for her to learn combat. I merely thought it was too early. We have no one knowledgeable in training such young children, and there were no other children around to learn with her.”

Nino nodded as he sighed and got up after he was sure the training was coming to an end.

Kiseki looked up when she heard her father and grinned brightly. “Papa! Did you watch?”

“Of course, sweetheart,” he chuckled and motioned to Jun. Kiseki’s eyes widened comically as she turned to her teacher who was looking down at her with a lifted eyebrow.

She bowed in front of him and thanked her before giggling as he did the same and praised her for her excellent work.

Nino grinned as he picked her up and hugged her tightly for a second. “Your daddy is home.”

“Welcome back, daddy!” she yelled excitedly as she saw him. “Papa and I have trained with Jay-jay. I got better, right?”

“Yes, you did great, my little princess. Did you listen to your Papa this morning?”

The little girl nodded and grinned as she held out her arms to be picked up by Ohno, who took her into his arms and kissed her forehead.

“You should take a bath now, though.”

Kiseki wrinkled her nose unhappily at the thought of having a bath, but she nodded under the strict looks of her father. “But I want to play with the naginata.”

“It’s not a game, Kiseki,” Nino said with a sigh. “And not today. I am not in the mood for that.”

“Daddy then?”

“I can’t fight using that,” Ohno said with a chuckle. “I’m sorry.”

“Ki can show you,” she offered excitedly. “But Papa is better than me, but I learnt a lot already. So I can show you a bit. Papa can show you the rest.”

“You heard your Papa. Not today,” Ohno reminded her gently. “And I don’t want to learn using the naginata. I am fine with the sword.”

She pouted but nodded then in agreement. Nino sighed in relief when she calmed down, and Ohno winked at him. He kissed his cheek and moved her on his arms.

“Then let’s go take that bath. Papa has to look for something in the village, so it’s just the two of us.”

She nodded and turned to Nino to hug him around the neck and kiss his cheek. “Bye-bye papa. Be careful.”

Nino snorted and rubbed her cheeks. “Sure thing. Be a good girl and listen to daddy.”

“Yes!” she cried out. Ohno grinned and put her down.

“Clean away your things then. Don’t let Jun do that for you, just because he doesn’t scold you,” Ohno reminded him. Jun clicked his tongue but then allowed Kiseki to clean the equipment they had used for the training. It felt wrong to him to ask the princess to do so herself even if he was known to be strict with everybody else.

Ohno watched her a second longer before he looked at Nino and smiled. He stepped closer to kiss the sweet lips, as it was tough for him to hold back. “She’s right, though. Be careful and take care. Take someone with you if you want to look at the bridge.”

“I will, especially since I’m not sure which one you mean. The one close to the gate?”

Ohno nodded. “And I will make sure our little girl is cleaned up by the time you are back.”

“Okay. I will ask Masaki to come with me. I need things from the temples, and I will bring her birthday present.”

“Do so,” Ohno agreed with a chuckle. He cupped his face to kiss him again. “And stop looking so worried.”

“Kuu…”

“Kuu told you to be prepared.”

“I don’t want to scare her.”

Ohno chuckled as he shook his head. “Scaring our little princess? She grew up with dragons. She will be happy to meet him finally. She wanted to do so for the last years.”

“I wished she would be able to meet Morga,” Nino said, looking down. He knew Kuu was good, and he got along well with him. But he missed the mother of the dragons a lot.

“She knows her,” Ohno reminded him with a gentle smile. “She grew up with your stories about her, and I’m pretty sure that she feels for Morga like for a grandmother. Now my love, how about you hurry before he shops close and the night comes upon us.”

Nino frowned at his words. “It’s not even midday,” he reminded him, but he was grinning again. “I’m off then.”

Ohno watched him go before he waited for Kiseki to come over to bring her to their chambers and help her take a bath to get clean.

—

“Daddy, why do I need to wear this?” Kiseki asked with a frown and tugged at the heavy cloth of her robe.

It was a very festive robe made from blue and yellow to symbolise light and darkness, but it was of course not as comfortable to wear for her as the light robe she usually wore.

Ohno hummed as he made sure that the belt was secured around her waist and then knelt in front of her.

“Tonight is a very special night, Kiseki.”

“Why?”

Ohno giggled slightly at the confused look, and for a moment, his breath caught in his throat as he remembered that after tonight, Kiseki wouldn’t be a little girl in most eyes anymore. It was so strange how a night could change everything he thought mostly since he was sure that the next day he would still wake up and see Kiseki as his little baby girl and not a bit more matured one.

“Do you remember what day it is tomorrow, little princess?”

Kiseki frowned and then her eyes lightened up. “My birthday!” she cried out happily and jumped up and down. “Jay-Jay told me we would celebrate with the others.”

“We will, tomorrow afternoon into the night to celebrate your birthday, yes.”

“I am going to be six,” she said and then gasped slightly. “Daddy, daddy, do you know what that means?”

Ohno looked at her mock-confused and shook his head as he tilted it to the side and finally closed the cord around the belt. “No, what does it mean?”

“Uncle Masa told me that when I’m six, I will start school with him and the other children!”

“Oh, really?”

She nodded excitedly and clapped her hands as she jumped from one foot to the other. “I will learn how to write and all those important things,” she gasped. “I will be a big girl then.”

“Yes, you will,” Ohno chuckled. “But that will not start directly tomorrow,” he calmed her down. “Because first, we will celebrate the birthday of our princess.”

“Okay. But do I need to wear this?”

“Tomorrow?”

“Uhn…”

“Yes, Papa and I will have festive robes as well. So you are not the only one. But we have an official ceremony to celebrate your birthday, so it is custom. Especially since you will be a big girl.”

“Do I need to wear them all the time?”

Ohno shook his head with a chuckle. “No, only on special occasions like your birthday.”

She pouted since she didn’t like the thought and then wrinkled her forehead. “But daddy? Why do I have to wear them now?”

“Because, sweetheart, tonight we’ll go up to the tower,” Nino explained. She turned around in surprise as she hadn’t heard him come in and blinked.

“Why?”

“Because that’s the place that Kuu wants to meet you the first time, sweetheart. It’s also the reason why the ceremony tomorrow is so late in the afternoon. We’ll stay up late tonight.”

“Daddy too?” Kiseki asked, and Nino looked at Ohno who shrugged slightly. He didn’t mind coming with them or waiting in their chambers, honestly. It was whatever the Gods had decided.

“Yes, daddy will come too. It’s a family matter. But first, it will be just the two of us in our garden, okay?”

Ohno grinned as the question was more towards him than Kiseki and nodded. “It’s fine with me.”

“Will we dance papa?”

Nino nodded softly and kissed her hair. “We will pray and cleanse our souls.”

Ohno hid a grin since it would be mostly Nino doing that and Kiseki copying him. She was utterly fascinated with his religion even if she didn’t fully comprehend it. Then again, none of them sat her down daily to read the writings of the Gods as Nino’s family had done with her or Aiba had been forced to do at the temples. Still, she thought Nino’s religion to be more fun and interesting than Aiba’s and automatically followed those teachings more.

“Shall I have food for you prepared?” Ohno asked Nino, who shook his head.

“No, we can have dinner together. Kiseki come over to me for a second. I want to make sure you won’t dirty your robes for the rest of the day.”

“Papa, can’t I just wear them when we meet Kuu?”

“You will get more comfortable in them if you wear them for longer,” Nino said with a sigh. “I know they are not as comfortable as your normal ones.”

“I like Papa’s and daddy’s more. These have so many layers. It’s unfair. Why don’t you wear such things!?”

“Because we are men, little princess,” Ohno said, wincing when she huffed and stomped her feet in annoyance.

“Not fair!”

“Kiseki,” Nino scolded her, and she fell silent but kept glaring at her father. “Will you please calm down.”

“It’s not fair,” she said with a huff. “I can’t move well in them. Unfair! I want to be like Papa and daddy!”

Nino sighed and rubbed his forehead at the words. Ohno wanted to allow her to take layers off, but he knew that there were things that Kiseki had to get used to as a princess, and wearing ceremonial robes was one of the things if she liked it or not.

“Kiseki,” Nino started softer this time and got to his knees. He held her shoulders to make her look at him. “If I wear the same kind of robes tonight and tomorrow will you try your best?”

“Papa will?”

“Mhm… It’s not the first time I wore women’s robes. They are prettier than the ones for men as well.”

“Papa wore them when he fought the bad king. Also for a while after we met. I fell in love with him then because he looked so pretty,” Ohno informed her, and her eyes grew wide.

“Really?”

“It’s hard to move in them, but people normally underestimate you if you wear them. You might need to train a bit harder, but you will be stronger than most men then.”

“Eh? Why that?”

“Because if you can fight with restricted movements, you can react faster and with more strength when you take off the outer layers, Kiseki. It’s all about the training. And even if there is no fight, Kiseki, you need to wear those clothes. If you like them or not. You are the princess. And as such you need to behave right.”

“I don’t understand that…”

“You don’t have to. Not yet, at least,” Ohno promised her, and she nodded.

“If papa wears the same, I will wear these.”

“Okay then I will do the same,” Nino said with a sigh. He rubbed her cheeks dry with the pads of his thumb, before checking for any dirty streaks and then made sure that her clothes were straight before using his magic to keep things in place.

“My little princess is really grown up now,” Ohno said as she turned around once to present herself to her fathers.

“Am I pretty as papa?”

“Very pretty,” Ohno agreed, giggling when Nino blushed. But Nino was always gorgeous and elegant. Regardless of what he did, it was as if he couldn’t help himself.

“Yay,” she cheered and jumped up to hug him around the neck. Ohno chuckled and hugged her tightly. He put her down when there was a knock at the door and allowed whoever inside.

Jun bowed in front of the three lowly and looked up after being allowed. His eyes fell on Kiseki who blushed slightly as she held on Ohno’s hand.

“You are very pretty tonight, my princess.”

She grinned proudly and held her head high at those words.

“The people will be enthralled by you tomorrow.”

Nino very badly hid a snort at those words, since Kiseki was still way too young to bring out such feelings from other people. And she would run around with the children of the village. There was no such thing, but it was cute to see how happy the compliment made her.

“I think there is still time for people to think of her like that,” Ohno said sharply, and Jun nodded with a grimace. “Of course, the second king. I am here to inform you that everything is ready for the banquet tomorrow. All is needed for you to take a last look.”

“I will do so in a bit. Then if there are any changes I desire, they should be done in the morning.”

“As you wish, any other things?” Jun’s eyes wandered to Nino, who shook his head with a hum. “Just make sure that there are enough sweets and that the guards are in place to make sure nobody gets lost tomorrow. And for tonight I don’t want anybody close to the tower.”

“Of course, your highness,” Jun sighed.

Ohno chuckled at Jun and shook his head. “Now please stop these formalities.”

Jun frowned and crossed his arms in front of his chest. “It’s just polite.”

“And you like that it gets on our nerves,” Nino piqued up, rolling his eyes when Jun smirked slightly.

“Masaki asked if you would need his assistance?”

“Not tonight. It’s a family matter. But I am free tomorrow around lunchtime if he wants to talk.”

“Good, then I tell him.” Jun stared at them for a moment longer, and Ohno rolled his eyes.

“And yes, you two are allowed to accompany us tomorrow for a late breakfast in the chamber beside the grand hall. We can have a small birthday celebration then,” he teased, laughing when Jun’s eyes lit up at the prospect. “Now if you would leave us alone? And if you see any servants, tell them that we would like to take dinner soon. Kazu and Kiseki want to go out tonight.”

Jun nodded and then left them alone. Nino sighed and leant against Ohno for a second. “I shall change then,” he mumbled when Kiseki stared at him hopefully.

“Do you need help?”

“No, I’ll be fine. It’s quicker if I do it alone.”

Ohno stuck out his tongue and playfully held his hands against Kiseki’s ears. “There is nothing I would do with her close by.”

“Sure… That’s why you did absolutely nothing to my body yesterday night.”

“Mhm… You tasted delicious,” Ohno hummed, laughing when Nino hit him before leaving.

Kiseki looked at him curiously, but Ohno grinned down at her. “What do you want to do?”

“Eat?”

“When your papa is ready dinner should be served.”

“Will you tell me the story as to how papa met Niji?”

“I can do that,” Ohno agreed and settled down with her in his lap. Kiseki leant against her father as she listened to the story happily. It was one of her favourites after all.

—

“Are you sleepy?” Nino asked his daughter as he picked her up after his prayers. She nodded slightly and put her head against his shoulder.

“I’m a bit tired,” she mumbled, hiding a yawn at his cheek as she nestled her face against the crook of his neck.

“It’s late, I know, sweetheart. But it’s almost midnight. Do you see the moon?”

“Uhn, it’s big and bright,” she mumbled, peeking from her hiding place before snuggling up against her father once more.

“It is,” he agreed and smiled as she put her arms around her. “Do you know what it means?”

“My birthday is coming closer,” she whispered, and again he agreed.

“Let’s go back to daddy and then up to the tower for you to meet Kuu.”

“Will he like me, papa?”

“Of course, sweetheart. He already loves you.”

“Even if he never met me?”

“Yes, his eyes see everything, and you are our gift from him, our little miracle.”

“Huh…” she mumbled, and he smiled as she came to a rest against his shoulder. He knew that she didn’t understand how special she was to him and Ohno, but he didn’t mind that. Maybe she would in the future, and even if not for him and Ohno she would be the biggest miracle and wonder they’ve experienced.

“Does he like daddy?”

“He respects daddy a lot,” Nino agreed.

“Does that mean liking?”

“In a way. It’s a bit complicated.”

She grumbled slightly but didn’t ask further. Nino looked down at her hair as he carried her back to the castle.

He smiled when Ohno greeted them at the door and kissed his lips. “We’re back, Satoshi.”

“Welcome back, my love, my little princess.” When there was no answer from Kiseki, he chuckled. “Have you fallen asleep?”

“No,” she muttered and shook her head. “But I am sleepy.”

“Aww very soon we can go to bed,” Ohno promised, and Nino nodded.

Kiseki looked up from her hiding space to look at Ohno and then blinked a bit. She hadn’t seen Ohno in his festive robes, and now she was amazed to see the dark blue colour that matched the blue of his. With the yellow cloth from Nino’s robes, it was clear that hers were a mix of them.

“Eh? Papa and daddy and I are the same?”

“Yup,” Nino said with a chuckle. “Night and day,” he explained, giggling at her confused look.

“We thought you would like that,” Ohno said instead, and she nodded with a grin.

“It’s nice,” she agreed more alert now as Nino carried her through the castle with Ohno by their side. Ohno opened the door to the tower and followed them up. At the top Nino put Kiseki to her feet and she curiously looked around. It was the first time she was allowed to be up here.

There were beautiful paintings of the moon and the sun and different dragons, and she wanted to observe them closer, but before she could take a step, Nino held her around the waist. “Kuu is arriving,” he whispered, and she looked from Nino to Ohno who were both kneeling with Yoru and Niji settled on their sides. She mimicked them a bit nervously and played with the cord around her waist as she tried very hard to not look up as both of her fathers had their heads bowed.

After all, Nino had explained to her to not look directly at the Gods if they were not allowed yet, and she wanted to make him proud! Ohno’s hand was calmly holding her hand, and it calmed Kiseki down immediately. When both of her fathers weren’t nervous, there was no reason for her to be.

Kuu looked at them in silence for a moment, until a chuckle vibrated to the room.

“Children of the dragons,” he greeted them, and Nino bowed a bit deeper before looking up, and carefully told Kiseki to do the same. “And their partner and father,” he greeted Ohno who nodded in gratitude and looked up. He met Kuu’s eyes for a moment before looking at Kiseki with a small smile.

She stared at Kuu with big eyes, and her lips were open as she stared at the old dragon. She had never seen such a giant dragon before after all. He rubbed her cheek, and she blinked.

“You’ve grown well under the teachings of your fathers,” Kuu said, and Kiseki blushed slightly at the praise which seemed to be much more serious coming from the dragon than from any other person.

“Thank you,” she whispered.

“You are a true child of the dragons, little princess. Just as your father is.”

Ohno bit his lips as he could see that Nino was blushing under the words as well and had hard to hold back as to not squeal at their twin cuteness.

“So that you would grow even stronger I have a birthday gift for you,” he said, and Kiseki looked at him in surprise and a little bit of shock.

Ohno bit his lips as not to laugh and caressed her cheek.

“Thank you. I don’t need a present. I am happy to be blessed by you,” she whispered and Ohno could sense the pride radiating from Nino at those words.

“Little princess, it’s a gift that all children of the dragons have when the time arrives,” he explained. “It also means that we trust you, and we accept you. But it also means you have a new kind of responsibility.”

Kiseki nodded in understanding and nibbled on her lips as she figured out what to say. Ohno was sure that nothing would be wrong, but this was something nobody could teach her, so he was curious.

“I am flattered, and I will promise you to do my best.”

“I’m sure your fathers will help you.”

“Of course,” Nino said, and Ohno nodded in agreement, smiling at his daughter.

“We will always be by her side and help her if problems or difficulties arise that she can’t face alone.”

“Very good then,” Kuu said, and Ohno blinked as there was a light coming from the moon. “This is the last gift the mother of dragons presented us with. I trust you to take good care of him as I know that she would have been honoured to have her heir bound with the child of your father,” he explained.

Nino perked up at those words, and Ohno was sure he could see tears glistening in his eyes as a tiny baby dragon appeared on the floor. It was snuggled up around his tail, and its colour was a mix of reds and oranges. Ohno wasn’t sure if it looked more like the sunset or the sunrise.

Kiseki cooed, and Ohno chuckled as he played with her hair. “Will you promise to raise it? It’s still a baby, Kiseki. It’s a big responsibility,” Ohno explained.

“Yes, it will be dependent on you. If you leave it, it will die,” Nino continued seriously. “You are still young, so it would be okay for you to wait a bit longer.”

Kiseki looked at all of them one after the other and then nodded. “I understand, and I promise to take good care of it,” she whispered. She moved closer to the baby dragon and very softly touched the head of the dragon with her fingertips.

The small dragon yawned, and its eyes opened at the touch. It nuzzled into her hands and thrilled softly.

Kuu smiled and bowed his head to them. “I will leave you then. Take good care of your dragon, little princess. I will visit again.”

“Uhn,” she whispered and held out her hands for the dragon to climb on her lap and snuggle up to her. She put her forehead against the dragon’s forehead and closed her eyes.

Nino smiled and motioned for Niji and Yoru to already leave, and Ohno knew that they would meet in their chambers after their hunt. The baby dragon would be just as much their responsibility as Kiseki’s.

“Let’s head back, Kiseki. You are sleepy, mh? And your little dragon needs rest as well,” Nino said as he stood with a small groan, stretching out his back.

Ohno chuckled as he got up. “You sound like an old man, my love.”

Nino glared at him, as he went to the door to wait for them.

“Daddy, can you carry us? Our feet are tired.”

Ohno grinned but nodded in agreement. “Hold on tight, my little princess. Don’t let the dragon fall.”

“Uhn,” Kiseki nodded as she held the dragon protectively close to her body. Ohno made sure that the grip was safe around the dragon and then picked her up so that he could carry them both.

“Does your dragon have a name already, sweetheart?”

Kiseki nodded as she snuggled close to her father and was careful as not to let the dragon fall even if Ohno had an arm around them both as well as under them as well.

“Uhn.”

“And will you tell us the name?”

“Sho,” she mumbled, almost half asleep already and Nino giggled.

“Welcome to our family then, Sho,” he said, smiling when the dragon made a sleepy sound in acknowledgement. The future was going to be fun raising the both of them, Ohno thought.

— The End —

Chapter Text

“You’re nervous,” Ohno observed as he came into the room and saw Nino standing at the window. He looked down at their garden and flinched slightly when he heard Ohno came closer.

Ohno smiled and hugged him around the waist. He swayed them from side to side, kissing his neck and nibbling at the sweet skin. He looked out and saw their little girl and Sho playing outside. Their laughter reached them, and he couldn’t help but grin at the happy sight.

“A little bit,” Nino allowed after a while and put his hands on top of Ohno’s hands. He kissed his cheek and sighed softly.

“What is wrong?”

“I can’t help but worry that we have to let her go,” he whispered. “I can’t imagine letting my little girl go away from me.”

“Why should that happen?”

Nino shrugged and nibbled on his lower lip. “I know it’s probably silly.”

“Maybe, but tell me what’s going on in that head of yours?”

“I went to the dragons around her age,” Nino sighed in the end. “It was a great time. I learnt a lot.”

“Yes, your parents died after all. You needed a place to hide and stay,” he reminded him.

“I know… But, there is so much I don’t know about what’s normal and whatnot. I fear that they will tell me that it’s normal for the children in my family to go train away from home.”

“I see. It’s definitely not normal for my family,” Ohno said and hugged him tighter. “And I’m sure if that is a thing you would be able to have a say in it, same with me,” Ohno reminded him.

Nino hummed slightly, but it was clear that he was not entirely sure about it just yet. “Did you talk with Kuu about it?”

“I didn’t even ask Niji,” he whispered in shame.

Ohno sighed and shook his head. “You’re awful sometimes. Talk with them, and I will come with you tonight,” he said then and rubbed his hipbone. “She is our daughter, after all, not only yours or theirs.”

Nino looked up at those words and nodded finally, slumping against him. “I can’t let her go, ever.”

“And you don’t have to. I’m sure of it. We all train and educate her the best we can, and Kiseki knows a lot already.”

“More than I had at her age, true,” Nino said and sighed once more. “You think I’m silly?”

“I do, but I do so very often when it comes to you both,” Ohno teased.

“I love you. You know that, right?”

“I do, thank you for talking sense into me,” he said and kissed his lips again lovingly.

Ohno grinned and put his chin on Nino’s shoulder to watch their daughter. “What are they even doing?” he asked in amusement.

Kiseki was climbing up a small hill, waving for Sho to follow her. The little dragon was on the lower end of the slope, and Ohno could already hear him whining for Kiseki to come down already. He didn’t follow her and in the end just slumped down onto the floor, crying in that begging childish voice.

“She is trying to make him climb hills and trees. But Sho is scared.”

“Huh, peculiar.”

“Yes,” Nino sighed. He frowned when Kiseki scolded Sho and decided to, later on, tell her to behave more appropriately with the dragon. Sho was still a toddler after all, and he knew that Kiseki expected more from the dragon than he would be able to do especially since she compared him with Yoru and Niji.

“How did your morning go so far?”

“Good. I managed to watch a play by the children in the children’s home. It was fun. We talked afterwards a little, and I promised them extra fundings for gifts for the children.”

“Sounds good. The work on the new mill is going well. And there were two quarrels I managed to end,” Ohno mumbled. “I would rather have gone with you, though.”

“You want to come with me chide Kiseki for trying to make Sho climb up to heights he doesn’t feel comfortable with?”

“Nah, I will be the good father and comfort her afterwards.”

“Traitor.” Nino pouted, but soon enough he was giggling and wriggled in Ohno’s arm. He squealed a minute later since Ohno bit his shoulder. “Let me go, you awful man.”

Ohno chuckled but allowed him to move back. He kissed his lips again before he left. Ohno watched Kiseki and Sho for a while longer until he could see Nino appearing outside as well, calling their daughter over and picking Sho up. He swayed the still slightly whiny dragon until he calmed down and talked with Kiseki for a while.

Ohno turned around to leave their chamber as he didn’t want to spy on them and went to talk with the staff about everything needed for the next few days and if there was anything he and Nino needed to do.

—

Nino stared at Kuu in silence for a while, and Ohno squeezed his hand with a small chuckle. He could feel that Nino was overly nervous, and he felt sorry for his lover.

He also knew that Nino didn’t know how to question Kuu’s decisions without being disrespectful. Something that Ohno had no problems with.

“We were wondering about something,” Ohno started, rubbing Nino’s hands so that he would calm down.

“What about?” Kuu asked, and Ohno smiled softly. He had gotten used to converse with the old dragon as they had regular meetings about what to change in their country. Not as often as Nino of course, but it has gotten a lot better.

“About Kiseki. Kazu reminded me how he was trained by your kind when he was her age, and now we are wondering if that is mandatory. We both can’t think of her leaving us to go with you.”

Kuu laughed softly at the words and Nino flinched slightly while Ohno pursed his lips.

“He was a special case, indeed. He was not even gifted his dragon, right?”

“No, I found Niji hurt in a river in the mountains when I ran away. He told me his mother was killed,” he whispered.

“I remember that,” Kuu said. “You wanted to bring him home, so you made your way to our nest. Ah, sweet memories. Of course, we would take you in. You are the child of the dragons and almost died in your quest. We also knew you wouldn’t be able to learn with your family about us and your fate. So we took you in. But we normally don’t take in humans. Even if you are our children, of course, we will shelter you if need.”

“So you won’t take Kiseki?” Nino breathed, sinking against Ohno in relief when that sank in.

“Of course not,” Kuu said again.

“Aren’t you glad?” Ohno whispered to Nino, who nodded and pressed his face against his shoulder. “Thank you.”

“Thank you,” Nino agreed a bit choked.

Kuu laughed at their reaction and Ohno kissed Nino’s head as the other man still had problems at looking back at Kuu.

“I will leave you two alone tonight then.”

“Yes, thank you for your time Kuu.”

“Of course.”

Ohno watched him as he left and then hugged Nino tightly. He pressed his lips against his hair and swayed Nino in his arms as the other man fought his tears. He had been all worked up for nothing it seemed.

“Are you okay?”

“Uhn… Really relieved right now,” he whispered.

“Shall we go to our chambers so that you can see Ki?”

“Yes, please,” Nino whispered, and Ohno helped him to his feet. He brought him down to their chambers, Nino was slightly shaky on his feet, but finally, they made their way down.

In their chamber, Nino managed to let go of Ohno’s arm and stumbled over to Kiseki. He knelt in front of the small futon. He smiled as he caressed her hair and kissed her forehead. “My little princess,” he whispered.

Ohno chuckled and played with Nino’s long strands, before bending down and putting a kiss on top of his head. Sho thrilled questioningly, and Ohno smiled down at the small dragon.

“It’s fine, you want to cuddle as well?” he asked him, and Sho jumped to his feet. Ohno giggled as he picked him up and settled down on his bedroll with Sho on his lap. He patted his head and looked at the small dragon as he rolled up on his lap and fell to slumber.

Nino was grinning when he came back and settled down beside Ohno. “Cuddle bug?” he asked motioning to the baby dragon, and Ohno nodded.

“Mhm… Kiseki is too fidgety in her sleep and too adventurous during the day. He likes being with us sometimes.”

“I know,” Nino said with a sigh and hugged him around the middle. “I’m sleepy.”

“How long did you actually carry that worry around?”

“A few weeks ago,” he admitted.

“Stupid,” Ohno mumbled and kissed his cheek. “All the worry for nothing. Next time you come to me right away. I don’t mind confronting Kuu. I learnt not to be scared of them too much.”

“My brave king,” Nino teased him. “I talked with Kiseki. She won’t force Sho up onto heights again.”

“That’s good.”

“Yeah, she is pouting though. She wants a dragon that flies to ride on it.”

“She’s young. Flying on dragons seems like fun to her. So don’t be too strict.”

Nino grumbled but nodded slightly. “She has to learn that he is no toy but his being and she can’t just wish him to be like she wants him to be.”

“I know, and we help her the best we can.”

Nino giggled and snuggled closer. “I have to remind myself sometimes that she is her person and that she does things differently than I would like.”

Ohno grinned and hugged him. “True. And I think it’s normal,” he said and put Sho on the bed beside them. He hugged Nino and kissed his lips. “Shall we go to sleep? No more heavy thoughts tonight.”

Nino nodded and climbed into bed beside Ohno, wriggling until he felt comfortable in his robes.

Ohno traced Sho’s back, making sure that the dragon would be able to slip down and go back to Kiseki or join Niji and Yoru when the adult dragons came home with foods to share with the baby dragon.

—

“Sho!” Kiseki yelled, looking for the dragon, giggling when she finally found him hiding behind a tree. She smiled and picked him up. “There you are. Now it’s your turn!”

Sho thrilled, and Kiseki patted his head, before putting him down again and ran away to hide.

“My princess, what are you doing here?”

“Sht,” she hissed, giggling as she hid her face behind her hands to keep it down. “I’m playing hide-and-seek with Sho. If you call out for me, he knows where I am.”

“Oh then I shall leave you to hide,” Jun allowed, and she nodded with a laugh. “Where are your fathers?”

“Papa is in the big hall, and daddy is in the kitchens or something. Daddy wanted to talk about the ceremonial meal in three weeks. And papa is holding hearings. Did something happen?”

“Nothing for you to worry about, my princess. Have fun, okay? But don’t overdo it.”

“Uhn…” she mumbled, screeching when Sho pounced around the corner and on top of her. She giggled and hugged him tightly. “Got me,” she praised, smiling when Sho thrilled proudly.

“Jun? Can we go to the village?”

“I can’t,” Jun said chuckling when the girl pouted. “But Masaki is at the temples. I’m sure you would be able to visit him?”

“I have to ask papa,” she said with a pout.

“Then, away with you.”

She nodded and tickled Sho. Sho squirmed in her arms, and he grinned. “Can you change into something smaller?”

Sho whined softly, and she smiled as she patted him again. “It’s fine. We ran around a lot. You are sleepy ne?”

Sho agreed, and she sighed as she made sure he was safely in her arms as she ran inside to get to her father. She jumped from foot to foot as she was told that there was someone with her papa right now. When she was allowed in, she ran over to Nino who chuckled slightly at her happy face.

“What is up, sweetheart?”

“May Sho and I go to the temples? Uncle Masaki is there. Jun-san said so.”

“If you take Niji with you,” Nino allowed, caressing her hair and putting it in order.

“Where is Niji?”

“I already told him to accompany you. He will be out of sight, though.”

She pouted but then nodded in agreement. “You can play with the other children until Masaki comes home. You two go home together, you hear?”

“Yes, papa.”

“Good girl.”

She tippled around in front of him, nervously for a second. “What is it, sweetheart?”

“May I have some allowance?”

Nino looked at her sternly for a moment, but then he nodded. “Okay,” he mumbled, pulling out his pouch to count some coins into her hands. Her eyes grew wide as she realised she could treat her friends that way and put it away carefully. She kissed Nino on the cheek and then ran out to go to the village.

Nino sighed as he watched her go, still feeling uncomfortable of allowing her out of his sight and then even out of the guarded castle grounds, but he knew it was the right choice.

After making sure there was nothing else for him to do, for now, he left the room in search for Ohno to get some comfort, wondering if the worry he felt about Kiseki would ever lessen, but also knowing that it would probably not.

“Of course not,” Ohno told him when Nino told him what had happened earlier and Nino pouted at his words.

“But I know how to keep your mind off of her for a bit,” Ohno grinned, with a wink.

Nino blushed but hid his head against his shoulder as he allowed him to bring him back to their chambers where they used the time alone to the fullest. And maybe, just maybe, Nino could be more lenient if that was the reward of that.

A/N: Okay my try on an extra chapter probably not that interesting.